H2O15 Eng

SANKOM Sp. z o.o.
Translated by Dagmara Strzeszewska
Audytor H2O
VERSION 1.5
COMPUTER AIDED GRAPHIC DESIGN OF DOMESTIC COLD&HOT WATER SYSTEMS
WITH CIRCULATION
Warszawa, 2013
Audytor H2O 1.5
Table of contents
Chapter 1 Manual contents 12
1.1 Technical support
......................................................................................................................... 12
Chapter 2 Program overview 14
2.1 Entering data......................................................................................................................... 14
2.2 Hydraulic calculations
......................................................................................................................... 15
2.3 Heat calculations
......................................................................................................................... 15
2.4 Data- and calculations
.........................................................................................................................
results check 15
2.5 Results presentation
......................................................................................................................... 16
Chapter 3 Using the program 18
3.1 Program work.........................................................................................................................
area 18
3.2 Help system ......................................................................................................................... 19
3.3 Moving or copying
.........................................................................................................................
project files 19
Chapter 4 Entering data 21
4.1 Creating new.........................................................................................................................
data file 21
4.2 General data ......................................................................................................................... 22
4.3 Room data ......................................................................................................................... 29
4.4 Entering variables
......................................................................................................................... 31
4.5 Installation diagram
.........................................................................................................................
drawing and entering data on system components 32
4.5.1 Floors-
.................................................................................................................................
and ordinates drawing 36
4.5.2 Receivers-
.................................................................................................................................
and equipment drawing 39
4.5.3 Using.................................................................................................................................
pull-down buttons 44
4.5.4 Pipes.................................................................................................................................
drawing and linking 47
4.5.5 Water.................................................................................................................................
sources drawing 55
4.5.6 Heat.................................................................................................................................
sources drawing 57
4.5.7 Fittings-
.................................................................................................................................
and accessories drawing 61
4.5.8 Room .................................................................................................................................
zones drawing 63
4.5.9 System
.................................................................................................................................
components labels drawing 65
4.5.10 Completing
.................................................................................................................................
data in table part 66
4.5.11 Using.................................................................................................................................
ready blocks 67
4.5.12 Own.................................................................................................................................
blocks creation 68
4.5.13 Picture
.................................................................................................................................
fragments copying 71
4.5.14 Other.................................................................................................................................
graphic elements drawing 72
4.6 Deciding on pictures
.........................................................................................................................
layout 78
4.7 Drawing storeys
.........................................................................................................................
plan views 82
4.8 Entering underlays
.........................................................................................................................
into the project 89
4.8.1 Entering
.................................................................................................................................
pictures from a file 90
4.8.2 Scanning
.................................................................................................................................
pictures 90
4.8.3 Entering
.................................................................................................................................
pictures from the clipboard 93
4.8.4 Levelling,
.................................................................................................................................
calibrating, cropping 94
4.8.5 Picture
.................................................................................................................................
correction 100
4.9 Entering table
.........................................................................................................................
data 105
4.9.1 Help
.................................................................................................................................
info 106
1 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

Table of contents
4.9.2 Table
.................................................................................................................................
navigation 106
4.9.3 Sorting
.................................................................................................................................
table contents 107
4.9.4 Fast.................................................................................................................................
table filling 108
4.10 Drawing graphic
.........................................................................................................................
elements: basics of creating and editing 110
4.10.1 Drawing:
.................................................................................................................................
getting started 111
4.10.2 Graphic
.................................................................................................................................
elements drawing 112
4.10.3 Graphic
.................................................................................................................................
elements selecting 115
4.10.4 Graphic
.................................................................................................................................
elements dimensions change and rotating 116
4.10.5 Drawing
.................................................................................................................................
properties 119
4.11 Copying data
.........................................................................................................................
and the picture horizontally 124
4.12 Copying data
.........................................................................................................................
onto next storeys 125
4.13 Drawing functions
.........................................................................................................................
toolbar 126
4.13.1 Water
.................................................................................................................................
sources 128
4.13.2 Heat
.................................................................................................................................
sources 128
4.13.3 Pipes
................................................................................................................................. 129
4.13.4 Receivers
.................................................................................................................................
and equipment 130
4.13.5 Accessories
................................................................................................................................. 131
4.13.6 Appliances
................................................................................................................................. 131
4.13.7 Construction
................................................................................................................................. 132
4.13.8 Graphics
................................................................................................................................. 133
4.13.9 Copying
.................................................................................................................................
and blocks 134
4.13.10 Plan
.................................................................................................................................
views 134
4.14 How to number
.........................................................................................................................
system components 135
4.14.1 Rooms
.................................................................................................................................
numbering 136
4.14.2 Pipe
.................................................................................................................................
systems numbering 136
4.14.3 Water-
.................................................................................................................................
and heat sources, draw-off points and equipment numbering 136
Chapter 5 Calculations 138
5.1 Detecting and
.........................................................................................................................
removing errors 139
Chapter 6 Calculations results 142
6.1 General calculations
.........................................................................................................................
results 143
6.2 Results as the
.........................................................................................................................
graphic installation diagram and plan views 145
6.3 Water sources......................................................................................................................... 147
6.4 Heat sources ......................................................................................................................... 149
6.5 Pipes ......................................................................................................................... 151
6.6 Receivers and.........................................................................................................................
equipment 153
6.7 Accessories......................................................................................................................... 155
6.8 Rooms ......................................................................................................................... 156
6.9 Branches ......................................................................................................................... 157
6.10 Circulation circuits
......................................................................................................................... 158
6.11 Presets ......................................................................................................................... 160
6.12 Error list ......................................................................................................................... 162
6.13 Materials lists
......................................................................................................................... 163
6.13.1 Water
.................................................................................................................................
sources overall table - materials 164
6.13.2 Water
.................................................................................................................................
sources - materials 164
6.13.3 Heat
.................................................................................................................................
sources overall table - materials 165
6.13.4 Heat
.................................................................................................................................
sources - materials 166
6.13.5 Pipes
.................................................................................................................................
overall table - materials 167
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 2
Audytor H2O 1.5
6.13.6 Pipes
.................................................................................................................................
- materials 168
6.13.7 Insulation
.................................................................................................................................
6.13.8 Insulation
.................................................................................................................................
- materials 169
6.13.9 Receivers
.................................................................................................................................
and equipment overall table - materials 170
6.13.10 Receivers
.................................................................................................................................
and equipment - materials 171
6.13.11 Accessories
.................................................................................................................................
6.13.12 Accessories
.................................................................................................................................
- materials 173
6.13.13 Producers
.................................................................................................................................
6.13.14 Producers
.................................................................................................................................
- materials 174
Chapter 7 Menu structure 177
7.1 File ......................................................................................................................... 178
7.1.1 New .................................................................................................................................
data 179
7.1.2 Open.................................................................................................................................
data 179
7.1.3 Save.................................................................................................................................
data 180
7.1.4 Save.................................................................................................................................
data as 181
7.1.5 Save.................................................................................................................................
as DXF or DWG 182
7.1.6 Save.................................................................................................................................
as EMF or WMF 183
7.1.7 Copy.................................................................................................................................
to Windows clipboard 184
7.1.8 Print
.................................................................................................................................
format 184
7.1.9 Print
.................................................................................................................................
preview 190
7.1.10 Print
................................................................................................................................. 191
7.1.11 Plot.................................................................................................................................
format 192
7.1.12 Plot.................................................................................................................................
preview 195
7.1.13 Plot................................................................................................................................. 196
7.1.14 Close
................................................................................................................................. 197
7.1.15 Recently
.................................................................................................................................
opened projects 198
7.2 Edit ......................................................................................................................... 198
7.2.1 Undo
................................................................................................................................. 199
7.2.2 Redo
................................................................................................................................. 200
7.2.3 Cut................................................................................................................................. 200
7.2.4 Copy
................................................................................................................................. 200
7.2.5 Paste
................................................................................................................................. 200
7.2.6 Delete
................................................................................................................................. 201
7.2.7 Insert
.................................................................................................................................
row 201
7.2.8 Delete
.................................................................................................................................
row 201
7.2.9 Search
................................................................................................................................. 201
7.2.10 Replace
................................................................................................................................. 203
7.2.11 Search
.................................................................................................................................
next 204
7.2.12 Next
.................................................................................................................................
storey 205
7.2.13 Copy
.................................................................................................................................
left 205
7.2.14 Copy
.................................................................................................................................
right 205
7.2.15 Create
.................................................................................................................................
block 206
7.3 View ......................................................................................................................... 206
7.3.1 Customize
.................................................................................................................................
toolbars 207
7.3.2 Toolbars
................................................................................................................................. 212
7.3.3 Drawing
.................................................................................................................................
properties 213
7.3.4 Pictures
.................................................................................................................................
window layout 217
7.3.4.1
.....................................................................................................................................
Table on the left 218
7.3.4.2
.....................................................................................................................................
Table on the right 218
3 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

Table of contents
7.3.4.3
.....................................................................................................................................
Table at the bottom 219
7.3.4.4
.....................................................................................................................................
Picture at the top 220
7.3.5 Zoom
.................................................................................................................................
+ 221
7.3.6 Zoom
.................................................................................................................................
- 221
7.3.7 Zoom
.................................................................................................................................
- all 222
7.3.8 Zoom
.................................................................................................................................
- picture range 222
7.3.9 Zoom
.................................................................................................................................
- window 222
7.3.10 Zoom
.................................................................................................................................
dynamic 223
7.3.11 Previous
.................................................................................................................................
scale 223
7.3.12 Repaint
.................................................................................................................................
picture 223
7.3.13 Move
.................................................................................................................................
picture 223
7.3.14 Format
.................................................................................................................................
table 224
7.3.15 Sort.................................................................................................................................
table 224
7.4 Data ......................................................................................................................... 225
7.4.1 General
................................................................................................................................. 226
7.4.2 Rooms
................................................................................................................................. 226
7.4.3 Pictures
................................................................................................................................. 226
7.4.4 Edit.................................................................................................................................
pictures list 226
7.4.5 Variables
................................................................................................................................. 227
7.4.5.1
.....................................................................................................................................
Global 228
7.4.5.2
.....................................................................................................................................
Dimensions 229
7.4.5.3
.....................................................................................................................................
Temperatures 229
7.4.5.4
.....................................................................................................................................
Pressures 229
7.4.5.5
.....................................................................................................................................
Flows 230
7.4.6 Catalogues
................................................................................................................................. 230
7.4.6.1
.....................................................................................................................................
Pipes catalogue 231
7.4.6.2
.....................................................................................................................................
Insulation catalogue 231
7.4.6.3
.....................................................................................................................................
Accessories catalogue 231
7.4.6.4
.....................................................................................................................................
Receivers- and equipment catalogue 231
7.4.6.5
.....................................................................................................................................
Heat sources catalogue 231
7.4.6.6
.....................................................................................................................................
Producers catalogue 231
7.4.7 Picture
.................................................................................................................................
layers format 232
7.4.8 Component
.................................................................................................................................
label format 233
7.5 Calculations......................................................................................................................... 234
7.6 Results ......................................................................................................................... 234
7.6.1 General
................................................................................................................................. 235
7.6.2 Pictures
................................................................................................................................. 236
7.6.3 Water
.................................................................................................................................
sources 236
7.6.4 Heat
.................................................................................................................................
sources 236
7.6.5 Pipes
................................................................................................................................. 236
7.6.6 Receivers
.................................................................................................................................
and equipment 237
7.6.7 Accessories
................................................................................................................................. 237
7.6.8 Rooms
................................................................................................................................. 237
7.6.9 Branches
................................................................................................................................. 238
7.6.10 Circulation
.................................................................................................................................
circuits 238
7.6.11 Presets
................................................................................................................................. 238
7.6.12 Error
.................................................................................................................................
list 239
7.6.13 Materials
.................................................................................................................................
lists 239
7.6.13.1
.....................................................................................................................................
Water sources table - materials 240
7.6.13.2
.....................................................................................................................................
Water sources - materials 241
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 4

Audytor H2O 1.5
7.6.13.3
.....................................................................................................................................
Heat sources table - materials 241
7.6.13.4
.....................................................................................................................................
Heat sources - materials 241
7.6.13.5
.....................................................................................................................................
Pipes table - materials 242
7.6.13.6
.....................................................................................................................................
Pipes - materials 242
7.6.13.7
.....................................................................................................................................
Insulation table - materials 242
7.6.13.8
.....................................................................................................................................
Insulation - materials 243
7.6.13.9
.....................................................................................................................................
Accessories table - materials 243
7.6.13.10
.....................................................................................................................................
Accessories - materials 243
7.6.13.11
.....................................................................................................................................
Receivers and equipment table - materials 244
7.6.13.12
.....................................................................................................................................
Receivers and equipment - materials 244
7.6.13.13
.....................................................................................................................................
Producers table - materials 244
7.6.13.14
.....................................................................................................................................
Producers - materials 245
7.6.14 Picture
.................................................................................................................................
layers format 245
7.6.15 Results
.................................................................................................................................
labels format 247
7.7 Parameters ......................................................................................................................... 247
7.8 Window ......................................................................................................................... 252
7.8.1 Tiles
................................................................................................................................. 253
7.8.2 Cascade
................................................................................................................................. 253
7.8.3 Align
.................................................................................................................................
horizontally 254
7.8.4 Align
.................................................................................................................................
vertically 254
7.8.5 Arrange
.................................................................................................................................
icons 255
7.8.6 Restore
................................................................................................................................. 255
7.8.7 Minimize
................................................................................................................................. 255
7.8.8 Maximize
................................................................................................................................. 255
7.8.9 Close
.................................................................................................................................
window 256
7.8.10 Minimize
.................................................................................................................................
all 256
7.8.11 Close
.................................................................................................................................
all 257
7.8.12 Open.................................................................................................................................
windows list 257
7.9 Help ......................................................................................................................... 257
7.9.1 Index
................................................................................................................................. 258
7.9.2 Using
.................................................................................................................................
help 258
7.9.3 Internet
................................................................................................................................. 258
7.9.4 Send.................................................................................................................................
mail 258
7.9.5 About
................................................................................................................................. 259
7.10 Toolbars ......................................................................................................................... 259
7.10.1 Toolbar
.................................................................................................................................
Drawing 259
7.10.2 Toolbar
.................................................................................................................................
Program 260
7.10.3 Toolbar
.................................................................................................................................
Data 260
7.10.4 Toolbar
.................................................................................................................................
Results 261
7.10.5 Toolbar
.................................................................................................................................
Graphics edition 262
7.10.6 Customizing
.................................................................................................................................
toolbars 262
7.11 Pop-up menu
......................................................................................................................... 268
Chapter 8 Example 271
8.1 Project starting
.........................................................................................................................
data 271
8.2 Entering data......................................................................................................................... 271
8.3 Calculations.........................................................................................................................
and removing errors 282
8.4 Calculations.........................................................................................................................
results 283
Chapter 9 Annexes 286
5 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.
Table of contents
9.1 Dialogues ......................................................................................................................... 286

9.1.1 Accessories
.................................................................................................................................
catalogue 286
9.1.2 Accessories
.................................................................................................................................
set 287
9.1.3 Block
.................................................................................................................................
creation 289
9.1.4 Blocks
................................................................................................................................. 289
9.1.5 Calculations
................................................................................................................................. 290
9.1.6 Catalogue
.................................................................................................................................
data - receivers- and equipment set 290
9.1.7 Customize
.................................................................................................................................
toolbars 292
9.1.8 Data.................................................................................................................................
- General 297
9.1.9 Data.................................................................................................................................
- Labels format 304
9.1.10 Data.................................................................................................................................
- Rooms 308
9.1.11 Drawing
.................................................................................................................................
properties 309
9.1.12 Floors
.................................................................................................................................
systems creation 314
9.1.13 Formatting
................................................................................................................................. 315
9.1.14 Heat.................................................................................................................................
sources catalogue 315
9.1.15 Heat.................................................................................................................................
sources set 316
9.1.16 Icon.................................................................................................................................
selection 316
9.1.17 Insulation
.................................................................................................................................
catalogue 317
9.1.18 Insulation
.................................................................................................................................
set 317
9.1.19 Open.................................................................................................................................
blocks 317
9.1.20 Open.................................................................................................................................
data 317
9.1.21 Open.................................................................................................................................
HL results 318
9.1.22 Open.................................................................................................................................
icons 318
9.1.23 Open.................................................................................................................................
labels 320
9.1.24 Open.................................................................................................................................
picture 320
9.1.25 Picture
.................................................................................................................................
correction 321
9.1.26 Picture
.................................................................................................................................
layers 324
9.1.27 Picture
.................................................................................................................................
levelling, calibrating, cropping 326
9.1.28 Picture
.................................................................................................................................
plot preview 328
9.1.29 Picture
.................................................................................................................................
properties 329
9.1.30 Picture
.................................................................................................................................
type selection 332
9.1.31 Picture
.................................................................................................................................
units 332
9.1.32 Pictures
.................................................................................................................................
list 333
9.1.33 Pipes
.................................................................................................................................
catalogue 334
9.1.34 Pipes
.................................................................................................................................
set 334
9.1.35 Plot................................................................................................................................. 334
9.1.36 Plot.................................................................................................................................
format 336
9.1.37 Plot.................................................................................................................................
to file 338
9.1.38 Plotting
................................................................................................................................. 338
9.1.39 Print
................................................................................................................................. 339
9.1.40 Print
.................................................................................................................................
format 340
9.1.41 Print
.................................................................................................................................
to file 345
9.1.42 Printing
................................................................................................................................. 346
9.1.43 Producers
.................................................................................................................................
catalogue 346
9.1.44 Program
.................................................................................................................................
parameters 346
9.1.45 Receivers-
.................................................................................................................................
and equipment catalogue 351
9.1.46 Receivers-
.................................................................................................................................
and equipment set 351
9.1.47 Replace
................................................................................................................................. 351
9.1.48 Results
.................................................................................................................................
- Labels format 353
9.1.49 Save.................................................................................................................................
as DXF or DWG 356
9.1.50 Save.................................................................................................................................
as EMF or WMF 356
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 6
Audytor H2O 1.5
9.1.51 Save
.................................................................................................................................
blocks 356
9.1.52 Save
.................................................................................................................................
data 357
9.1.53 Save
.................................................................................................................................
labels 358
9.1.54 Save
.................................................................................................................................
picture 358
9.1.55 Scanning
................................................................................................................................. 358
9.1.56 Search
................................................................................................................................. 363
9.1.57 Sets
.................................................................................................................................
catalogue 364
9.1.58 Show
.................................................................................................................................
page 365
9.1.59 Sorting
................................................................................................................................. 366
9.1.60 System
.................................................................................................................................
component parameters 367
9.1.61 Table
.................................................................................................................................
print preview 368
9.1.62 Text
................................................................................................................................. 368
9.1.63 Undo/Redo
................................................................................................................................. 369
9.1.64 Variables
................................................................................................................................. 370
9.2 Windows ......................................................................................................................... 371
9.2.1 Data.................................................................................................................................
- Pictures 371
9.2.2 Edit.................................................................................................................................
block 373
9.2.3 Error
.................................................................................................................................
list 373
9.2.4 Main.................................................................................................................................
program window 374
9.2.5 Plot.................................................................................................................................
preview 376
9.2.6 Print
.................................................................................................................................
preview 376
9.2.7 Results
.................................................................................................................................
- Pictures 378
9.3 Tables ......................................................................................................................... 379
9.3.1 Data
.................................................................................................................................
- Accessories 380
9.3.2 Data
.................................................................................................................................
- Graphics 381
9.3.3 Data
.................................................................................................................................
- Heat sources 382
9.3.4 Data
.................................................................................................................................
- Pipes 385
9.3.5 Data
.................................................................................................................................
- Receivers and equipment 387
9.3.6 Data
.................................................................................................................................
- Remote pipes linking 391
9.3.7 Data
.................................................................................................................................
- Rooms 391
9.3.8 Data
.................................................................................................................................
- Texts 392
9.3.9 Data
.................................................................................................................................
- Water sources 393
9.3.10 General
.................................................................................................................................
data - Diameters 395
9.3.11 General
.................................................................................................................................
data - Pipes 396
9.3.12 Materials
.................................................................................................................................
- Accessories 397
9.3.13 Materials
.................................................................................................................................
- Accessories table 397
9.3.14 Materials
.................................................................................................................................
- Heat sources 399
9.3.15 Materials
.................................................................................................................................
- Heat sources table 399
9.3.16 Materials
.................................................................................................................................
- Insulation 400
9.3.17 Materials
.................................................................................................................................
- Insulation table 401
9.3.18 Materials
.................................................................................................................................
- Pipes 402
9.3.19 Materials
.................................................................................................................................
- Pipes table 403
9.3.20 Materials
.................................................................................................................................
- Producers 404
9.3.21 Materials
.................................................................................................................................
- Producers table 405
9.3.22 Materials
.................................................................................................................................
9.3.23 Materials
.................................................................................................................................
- Receivers and equipment table 407
9.3.24 Materials
.................................................................................................................................
- Water sources 408
9.3.25 Materials
.................................................................................................................................
- Water sources table 409
9.3.26 Results
.................................................................................................................................
- Accessories 409
9.3.27 Results
.................................................................................................................................
- Branches 411
7 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

Table of contents
9.3.28 Results
.................................................................................................................................
- Circulation circuits 413
9.3.29 Results
.................................................................................................................................
- General 415
9.3.30 Results
.................................................................................................................................
- Heat sources 417
9.3.31 Results
.................................................................................................................................
- Pipes 419
9.3.32 Results
.................................................................................................................................
- Presets 421
9.3.33 Results
.................................................................................................................................
9.3.34 Results
.................................................................................................................................
- Rooms 425
9.3.35 Results
.................................................................................................................................
- Water sources 426
9.4 Definitions and
.........................................................................................................................
terms 428
9.4.1 Accessories
................................................................................................................................. 428
9.4.2 Accessories
.................................................................................................................................
type-set 428
9.4.3 Active
.................................................................................................................................
pressure 428
9.4.4 Bitmap
................................................................................................................................. 428
9.4.5 Bitmaps
.................................................................................................................................
painting 428
9.4.6 BMP.................................................................................................................................
(Windows Bitmap) 429
9.4.7 Building
.................................................................................................................................
zone 429
9.4.8 Calculations
.................................................................................................................................
error 429
9.4.9 Calculations
.................................................................................................................................
errors file 429
9.4.10 Calculations
.................................................................................................................................
parameters 429
9.4.11 Calculations
.................................................................................................................................
results file 429
9.4.12 Catalogue
................................................................................................................................. 429
9.4.13 Catalogue
.................................................................................................................................
data base 430
9.4.14 Catalogue
.................................................................................................................................
symbol 430
9.4.15 Circulation
.................................................................................................................................
circuit 430
9.4.16 Clipboard
................................................................................................................................. 430
9.4.17 Color
.................................................................................................................................
depth 430
9.4.18 Color
.................................................................................................................................
representation 430
9.4.19 Components
.................................................................................................................................
data edition mode 431
9.4.20 Compression
.................................................................................................................................
methods 431
9.4.21 Critical
.................................................................................................................................
error 432
9.4.22 Critical
.................................................................................................................................
receiver 432
9.4.23 Current
.................................................................................................................................
data 432
9.4.24 Current
.................................................................................................................................
layer 432
9.4.25 Current
.................................................................................................................................
project 433
9.4.26 Current
.................................................................................................................................
table cell 433
9.4.27 Current
.................................................................................................................................
table column 433
9.4.28 Current
.................................................................................................................................
table row 433
9.4.29 Data
.................................................................................................................................
file 433
9.4.30 Default
.................................................................................................................................
picture layers 433
9.4.31 Default
.................................................................................................................................
scanner interface 433
9.4.32 Dialogue
................................................................................................................................. 433
9.4.33 Dialogue
.................................................................................................................................
tab selection 434
9.4.34 Distributing
.................................................................................................................................
pipes 434
9.4.35 Drawing
.................................................................................................................................
functions toolbar 434
9.4.36 Drawing
.................................................................................................................................
mode 435
9.4.37 Draw-off
.................................................................................................................................
accessories 435
9.4.38 Draw-off
.................................................................................................................................
points 435
9.4.39 DWG................................................................................................................................. 435
9.4.40 DXF................................................................................................................................. 435
9.4.41 EMF................................................................................................................................. 435
9.4.42 Equipment
................................................................................................................................. 435
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 8
Audytor H2O 1.5
9.4.43 Error
.................................................................................................................................
list 435
9.4.44 Error
.................................................................................................................................
location 435
9.4.45 File................................................................................................................................. 436
9.4.46 File.................................................................................................................................
extensions 436
9.4.47 Filter
................................................................................................................................. 436
9.4.48 Fittings
................................................................................................................................. 437
9.4.49 Flow.................................................................................................................................
coefficient Kv 437
9.4.50 Flowmeter
.................................................................................................................................
(watermeter) 437
9.4.51 Folder
................................................................................................................................. 437
9.4.52 GIF.................................................................................................................................
(Graphics Interchange Format) 437
9.4.53 Governing
.................................................................................................................................
accessories 437
9.4.54 Graphic
.................................................................................................................................
blocks 437
9.4.55 Graphic
.................................................................................................................................
formats 437
9.4.56 Gravitation
.................................................................................................................................
pressure 438
9.4.57 Grid................................................................................................................................. 439
9.4.58 Heat.................................................................................................................................
source 439
9.4.59 Help.................................................................................................................................
info table cells 439
9.4.60 Help.................................................................................................................................
system 439
9.4.61 Icon................................................................................................................................. 439
9.4.62 Initial
.................................................................................................................................
preset 439
9.4.63 JPG.................................................................................................................................
(JPEG File Interchange Format) 439
9.4.64 Kv ................................................................................................................................. 440
9.4.65 List.................................................................................................................................
element selection 440
9.4.66 Local
.................................................................................................................................
resistance coefficient 440
9.4.67 Main.................................................................................................................................
program folder 440
9.4.68 Mouse
.................................................................................................................................
cursor 440
9.4.69 Optical
.................................................................................................................................
and interpolated resolution 440
9.4.70 Ordinate
................................................................................................................................. 441
9.4.71 Overall
.................................................................................................................................
table 441
9.4.72 Own .................................................................................................................................
graphic blocks 441
9.4.73 Picture
.................................................................................................................................
active view 442
9.4.74 Picture
.................................................................................................................................
calibration button 442
9.4.75 Picture
.................................................................................................................................
compression 443
9.4.76 Picture
.................................................................................................................................
edge 443
9.4.77 Picture
.................................................................................................................................
layers 444
9.4.78 Picture
.................................................................................................................................
processing scheme 445
9.4.79 Picture
.................................................................................................................................
scale selection 445
9.4.80 Pipe.................................................................................................................................
insulation efficiency 445
9.4.81 Pipe.................................................................................................................................
types surrogate symbol 446
9.4.82 Pipe-run
................................................................................................................................. 446
9.4.83 Pipe-run
.................................................................................................................................
number (symbol) 446
9.4.84 Pipe-run
.................................................................................................................................
number (symbol) within a riser 446
9.4.85 Pixel
................................................................................................................................. 446
9.4.86 Pop-up
.................................................................................................................................
menu 447
9.4.87 Previous
.................................................................................................................................
pipe-run, previous pipe 447
9.4.88 Program
.................................................................................................................................
Audytor HL 447
9.4.89 Program
.................................................................................................................................
control menu 447
9.4.90 Program
.................................................................................................................................
main window 448
9.4.91 Program
.................................................................................................................................
parameters 448
9.4.92 Program
.................................................................................................................................
title bar 448
9.4.93 Pull-down
.................................................................................................................................
button 448
9 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.
Table of contents
9.4.94 Raster
.................................................................................................................................
graphics 449
9.4.95 Receiver
................................................................................................................................. 449
9.4.96 Recommended
.................................................................................................................................
resolution 449
9.4.97 Reference
.................................................................................................................................
ordinate 449
9.4.98 Remote
.................................................................................................................................
pipe linking 450
9.4.99 Remote
.................................................................................................................................
pipe linking between the pictures 450
9.4.100 Riser
.................................................................................................................................
number (symbol) 450
9.4.101 Room
.................................................................................................................................
number (symbol) 450
9.4.102 Room
.................................................................................................................................
zone 450
9.4.103 Scanning
.................................................................................................................................
area 451
9.4.104 Scanning
.................................................................................................................................
resolution 451
9.4.105 Scrollbar
................................................................................................................................. 452
9.4.106 Sorting
.................................................................................................................................
filter 452
9.4.107 Standard
.................................................................................................................................
diameter 452
9.4.108 Status
.................................................................................................................................
bar 452
9.4.109 System
.................................................................................................................................
components labels 452
9.4.110 System
.................................................................................................................................
dialogue 452
9.4.111 System
.................................................................................................................................
fragments copying 452
9.4.112 System
.................................................................................................................................
pictures window drawing part 453
9.4.113 System
.................................................................................................................................
pictures window table part 453
9.4.114 Table
.................................................................................................................................
heading 454
9.4.115 Text
.................................................................................................................................
label 454
9.4.116 Thread
.................................................................................................................................
cursor 454
9.4.117 TIFF
.................................................................................................................................
(Tagged Image File Format) 454
9.4.118 Toolbar
................................................................................................................................. 454
9.4.119 TWAIN
.................................................................................................................................
specification 455
9.4.120 Unitary
.................................................................................................................................
linear pressure drop R 455
9.4.121 User
.................................................................................................................................
layers 455
9.4.122 Vector
.................................................................................................................................
graphics 455
9.4.123 Water
.................................................................................................................................
source 455
9.4.124 Watermeter
................................................................................................................................. 456
9.4.125 Window
.................................................................................................................................
control menu 456
9.4.126 Window
.................................................................................................................................
title bar 456
9.4.127 WMF................................................................................................................................. 456
9.4.128 Xp deviation
................................................................................................................................. 457
Index 458
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 10

Chapter
1
Manual contents
1 Manual contents
1 Manual contents
User's manual of the program Audytor H2O consists of 8 chapters and 4 annexes. Short
description of each chapter follows.
1. Manual contents - short description of each chapter together with info on how to use the
manual.
2. Program overview 14 - general info about the program and its functions, applicability,
calculations range and user's interface.
3. Using the program 18 - basic elements of the program's work area and how to use them.
4. Entering data 21 - sequential stages of entering data step-by-step.
5. Calculations 138 - calculating process, set and meaning of parameters influencing the
calculations.
6. Calculations results 142 - description of the results obtained from the calculating process.
7. Menu structure 177 - explanation of all commands in the program's menu.
8. Example 271 - shows an example of entering data and performing the calculations.
9. Annexes 286 .
Dialogues - description of the program's dialogue windows.
Windows - description of the program's windows.
Tables - description of the program's tables.
Definitions and terms - list of the definitions and terms from this manual.
Index - index of terms from this manual.
1.1 Technical support

If you encounter any problems with the program installation or functioning Audytor H2O, please
contact the technical support line at the phone numbers: +48 601 39 01 64 or +48 22 863 14 95.
Please send prospective remarks or enquiries about the program's functioning to the following e-
mail address: [email protected] or fax number: +48 22 863 14 96.
You can find the current info on the program on the Internet at: www.sankom.pl
SANKOM Sp. z o.o.
ul. Plomyka 28
02-490 Warszawa, Poland
tel.: +48 22 863 14 95
+48 601 39 01 64
fax +48 22 863 14 96
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 12

Chapter
2
Program overview
2 Program overview
2 Program overview
Program Audytor H2O is meant for graphical aiding of cold- and hot water systems design, as well
as circulation in both dwelling- and public buildings.
2.1 Entering data

Data is entered in the graphic form in the installation diagram 32 . All necessary info on items under
design is entered in the tables linked to the installation diagram 453 .
Correctness check and help system 439 for every entered item enable getting info on the quantity
being entered, or referring to the corresponding catalogue data.
In order to facilitate the process of entering data, the program enables:
simultaneous edition of more than one system element,

using ready blocks 437 ,
using functions for copying 452 any fragment of the picture vertically or horizontally, together
with automatic renumbering of rooms and pipe-runs,
defining unlimited number of own blocks 68 consisting of freely selected fragments of the
picture,
fast access to help 19 info on quantities being entered,
fast access to the most commonly viewed system elements, with the application of pull-down
buttons 448 ,
dynamic linking of data in the picture with the relevant table data,
aided linking of pipes, draw-off points, accessories and other system elements.
Because the data is entered graphically, the program automatically recognizes pipes connections,
draw-off points or accessories, and ascribes relevant system elements to appropriate room zones
450 .
Due to the possibility of editing data in the table form, the parameters of more than one
simultaneously marked picture elements can be established individually.
The function of table columns filling 108 allows fast entering the same data for more than one
system element at once.
Currently edited table item is highlighted in the installation diagram, due to the dynamic linking
mechanism between the picture and the data table.
The program is accompanied with the library of the typical picture fragments (blocks 437 ), such as
storey risers, dwelling system- and manifold elements, and enables fast creation of the installation
diagram. Additionally, the user has the possibility to define practically unlimited number of own
blocks consisting of freely selected picture fragments. Such blocks can be then used 67 in
following projects.
Thanks to the copying 452 function for the freely selected picture elements, it is possible for example
to enter the fragment of the installation diagram onto the whole storey (subsequent risers or
dwelling systems), and then automatically create the diagram and data for the subsequent storeys
125 .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 14

Audytor H2O 1.5
2.2 Hydraulic calculations

The program enables performing the complete hydraulic calculations for the system, within which
it:
Estimates calculation waterflow in the pipes.

Selects pipe diameters.
Estimates hydraulic resistance of individual system components, together with required
disposable pressure.
Selects pressure governors.
Performs water flows control in the circulation domestic hot water system, by selecting
suitable governing components (initial preset valves, orifices, thermostatic valves).
2.3 Heat calculations

Within the heat calculations, the program realizes the following functions:
Computes the required domestic hot water circulation system water flows by the thermal
method. This is based on selecting such circulation water flows, by which water cooling on
the way from the heat source to the linking points between hot water and circulation reaches
the required quantity (eg. 5 K).
Selects three-way mixing valves for the domestic hot water system.
Selects heat insulation for the pipes.
2.4 Data- and calculations results check

On being entered, the correctness of data is progressively checked by the program, which limits
the amount of possible errors at this stage. While calculations last, the full data correctness check
is conducted, including among others:
the picture,
individual data range (numbers - room symbols, pipes, catalogue symbols 430 , etc.),
pipe-run 446 linking coherence within the system (unlinked pipes, incorrectly linked pipes,
etc.),
accessories location.
Correctness check for calculations results include among others:
agent pipe flow velocity,

water pressure before the receivers 449 ,
unchoked pressure in circuits caused by the total lack or insufficiency of governing
accessories in circulation circuits,
pipes insulation,
pipe water cooling.
The list of detected errors 435 as a result of the data- and calculations results correctness check is
created, where types of errors and their locations are listed.
The program is equipped with the fast error locating mechanism (automatic table location, row and
column with the error data, together with indication of the erroneous item in the installation
diagram).
15 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

2 Program overview
2.5 Results presentation

Calculations results are presented both in the graphic 145 , as well as table form. Picture layers
format 245 and label format 247 for individual system components can be freely modified (the choice
of highlighted quantities, color, font size, etc.). Calculations results can be also presented in the
system plan view 82 .
The contents of all tables can be formatted (choice of shown columns and rows, font size) and
sorted according to freely selected filter 452 .
Tables with calculations results can be printed and moved to other applications functioning in the
Windows environment (eg. spreadsheet, word processor, etc.). Print preview 190 function enables
viewing the pages before printing.
Calculations results as plan views and installation diagrams can also be plotted 196 onto the plotter
or printer. The user can choose the plotting scale. Plot preview 195 function enables to check the
pictures before plotting. Larger pictures are printed or plotted in fragments which then can be
combined into one-piece printout, so even large pictures can be executed with the ordinary A4
printer.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 16

Chapter
3
Using the program
3 Using the program
3 Using the program

Basic info on program operation is to be found here. Following chapters contain more details on
how to create data, execute calculations, print results or establish work parameters.
3.1 Program work area

The program work area consists of all items visible on the computer screen, positioned within the
program main window 448 , where windows with pictures, calculations results and materials list, etc.
are placed.
Program title bar Menu Toolbar

Program
Draw ing functions

toolbar
Rulers Tw o independently
scalable draw ing v ies
Scrollbar
Draw ing properties

Picture list buttons
edition
Table
Status bar
Tabs w ith draw ing
Main program window
As a default, after starting the program the window Data - Pictures 371 is displayed, with the
installation diagram pictures and storey plan views. In order to view calculations results windows or
the error list 435 , you should select the appropriate command from the menu Results 234 .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 18

Audytor H2O 1.5
3.2 Help system

The program has been equipped with the contextual help system, enabling getting immediate info
on every item or action taken.
In order to obtain help info you should:
for the dialogue, click Help button with the left mouse key;
move mouse cursor onto the table cell, picture element, dialogue element, or the element of
the program main window 448 (info on highlighted element will be shown in the status bar 452 );
press the right mouse key and choose the command Help from the pop-up menu 447 ;
press button, and for the dialogue select Help button with the Tab key and press .
Help info depends on the current context.
When selecting menu commands, help system calls info on the chosen command.
When a dialogue is the active program window, help system gets info on the dialogue fields.
When entering table data 105 , help system gets info on the quantities being entered into
individual cells, and in case of entering catalogue symbols 430 , it calls the relevant catalogue.
When viewing calculations results table or materials list table, help system calls info
describing meanings of individual table cells.
In many cases Windows help program is used to show help info.
See also: menu Help 257
3.3 Moving or copying project files

Project data is stored in the .h2d extension file (data for calculations), the results in the file of the
same name and .h2r extension, while the error list 435 in the .h2e extension file.
In order to move the files associated with the selected project, you should use Windows Explorer to
copy or move the selected files with the extensions listed above. For instance, files associated with
the project example are example.h2d, example.h2r and example.h2e, and they are the ones to
be copied.
See also: menu File 178
commands: Open data 179 , Save data 180 and Save data as 181
19 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

Chapter
4
Entering data
Audytor H2O 1.5
4 Entering data
The program enables both creation of new data, as well as edition of data earlier stored on the disk
with Save data 180 command.
Data in the program is:
General data 22 (for the whole system, to be entered as the first).

Graphic data as the system installation diagram 32 and storey plan views 82 (to be drawn
later and accompanied with detailed data on every system item).
Next chapters focus in detail on entering data process.
See also: menu File 178 , menu Data 225
4.1 Creating new data file

Creating new data file is a process consisting of several successive stages shown below.
Choose menu File 178 command New data 179 , and the new empty file named noname.h2d will be
created, where the program will assume the series of default quantities to accompany catalogue
data, calculations parameters and printing format. Default data will be stored in the folder
Catalogue Data, file default.h2d, which can be then customized by the user.
Then choose command General 226 menu Data 225 , to call the dialogue Data - General 297 for
entering general data 22 for the whole system under design and calculation parameters 429 .
It is not necessary to number system components for conducting the calculations or viewing the
results, still it is advised if detailed overview of calculations results as printouts is essential. In the
latter case, before continuing the procedure of entering data, a well-thought-out numbering of all the
system components should be considered (see How to number system components 135 ). This will
facilitate entering data process, especially in case of repeatable system structures on successive
building storeys.
The last entering data stage is installation diagram drawing and entering data on system
components 32 , as well as possible storeys plan view drawing 82 , where the calculations results
will be positioned after the computations have been performed.
WARNING!!!
If you lack expertise in entering data (first approach to use the program), we suggest to
design a simple system first, with only a few draw-off points, for practice. This will help
you avoid errors 429 which can significantly prolong and hinder entering data process,
when large systems are under design.
See also: Entering data 21 - overview
Installation diagram drawing and entering data on system components 32 , Entering table data
105
menu File 178 , menu Data 225
21 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
4.2 General data

General data include all information necessary for designing, concerning the complete system
under design, together with info on calculation parameters 429 . To enter this data, use the dialogue
Data - General 297 from Data 225 menu with command General 226 .
There are following tabs in the dialogue:
Data entering general data on the whole project,
Calculation parameters
parameters of computations for the system.
Help info is available on all dialogue cells (button ).
Dialogue tabs have been described below:
Tab Data
Use it to enter data on the whole project.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 22

Audytor H2O 1.5
Dialogue Data - General tab Data
General info on the project
This part of the dialogue is used for entering basic data on the project.
Project name: Short description of the project.
Project location: Where the building with the system under design is located.
Designer: Info on designer.
Tcw [°C] Calculation cold water temperature.
Thw [°C] Calculation hot water temperature.
Thw mix [°C] Calculation hot water temperature beyond the mixing valves, for hot
domestic water.
23 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
System pipe types - table
Table General data - Pipes 396 is to be found in the middle part of the dialogue, it is used to select
pipes for the system under design. Detailed info on how to enter table data can be found in the
point Entering table data 105 .
The meaning of individual columns is as follows:
Type Surrogate pipe symbol used in the system picture. A read only field.
Pipe symbols
Cells in this column are meant for defining pipe types in the system under design.
Pipe catalogue symbols 430 are to be entered, responding to surrogate symbols 446
(A, B, C, D). These pipe symbols are then used in the pipe data table 385 . When
entering pipe catalogue symbols, use help info 439 (button ) available here in form
of the pipe catalogue 334 .
Remarks Place for the user remarks.
System diameters - table
Bottom part of the dialogue holds the table General data - Diameters 395 with detailed info on
available pipe diameters for the pipe selected in the table General data - Pipes (see above).
Avl Selecting this field means that the given diameter will be available when designing
system pipes.
Dnom [mm] Nominal diameter.
Dext [mm] External diameter responding to the given nominal diameter.
Dint [mm] Internal diameter responding to the given nominal diameter.
K [mm] Absolute roughness of the internal pipe surface. K value influences pipe linear
pressure loses in case of the turbulent flow. When pipe types are selected, the
program assumes K value recommended for these pipes in operating conditions.
ST [mm] Scale thickness present on the internal pipe surface. The scale effectively
decreases pipe cross-section area. In case when the system is new or the pipes
are plastic, zero scale thickness is to be assumed. In existing installations, the
scale thickness is to be estimated basing on pipe samples.
Vmin [m/s] Minimum water velocity in hot- and cold water pipes.
Vmax [m/s] Maximum water velocity in hot- and cold water pipes.
Rmax [Pa/m]
Maximum unitary linear pressure drop in hot- and cold water pipes.
VmaxCir [m/s]
Maximum water velocity in circulation pipes.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 24

Audytor H2O 1.5
RmaxCir [Pa/m]
Maximum unitary hydraulic resistance in the circulation pipe.
Insulation Default insulation material symbol or percentage insulation efficiency eg. 70%.
WARNING!!!
It is vital that with the efficiency value expressed as a percent,
the sign % is entered. Empty field means no insulation material.
Thins [mm] Insulation thickness. Leave this field empty if you want the program to select
insulation material thickness automatically.
Remarks Place for remarks.
Tab Calculation parameters
This tab is meant for estimating calculation parameters for the system design. By doing that, it is
possible to influence to some extent the computation process. When creating new data, the
program assumes default values of the calculation parameters.
Dialogue Data - General tab Calculations parameters
Hot water and circulation - group
25 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
Estimate calculation flows beyond the heater after DIN - selection field
When selected, this option has the following consequences: when selecting the hot water pipes
beyond the heaters, calculation flows resulting from the sum of standard outflows from the
receivers 449 are not used for calculations, but the maximum standard outflow among the
receivers, supplied from this heater.
Estimate circulation water flux according to the thermal method - selection field
When selected, this option has the following consequences: selection of water flux in the state of
circulation (no hot water draw) is done in the way that each hot water pipes - circulation pipes
connection point (these points should be located possibly close to the farthest receivers, eg. at
the ends of the risers or branches) should be reached by the water of the same temperature,
lower than heat source temperature eg. by 5 K. Default status of this option is on.
Maximum hot water cooling [K] - edition field

Maximum hot water cooling in hot water pipes on the way between the heat source and the
circulation pipes - hot water pipes in the circulation state connection point (no hot water draw).
This quantity is used in calculations of the circulation water flux according to the thermal
method. The program selects water flux in the circulation state so that the temperature in
circulation pipes - hot water pipes connection points is lower than the hot water temperature in
the source by the exact assumed value.
It is recommended to assume cooling value of 5K.
Maximum hot water exchange number [1/h]

Maximum hot water exchange number in circulation circuits, above which the program provides
info on too large water amount in the circulation circuits. The advised value is 4 exch./h.
When estimating the number of exchanges, the program considers the capacity of hot water
pipes within the circulation zone, and the circulation pipes. The value of this field is only used for
error diagnosis, and by no means influences the selection of circulation water fluxes.
3 liters criterion check method

Following current regulations, in case when the circulation system occurs within the hot water
system then the hot water pipes capacity out of the circulation zone should not exceed the
volume of 3 liters. The regulations however do not state clearly whether the value of 3 liters
refers to all pipes in the branch or only the pipes supplying the hot water to the farthest receiver.
Hence, the program enables selecting optionally the variant of pipe capacity calculations.
Two variants of 3-liter criterion check are available:
The variants of 3 liters criterion check

Sum up all branch pipes.
In this variant, the program adds up the capacity of all pipes in the branch out of the
circulation zone.
Sum up pipes up to the farthest receiver.

In this variant, the program adds up the capacity of pipes leading up to the farthest receiver in
the branch out of the circulation zone.
Bold lines in the pictures below highlight hot water pipes considered when calculating capacities
in individual variants.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 26

Audytor H2O 1.5
Sum up all branch pipe s.
+ 0,00
Sum up pipes up to the farthe st receive r.
Pipes taken into account in the variants of 3 liters criterion check
Pipes - group
Do not select diameters for pipes withdrawn from production - selection field
Highlighting this field will mean that the program will not select the diameters for the pipes no
longer produced.
Do not select diameters for pipes available on special order only - selection field
Highlighting this field will mean that the program will not select the diameters for the pipes
available on special orders.
Do not select diameters for pipes not recommended by the producer - selection field
Highlighting this field will mean that the program will not select the diameters for the pipes which
are not recommended by the producer.
Pipe insulation - group
27 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
Do not select insulation for pipes withdrawn from production - selection field
Highlighting this field will mean that the program will not select the insulation for the pipes no
longer produced.
Do not select insulation for pipes available on special order only - selection field
Highlighting this field will mean that the program will not select the insulation for the pipes
Do not select insulation for pipes not recommended by the producer - selection field
Highlighting this field will mean that the program will not select the insulation for the pipes which
Accessories - group
Do not select accessories withdrawn from production - selection field

Highlighting this field will mean that the program will not select the accessories no longer
produced.
Do not select accessories available on special order only - selection field

Highlighting this field will mean that the program will not select the accessories available on
special orders.
Do not select accessories presets not recommended by the producer - selection field
Highlighting this field will mean that the program will not select the accessories presets which
Maximum Xp deviation for thermostatic valves [K] - edition field

Maximum governing deviation Xp 457 used when selecting thermostatic valves on the circulation
pipes. In case of some thermostatic valves (without the additional initial preset), the appropriate
value of the kv flow coefficient of the valve, necessary for the correct regulation of the circulation
system, is obtained by selecting the valve for the assumed deviation Xp.
The advised value is Xp = 5K. Larger deviations can be assumed only in case of the exceeding
thermostatic resistance by the deviation Xp = 5K.
The number of hydrants considered in the calculations - edition field

Estimates the number of the fire hydrants considered in the calculations of individual cold water
branches. If for instance in the system branch (riser) there are 8 hydrants, and value 2 has been
entered into this field, then - when selecting the diameters - two simultaneously active most
distant hydrants will be considered. In case of the lack of the fire hydrants in the system, it is
recommended to enter value 1 in this field, and refrain from drawing any hydrants.
Detect overlapping pipes - selection field

Selecting this option will cause detection of overlapping pipes while checking the correctness of
the system picture. This option will considerable prolong the drawing check process!
Create full fittings list - selection field

Selecting this option will cause that while calculating the program will create the full fittings list
(joints, T-joints, etc.) necessary for the system construction.
This function is only available in the selected versions of the program. Fittings lists are created
only for the selected pipe types available in some versions.
WARNING!!!
When lacking expertise in design, it is not recommended to alter the default calculation
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 28

Audytor H2O 1.5
parameters. Incorrect values can lead to obtaining improper results of calculations.
Creating new data file 21 , Room data 29 , Installation diagram drawing and entering data on
system components 32 , Entering table data 105
4.3 Room data

Room data include info on rooms where the pipes of the system under design are laid. Enter this
data using the dialogue Data - Rooms 308 executed from menu Data 225 with Room 226 command.
Dialogue Data - Rooms
Individual dialogue fields have been described below:
Table
Here enter data on all rooms where the system's components are positioned (pipes, accessories,
receivers and equipment). Each table line contains data on one room only. Help info is available on
every table cell.
The following data is to be entered into individual table columns:
Symbol Room number (symbol).
ti, [°C] Calculation air temperature inside a room.
Zone Symbol of the building zone 429 where the room is positioned. Zones inform about the
room functions. It is therefore possible to execute calculations for the hot- and cold
water supplying system for multi-functional buildings, eg. an apartment- and office
29 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
building. Maximum 30 different zones can be defined for one building.

To enter data on room zones, use the dialogue Data - General 297 called with General
226 command from Data 225 menu.
Description
Room description.
Remarks
Place for room remarks.
Calculations results import from the program Audytor HL - group
This group contains info on the imported heat loses calculations results file, and on buttons for
importing and updating the results.
Open new file Selecting this button opens the dialogue Open HL results 318 for choosing
the file with the heat loses calculations results.
Update The button for updating heat loses calculations results imported from the
program Audytor HL. Use it when in the program Audytor HL 447 changes
have been made, and it is necessary to update (reload) heat loses
calculations results.
Heat loses calculations results obtained from the program Audytor HL 447 can be moved directly to
the room data table. To do so, select the button Open new file and, using the displayed dialogue
Open HL results 318 , choose the appropriate heat loses calculations results file.
When designing hot- and cold water systems, the actual heat loses values are not vital, however
room numbering and descriptions, together with info on calculation temperatures will be utilized.
Room data can also be entered while drawing the installation diagram, in the table part of the
window Data - Pictures 371 .
In the project, enter info on all the rooms where the system components are located (pipes,
receivers, equipment, etc.).
Room data can be also entered while drawing the installation diagram in the table part 453 of the
Creating new data file 21 , General data 22 , Installation diagram drawing and entering data on
system components 32 , Entering table data 105
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 30

Audytor H2O 1.5
4.4 Entering variables

In order to increase data clarity as well as facilitate variant calculations, the program has been
equipped with the possibility of creating variables.
Menu Data 225 Variables 227 pulled down
To view the variables list, choose Variables 227 from Data 225 menu. This will unroll the subsequent
menu level where one out of the following variable categories can be selected:
Global 228 ,
Dimensions 229 ,
Temperatures 229 ,
Pressures 229 ,
Flows 230 .
Dialogue Variables 370 will be then displayed.
Variables edition dialogue example
31 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
In individual columns of variables lists enter the following information:
Symbol Unique variable symbol;
Value Variable numerical value;
Description
Variable description - this column can remain empty.
Variables of the selected category can be used only in the matching fields. Eg. it is not possible to
enter temperature variable in the pipe length field.
Entering numerical data in the edition field or table cell, it is possible to obtain the access to the
relevant variables list by pressing button or pull-down button .
Pressing will display the variables list dialogue, and selecting the pull-down button will show
the pull-down defined variables list.
Variables list example
4.5 Installation diagram drawing and entering data on system

components
Adopted in the program drawing and editing procedure of the picture elements, resembles to a
large extent solutions used in other graphic applications from MS Windows environment.
Consequently, users familiar with those should not find drawing in the program Audytor H2O
difficult.
Except for drawing data, it is necessary to enter additional information on such picture elements as:
pipe types, accessories, receivers, room data, etc. Still, the data amount has been reduced, as the
program automatically recognizes pipe connections, appliances connections or appliances- and
pipes affiliations to individual rooms. It is not necessary to enter info on eg. pipes exterior
temperature, connections between pipe-runs and receivers, etc. The vertical picture scale is
preserved, so it is not necessary either to provide info on ordinate difference between receivers and
water sources, or the elevation and length of individual pipe-runs. All this information can be
established automatically by the program, basing on the installation diagram drawing.
Installation diagram is created in the special window consisting of the drawing part 453 (two
installation diagram views) meant for drawing the diagram and the storey plan views, together with
the table part 453 for entering data on freshly drawn system components.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 32

Audytor H2O 1.5
Draw ing functions

toolbar
Scale selection
buttons Draw ing part
Table part
The tables are dynamically

linked w ith the draw ing.
Status bar Tabs w ith draw ing
Window Data - Pictures for drawing and entering table data on system components
The program also enables displaying the calculations results on the storey plan views. In the
bottom part of the window Data - Pictures 371 , there are tabs with pictures available in the project.
Installation diagrams drawings can be ascribed to the tabs, together with storey plan views ,
and pictures not meant for calculating. Button to the left of the tabs is meant for edition of the
pictures list 333 available in the project.
Thanks to the function of connecting system fragments, it is possible to draw the installation
diagram on the arbitrary number of pictures, which enables to design systems of the practically
unlimited dimensions.
Designing the system requires drawing its diagram only. Plan view drawing is not necessary.
Installation diagram drawing has been described below. Plan view drawing is to be found in the
point Storeys plan views drawing. 82
33 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
Each picture view is calibrated 445 independently, this allows to see simultaneously the complete
picture and its selected fragment, and increases the drawing precision with the parallel preview of
the whole installation diagram.
Proportions of individual window elements can be freely changed, eg. in order to see only the
drawing part of the window, the table part only, or the table part with one picture view.
In the main program window 448 top part, drawing functions toolbar 434 is to be found. It contains
several buttons for drawing individual system elements. Buttons are located on a few tabs arranged
thematically (see Drawing functions toolbar 126 ).
Drawing means basically selecting the appropriate button and executing the element ascribed to it.
You can also use the functions of moving, rotating, mirror reflection, grouping, copying, pasting and
deleting individual picture elements. Practically all possible system schemes can be executed
thanks to these functions and the vast library of picture items.
Table part 453 enables to edit comfortably data on system components selected in the picture. Each
selected component is described in one table line. The program automatically displays the
appropriate table depending on the highlighted element. Eg. it is possible to highlight a few
receivers in the picture and then change their individual features in the table. The function of filling
entire table columns 108 facilitates entering repeatable data for many system components.
Table data is dynamically linked with the installation diagram drawing. While entering table data, the
program automatically points the picture fragment with the element being edited, and additionally
modifies its color, so that it is distinguishable from the others. This enables recognizing, which
picture element is being currently edited, while modifying large data groups.
The tables are equipped with the functions of search and replace to facilitate data changes for
entire groups of system elements. Eg. to change accessories type in the whole project or only
selected installation diagram element, it is enough to highlight the relevant picture fragment, choose
accessories table tab in the table part, and then apply the function of exchanging the previous
accessories symbol with a new one.
The function of sorting table contents 107 with calculations data facilitates data entering process.
While editing the data in tables, it is possible to enter the program into the protection mode against
accidental moving of the already drawn installation diagram elements, using the button Editing
elements data positioned in the left part of the drawing functions toolbar 434 .
The most commonly used commands (copying 200 , pasting 200 , deleting 201 , calibration) have
shortcuts, and can be executed quickly. The commands are also available in the pop-up menu 447
displayed after pressing the mouse right-hand key.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 34

Audytor H2O 1.5
Window Data - Pictures fragment with the visible pop-up menu
Before you start drawing the installation diagram, it is advised to familiarize with drawing graphic
elements: basics of creating and editing 110 , and find out how to number system components 135 .
This should minimize the numbers of committed mistakes and help you use the program functions
effectively.
The subpoints below describe the subsequent stages of the installation diagram drawing process
and entering data on individual system components.
Storeys- and ordinates drawing 36 ,
Receivers- and equipment drawing 39 ,
Using pull-down buttons 44 ,
Pipes drawing and linking 47 ,
Water sources drawing 55 ,
35 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
Heat sources drawing 57 ,
Fittings- and accessories drawing 61 ,
Room zones drawing 63 ,
System components labels drawing 65 ,
Completing data in table part 66 ,
Using ready blocks 67 ,
Creating own blocks 68 ,
Copying picture fragments 71 ,
Other graphic elements drawing 72 .
See also: Entering data 21 - overview, Installation diagram drawing and entering data on system
components 32 - overview
Floors- and ordinates drawing 36 , Receivers- and equipment drawing 39 , Using pull-down
buttons 44 , Pipes drawing and linking 47 , Water sources drawing 55 , Heat sources drawing
57 , Fittings- and accessories drawing 61 , Room zones drawing 63 , System components
labels drawing 65 , Completing data in table part 66 , Using ready blocks 67 , Creating own
blocks 68 , Copying picture fragments 71 , Other graphic elements drawing 72
4.5.1 Floors- and ordinates drawing

You should start drawing the installation diagram from marking the floors, by selecting the tab
Construction 132 in the drawing functions toolbar 434 .
Tab Construction
You can draw individual floors with the Floor button or create the complete floor system .
Remember to maintain the vertical scale of the picture when working on the diagram. This will later
enable to estimate the pipe-run 446 heights automatically, together with the height difference
between receivers 449 and water sources 455 . The program will then calculate ordinates and
hydrostatic pressures originating from individual receivers.
To create the floor system

1 In the displayed dialogue drawing functions toolbar 434 select the tab Construction .
2 In this tab choose the button Floor creation .
3 In the displayed dialogue Floor system creation 314 establish the parameters of the floor system.
The created system will be stored in the clipboard 430 after pressing the OK button (the mouse
cursor will change into the clipboard symbol , which means pasting clipboard data mode).
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 36

Audytor H2O 1.5
4 Point with the mouse cursor the destination for the clipboard contents and press the left mouse
key.
5 Holding the left mouse key pressed, move the graphic elements being pasted onto the desired
position and release the left mouse key.
You can repeat the floor creation process freely to obtain more complex floor structures.
Dialogue Floor system creation
Floors number How many floors there are in the system.
Floors length How long they are (in meters).
Storey height How high the storey is, measured within the floor axes.
Floor thickness How thick the typical floors are.
Enter ordinates Option field, deciding whether to position floor ordinates or not.
Bottom part table will establish individually how thick the floors- and how high the storeys are.
The columns have the following meaning:
37 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
Storey Storey number always counted from the bottom (starting from 1).
H storey Storey height estimated according to the storey inside diameter.
T floor Floor thickness above the given storey.
When pasting the complete floor system, establish the small picture view scale 445 (eg. 10%), so
that the whole space for the floors to be inserted is available.
You can select the floor system preview scale with the Picture calibrating button 442 .
Highlighting the field Auto calibration will cause the program to select the floor system preview
scale automatically, so that all floors are visible.
You can freely modify each of the floors after you have entered them.
Individual floors should show ordinates. You can enter them with two buttons in the Construction
tab.
Selecting the button Reference ordinate , you will enter the ordinate defining the beginning of
the coordinate system onto the picture (point 0:0). Then the coordinates of other ordinates and the
horizontal and vertical rulers in the picture view will be automatically matched to the new beginning
of the coordinate system.
WARNING !!!
Only one reference ordinate can be entered in the picture.
Normal ordinate will be entered when the button Ordinate is selected. Ordinate value is
automatically recalculated referring to the reference ordinate.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 38

Audytor H2O 1.5
+ 3,00
+ 0.00
+ 0,00
Installation diagram fragment with entered floors
Created floors are the reference points for drawing other components of the installation diagram,
they also enable using later the function of copying data onto next storeys 125 .
The next stage will be drawing receivers 449 , pipe systems with the accessories 428 , room zones 450
and system components labels 452 .
While drawing, you can also enter individual components into the picture (pipes, receivers,
accessories, etc.), or use the ready blocks 437 available with the program or created independently
68 .
In the subsequent points you will find at first information on how to draw the system constructing it
of individual components, and then how to facilitate this process by using the blocks and copying.
4.5.2 Receivers- and equipment drawing
To draw receivers 449 and equipment 435 , use the tab Receivers and equipment 130 in the
drawing functions toolbar 434 .
39 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
Tab Draw-off accessories and equipment
To draw equipment or draw-off accessories
1 In the drawing functions toolbar 434 select the tab Receivers and equipment .
2 Select the pull-down button 448 relevant to the element you wish to draw.
3 Move the mouse cursor 440 onto the installation diagram, the shape of the element to be
inserted will be displayed by the cursor.
4 Specify with the mouse cursor the final position of the element being inserted.
You will find details about using the pull-down buttons 44 in the point of the same name.
+ 3,00
+ 0,00
Installation diagram fragment with the receivers and equipment
To enter data on the freshly drawn receivers and equipment, use the table Data - Receivers and
equipment 387 in the table part 453 of the window Data - Pictures 371 .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 40

Audytor H2O 1.5
Table part of the window Data - Pictures 371 with the table to enter data on receivers and equipment
The following info is to be found in the individual table columns:
Type Info on the appliance type (receiver 449 or equipment 435 ). A read-only field.
Riser Riser number (symbol) 450 where the appliance being entered belongs (receiver or
equipment). This info need not be entered, as the program is able to read
graphically connections between pipe-runs and other system components, still the
lack of this data significantly hinders reading the calculations results displayed in
the table form.
Item no. Enter the number (symbol) of the appliance (receiver or equipment) within the
riser. This column can also remain empty.
Symbol Catalogue symbol 430 of the appliance (receiver or equipment). Button calls the
catalogue.
When using the function of search and replace for the table text, you can easily
modify the symbols in the project.
Qscw Standard cold water flux entering the appliance (receiver or equipment), [l/s].
Pmincw Minimum cold water pressure before the appliance (receiver or equipment), [m].
Pmaxcw Maximum permissible cold water pressure before the appliance (receiver or
equipment), [m]. This field can also remain empty, still in the case the program will
not warn when the the maximum pressure value is exceeded.
Qshw Standard hot water flux entering the appliance (receiver or equipment), [l/s].
Pminhw Minimum hot water pressure before the appliance (receiver or equipment), [m].
Pmaxhw Maximum permissible hot water pressure before the appliance (receiver or
Cal.Qs Info on the way that the standard water outflow Qs should be taken into account
when estimating the sum of the standard water outflows from the appliances
connected to the system branches. Button will call the list of the possible
calculation variants.
41 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
The following variants are described below:
Consider with the simultaneity coefficient.

Default option for typical receivers. Standard outflows from subsequent
receivers connected to the system branch are added, and calculation flows
are estimated basing on relevant formulas considering simultaneity
coefficients.
Do not consider.
This option will disregard the receiver in the system branch. Standard
outflows from subsequent receivers in this option are not added, and
calculation flows are estimated basing on relevant formulas considering
simultaneity coefficients, not accounting for these receivers. This variant can
be applied eg. in case of the second wash-basin in the bathroom.
Consider without the simultaneity coefficient.

The option of the parallel functioning of several receivers. Standard outflows
from subsequent receivers in this option are not added, and calculation flows
are estimated basing on relevant formulas assuming the simultaneous action
of these receivers, without applying any simultaneity coefficients. This variant
can be applied eg. in case of the swimming pool bathrooms, where large
probability of simultaneous action of all receivers (showers) exist.
No receivers branch of Qs >= 0.5 dm3/s

This option will treat other receiver as the system branch (eg. calculated
earlier) not including receivers of the standard outflow Qs >= 0.5 dm 3/s.
Branch with receivers of Qs >= 0.5 dm3/s

earlier) including at least one receiver of the standard outflow Qn >= 0.5 dm 3/
s.
The last two options are available only in case of "other receivers" and enable
connecting the entire branches of the systems calculated earlier.
Connecting set
The symbol of the connecting set for linking the receiver and pipes. Button
calls the sets catalogue 364 .
modify sets symbols in the project.
This field can remain empty when you do not wish to switch on the option for
creating the full fittings list in the General data 22 . The column is visible only
when the program version allows to create the full fittings list.
ds cw Data on the ending type and its diameter in case of cold water. Button calls the
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 42

Audytor H2O 1.5
list for establishing the ending details. Select the type on the left hand-side,
highlight the diameter on the right.
when the program version allows for creating the fittings list.
ds hw Data on the ending type and its diameter in case of hot water.
Room Room symbol 450 for the appliance (receiver or equipment). If the room is outside
the room zone 450 in the picture, or the appliance is located in other room, enter the
appropriate room symbol for the appliance. Leave the field empty if the appliance is
positioned correctly in the appropriate room zone (the program will automatically
ascribe the appliance to its room zone).
Status Info on whether the appliance (receiver or equipment) is of the existing type (black
color) or newly designed (green color).
Remarks Place for remarks on the appliance (receiver or equipment).
Or cw Cold water pipe connection point ordinate, [m].
Or hw Hot water pipe connection point ordinate, [m].
43 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
4.5.3 Using pull-down buttons

Drawing receivers 449 and equipment 435 or other system components can be facilitated by using
pull-down buttons 448 . Their distinguishing feature is the blackened right bottom corner.
Their application has been described below, basing on the example of the button Washbasins.
As a default, the button Washbasins will switch the program into the standard washbasin drawing
mode. It is however possible to ascribe the list of specific washbasin types to this button.
To ascribe the list of specific washbasin types to the pull-down button

1 In the drawing functions toolbar 434 select the tab Receivers and equipment 130 .
2 Move the mouse cursor onto the pull-down button Washbasins .
3 Press and hold the left mouse key. In a moment, the washbasin list ascribed to the button will
unroll. If no washbasin has been ascribed to the button yet, the list will display only the Edit
command.
Pull-down button list (before the specific items have been added)
4 Select the entry Edit from the list,
5 From the displayed dialogue Receiver and equipment set 290 select those washbasins which
are to be ascribed to the button.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 44

Audytor H2O 1.5
Dialogue Receivers- and equipment set
Available receivers and equipment - list
Catalogue symbols list, where you can select the appropriate receiver- or equipment symbol, using
the keyboard or mouse.
Description - text field
This field displays description of the item currently highlighted in the list.
Producer - text field

The field contains the producer symbol for the currently highlighted item. The button Info calls
the dialogue with the info on the producer or dealer.
Selected receivers and equipment - list
Catalogue symbols list for items selected for the set.
Selected producer - list
Producers symbols list, where you can select the appropriate symbol using the keyboard or
mouse. The choice of the specific producer will narrow the items symbols list resulting in those
only which are manufactured by the selected producer.
45 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
Appliance type - list
Appliances types list, where you can select the appropriate washbasin type (eg. based washbasin,
double washbasin). The choice of the specific type will narrow the list.
Washbasin types
Copy - button
This button will copy the chosen washbasin (or washbasins) into the selected receivers and
equipment list.
Delete - button
This button will remove the chosen items from the selected receivers and equipment list.
Overview - button
This button will display the dialogue with the detailed characteristics of the currently highlighted
item.
After creating the appliances list (in this example the appliances are washbasins), one of the
washbasins should be ascribed to the pull-down button.
To ascribe one of the list items to the pull-down button
1 Move the mouse cursor onto the pull-down button Washbasins .
2 Press and hold the left mouse key. In a moment, the washbasin list ascribed to the button will
unroll.
3 From the displayed list select appropriate washbasin symbol.
Selection of the washbasin ascribed to the pull-down button
If the selected washbasin has got a base, the pull-down button Washbasins will display the
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 46

Audytor H2O 1.5
following view: . Now, if the button is pressed, the program will enter the mode of inserting this
precise washbasin.
The lists of other equipment and appliances are created identically, also specific appliances
ascribed to other pull-down buttons in the drawing functions toolbar 434 are selected this way.
4.5.4 Pipes drawing and linking

The next stage after drawing receivers 449 and equipment 435 will be inserting the pipe system. To
do so, in the drawing functions toolbar 434 select the tab Pipes 129 , and then choose the pull-
down button 448 relevant for the cold water- , hot water- or circulation pipes.
Tab Pipes
Similarly to the buttons form the Receivers and equipment tab, also the pipe pull-down buttons
can be ascribed with the specific pipe types.
Two pipe drawing modes are available:
The first is based on drawing each pipe segment separately by mouse-clicking the both ends of
the pipe being currently drawn.
The second enables drawing the pipes as a broken line. To enter or leave this pipe drawing
mode, click the button Paint pipes as broken lines from the bottom right corner of the
window with the picture.
47 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
Drawing aid functions buttons
In case of drawing the pipes as broken lines, clicking the right mouse button stops drawing the
subsequent pipe segment. The program then stays on the pipe drawing mode, which facilitates re-
commencing drawing successive pipes in the different position in the picture.
While drawing, the program automatically connects pipes with one another and with the other
system components (receivers 449 , water sources 455 , heat sources 439 , manifolds, etc.). In the
connection point the white rectangle appears. Lacking rectangle means that the connection has not
been executed, in this case mouse-click on the unconnected pipe.
Proper pipe linking - example
If still the connection cannot be executed, it is impossible to perform. Such situations happen
frequently when trying to connect the hot- and cold water pipes, or connecting the subsequent cold
(or hot) water pipe to the receiver already equipped with its relevant pipe.
Unconnected pipes - example
Some appliances have several "hot spots" where the connection should be executed. To connect
the pipe with the appliance, it is enough to approach its end towards the area of the intended link.
The program will automatically match the appropriate connecting point. The appliance type
influences the number and location of the "hot spots". Still, if a pipe has already been connected to
an appliance, linking another pipe is usually impossible.
The program displays the water flow direction in the pipe-runs with directed arrows. While drawing
the installation diagram, the direction is totally random (not necessarily correct), and should not be
intervened with at this stage. The proper direction will be established and displayed after the
calculations have been performed.
The program has been equipped with the pipe linking aid function. If the end of the pipe being drawn
or moved is positioned nearby the pipe or appliance, the connection will be automatically executed.
This function can be switched off, however. To do so, select the command Drawing properties 213
in the menu View 206 or the pop-up menu 447 , and in the displayed dialogue 309 switch off the option
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 48

Audytor H2O 1.5
field Linking aid.
WARNING!!!
The program does not enable drawing the ring systems or the systems supplied from
several water sources.
+ 3,00
+ 0,00
Installation diagram fragment with the drawn pipe system
To enter data on the drawn pipes, use the table Data - Pipes 385 in the table part 453 of the window
Data - Pictures 371 .
Table part of the window Data - Pictures 371 with the table for entering data on pipes
In individual table columns the following information is to be found:
Type Info on pipe type. CW - cold water, HW - hot water, CIR - circulation. A read-only
field.
Pipes Surrogate pipe type symbol 446 (A, B, C, D...) for the pipe-run. Pipe types under the
surrogate symbols are established by calling the dialogue Data - General 297 with
49 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
the command Data 225 General 226 .
Riser Riser number (symbol) 450 for the pipe-run. The riser number info need not be
entered, as the program will graphically read the connections for the pipe-runs and
other system components. Still, the lack of the numbers considerably hinders the
calculations results displayed in the table form.
Item no. Pipe-run number (symbol) within 446 the riser. As before, this column may remain
empty.
dnom Pipe-run nominal diameter, [mm]. Leave this field empty or enter 0 if you want the
program to select the pipe-run diameter automatically. The diameter can be
entered only after completing the pipe types in the column Type. Use help info 439
in form of the list of available diameters when entering the diameter.
Insulation Pipe insulating material symbol. Enter '-' if the pipe is uninsulated.
Instead of the insulating material symbol, you can enter the insulation efficiency in
percent, eg.: 0% if the pipe is uninsulated, or 95% if the pipe is insulated almost
perfectly. The insulation efficiency for the pipes in unheated rooms should not
amount to less than 75 %.
Leave this field empty if you want the program to select the default pipe insulating
material automatically. Default materials info is entered in general data 22 . Button
calls the isolation catalogue.
Thins Insulating material thickness, [mm]. Leave this field empty if you want the program
to select the pipe insulating material thickness automatically.
L Pipe-run length, [m]. As the program retains the vertical scale in the installation
diagram, in case of the vertical pipe-runs this cell may remain empty (the program
will automatically establish its length and display it as: >2.50<). For the horizontal
pipe-runs, if they have been drawn scale-less in the installation diagram (frequently
it is impossible to draw the diagram retaining the horizontal scale), enter their
length here. If you forget about entering the pipe lengths when drawing the
horizontal pipes, while calculating, the program will assume the length of these
pipes basing on the picture. When the calculations have been completed, you will
find the relevant warning messages in the error list 162 . The program will not warn
against the lack of the horizontal pipes length whose length, as read from the
picture, does not exceed 25 cm (it is assumed that they have been drawn retaining
the horizontal scale).
Room Room symbol 450 for the pipe-run. Thanks to applying the concept of the room
zones 450 in the installation diagram, the program will automatically recognize
where the pipes are positioned, and consequently, usually you may leave this field
empty. Still, it sometimes happens that the room zones cannot be drawn in the
way allowing automatic ascribing of the pipes to the rooms, or you wish that the
pipe-run leads through other rooms than the picture shows. Then enter the
relevant room number in the field Room.
WARNING !!!
The function of automatic ascribing the pipe-runs to the room zones

assigns the pipe-run to the room in the zone where its center is located. If
the pipe-run leads through several rooms, the program requires to have
the pipe-run divided into segments laid in subsequent rooms.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 50

Audytor H2O 1.5
Branch Branch type. If the real pipe branch is different from the one drawn, enter the
symbol of the relevant branch. With the typical riser- and receiver 449 departure, the
program will recognize the branch type automatically, and then the field may
remain empty. Still, if the branch scheme in the picture does not fully agree with
the actual pipe connection, enforce the branch type here. The following options are
available:
TPAS - T-joint passage,
TBRA - T-joint branch,
XPAS - X-joint passage,
XBRA - X-joint branch,
TBRANCH - type "T" branch.
E/B The fitting assumed for changing pipe direction in the picture. Select the fitting
type: BEND - bends, ELB - elbows. The program will automatically recognize the
pipe-runs direction changes, and will select bends here as default. If the elbows
are to be entered instead of the bends, enter the symbol ELB here. In other cases,
this field may remain empty.
WARNING!!!
The bends or elbows invisible in the installation diagram need to be
entered additionally into the picture, by selecting the relevant fittings from
the tab Pipes in the drawing functions toolbar 434 .
Status Info on whether the pipe-run is already existing (black color) or newly designed
(green color).
Remarks Place for the possible remarks on the pipe-run.
Or start The pipe-run starting point ordinate, [m]. A read-only field.
Or end The pipe-run end point ordinate, [m]. A read-only field.
The program does not number the pipe-runs automatically, but thanks to the useful functions
of picture fragments copying 452 it is able to keep automatically the numbering style imposed by the
designer. Clear numbering of the system components is obtained this way. Before you start
entering data, try to foresee the proper pipe system numbering 136 .
If it is necessary to draw the system fragment in another position or another picture (another tab),
use remote pipe linking within the picture 450 to connect this part with the rest of the installation
diagram (button ).
51 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
Re m ote pipe linking

w ithin the picture
Remote pipe linking within the picture
While drawing remote pipes connections, remember that their ends can be linked with free pipe
ends only, or leave the apartment manifolds.
Below you will find some examples of the incorrectly drawn remote pipes links.
You cannot conne ct m ore than one pipe

to the e nd of a rem ote pipe link.
A rem ote pipe link cannot be

Re m ote pipe links incorrectly
connected directly to m anifold.
connected in s erie s.
Examples of the incorrect remote pipes links
If it is necessary to draw the system fragment in another picture, use the Remote pipe linking
between the pictures 450 (button ).
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 52

Audytor H2O 1.5
Conne ction w ith Conne ction w ith

installation part installation part
draw n in "Diagram 2" draw n in "Diagram 1"
Arrows show
flow direction
Installation diagram fragments with entered remote pipes links between two pictures
After drawing the remote pipe linking between the pictures, in the table Data - Remote pipe linking
391 in the table part 453 of the window Data - Pictures 371 enter info on which picture the further part
of the system being drawn is located.
Table part of the window Data - Pictures 371 with the table for entering data on remote pipe linking
In individual table columns the following information should be entered:
Type Info on the connection type. A read-only field.
Symbol Connection symbol (arbitrary character string, eg. A).
Pict. name Name of the picture where the remote system part pipes are positioned (according
to the distance from the water source). The empty field means connecting the
pipes form the current picture.
Remarks Place for the remarks on the connection.
Remote pipe linking between the pictures consists of two point groups. The first is base points
nearby the water- or heat source in case of the circulation pipes. The other is remote points, where
the distant (relative to the source) system part is positioned. The arrows on points show the water
flow direction.
53 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
Bas e conne ction points Re m ote connection points,

(closer to w ater s ource ). to which the other system part is connected.
Sym bols of w ate r outflow Arrows Sym bols of w ate r inflow

to the other s ystem part. show form the s ystem part situated
flow closer to w ater source.
direction.
Remote pipe linking between the picture components
After inserting onto the installation diagram drawing, in the remote points linking, both base- and
remote points are visible (linking within the same picture). In this case, you can freely move both
base- and remote points horizontally and vertically (corresponding points will be moved
simultaneously).
When in the table Data - Remote pipe linking 391 in the column Picture name such a name is
entered for the picture where the remote system part is positioned, remote points will be moved
onto this picture.
WARNING!!!
Double mouse-clicking on the remote pipe linking symbol, you can easily enter the
picture containing this system part which is linked with the second remote pipe linking
end.
In this case, base points can still be moved horizontally and vertically, still their position change will
mean the identical corresponding change of remote points positioned in the other picture. Remote
points positioned in the other picture can be moved only horizontally. Such solution ensures that
remote points positioned in the other picture will remain at the same level (retain the same
ordinates) as base points.
Several variants of remote pipe linking between the pictures are available.
Variants of remote pipe linking between the pictures
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 54

Audytor H2O 1.5
4.5.5 Water sources drawing

The water source 455 is the starting point of each system. More than one water source can be
drawn in the installation diagram. This means that one data file is able to contain practically
unlimited (within reasonable, possible to manage technically limits) number of systems supplied
from different water sources. The program also provides the control of such systems.
WARNING!!!
The program will not create pipe system of an individual installation supplied from many
water sources.
To enter the water source, in the drawing functions toolbar 434 select the tab Water sources 128
, and then the button related to the selected water source.
Tab Water sources
Individual cold- or hot water sources are available, group cold- and hot water sources, hot- and
circulation group water sources, and cold- hot- and circulation group water sources.
55 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
+ 3,00
Water
source
+ 0,00
Picture fragment with the water source and distributing pipes system
After drawing water sources, enter data on them in the table Data - Water sources 393 in the table
part 453 of the window Data - Pictures 371 .
Table part of the window Data - Pictures 371 with the table for entering data on water sources
Type Info on the water source type.
Riser Riser number (symbol) 450 for the given water source. The riser number info
need not be entered, as the program will graphically read the connections for
the pipe-runs and other system components. Still, the lack of these numbers
considerably hinders the calculations results displayed in the table form.
P-run Water source number within the riser 446 . As the previous column, this one
also may remain empty.
Symbol Water source symbol.
Building type Type of the building where the system supplied from the selected water
source is positioned. Leave the field empty if you want the program to
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 56

Audytor H2O 1.5
assume the default building type entered in the general data 22 .
Tcw Cold water temperature on leaving the water source, [°C]. Leave the field
empty if you want the program to assume the default value entered in the
general data.
Pcw Cold water disposable pressure, [m]. Leave the field empty if you want the
program to calculate this value automatically.
Thw Hot water temperature on leaving the water source, [°C]. Leave the field
general data.
Phw Hot water disposable pressure, [m]. Leave the field empty if you want the
Pcir Hot water circulation pump disposable pressure, [m]. Leave the field empty if
you want the program to calculate this value
automatically.
Room Room symbol 450 . Enter the room symbol for the water source if the source
is not positioned in the room zone 450 in the picture, or it is located in the
different room than in the picture.
Status Info on whether the water source is already existing (black color) or newly
designed (green color).
Remarks Place for remarks on the water source.
Or cir Circulation water pipe connection point ordinate, [m].
4.5.6 Heat sources drawing

Frequently, buildings are supplied with the waterworks cold water only. In this case, hot water
supplied to the receivers is prepared in individual hot water heaters, double-function boilers, heat
exchangers, etc. Appropriate heat sources 439 need to be included in the installation diagram then,
and the system of cold-, hot- and optionally circulation water pipes should be connected. The
arbitrary number of heat sources can be entered into the installation diagram.
To enter the heat source, in the drawing functions toolbar 434 select the tab Heat sources 128 ,
and then the button relevant to the selected heat source.
57 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
Tab Heat sources
+ 3,00
+ 0,00
System fragment with individual water heaters
WATER SOURCE
System fragment with a hot water accumulator
After drawing heat sources, enter data on them in the table Data - Heat sources 382 in the table part
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 58

Audytor H2O 1.5
453 of the window Data - Pictures 371 .
Table part of the window Data - Pictures 371 with the table for entering data on heat sources
Type Graphic info on the heat source type. A read-only field.
Riser Riser number (symbol) 450 for the given heat source. The riser number info need
not be entered, as the program will graphically read the connections for the pipe-
runs and other system components. Still, the lack of the numbers considerably
hinders the calculations results displayed in the table form.
Item no. Number (symbol) 446 of the heat source within the riser. As the previous column,
this one also may remain empty.
Symbol Catalogue symbol 430 of the heat source. Button calls the relevant catalogue.
A freely chosen symbol can be entered in case of an Other heat source.
Other heat sources
Thw Hot water temperature on leaving the heat source, [°C]. Leave the field empty if you
want the program to assume the default value entered in the general data.
Current Info on whether the heat source is the current water heater. It is relevant if in the
general data 22 (tab Calculations parameters) the option Estimating calculation
flows beyond the heater according to DIN is selected.
Pmin Minimum water pressure before the heat source, [m].
Pmax Maximum allowed water pressure before the heat source, [m]. This field may
remain empty.
Qsmin Minimum sum of standard hot water outflows from the receivers supplied from the
heat source, [dm 3/s]. In case this value is entered, the program will warn if the
actual sum is lower. This field may remain empty.
Qsmax Maximum sum of standard hot water outflows from the receivers supplied from the
59 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
actual value is exceeded. This field may remain empty.
Resist HW Heat source hydraulic resistance for the hot water flow. Enter the resistance value
as Kv 437 [m 3/h], dP [m] or Zeta 440 . The values should be entered as KV=2.0 or
DP=2.5m, or ZT=5. Select the resistance estimation method from the pull-down
list.
The hydraulic resistance estimation method
Resist Cir Heat source hydraulic resistance, for the given circulation water flow. Enter the
resistance value as Kv [m 3/h], dP [m] or Zeta. The values should be entered as
KV=2.0, DP=2.5m or ZT=5.
Pcir Hot water circulation pump disposable pressure, [m]. Leave the field empty if you
want the program to automatically calculate its value.
Connecting set
The set symbol for connecting the heat source and the pipes. Button calls the
set catalogue .364
Using the functions of table text search and replace facilitates symbol exchange for
the sets available in the project.
This field may remain empty if you do not select the option of the full fitting list
creation in General data 22 . The column is visible only if the fittings list
creation module is available in the program.
dnom cw Data on the type and diameter of the ending for the cold water. Button calls the
list enabling the selection of the appropriate ending. Select the ending type in the
left-hand side part, and then the diameter on the right.
creation in General data 22 .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 60

Audytor H2O 1.5
dnom hw Data on the type and diameter of the ending for the hot water
dnom cir Data on the type and diameter of the ending for the circulation return water.
Room Room symbol 450 . Enter the room symbol for the heat source if the source is not
positioned in the room zone 450 in the picture, or it is located in the different room
than in the picture.
Status Info on whether the heat source is already existing (black color) or newly designed
(green color).
Remarks Place for remarks on heat sources.
4.5.7 Fittings- and accessories drawing

In every system, there are cut-off accessories 428 , governing ones and other items (manifolds,
filters, etc.). Moreover, pipes are equipped with by-passes, compensators, S-bends, etc. All these
components need to be entered into the installation diagram drawing.
The tab Pipes 129 in the drawing functions toolbar 434 includes buttons for entering fittings 437 .
Pipes need to be equipped with by-passes, S-bends, reductions, expanders, compensators and
invisible bends and elbows. The program will automatically recognize visible branches (T- or X-
joints) and elbows with reductions in case of connecting pipes of two different diameters.
To enter accessories onto pipes, select the tab Accessories 131 in the drawing functions
toolbar, and then select the pull-down button 448 corresponding to the type of the accessories being
entered, eg. return valve .
Tab Accessories
61 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
The program will not limit the number or type of accessories positioned in a singular pipe-run, still,
while calculating, it may declare the necessity of removing any of them.
WATER SOURCE
Installation diagram fragment with entered fittings and accessories
Most items from the Accessories tab is to be entered directly onto pipes.
In case of manifolds, mixing thermostatic valves for hot domestic water and pressure governing
valves, pipes should be connected to the endings of these appliances.
Examples of connections for manifolds, mixing thermostatic valves for hot domestic water and pressure governing
valves
To enter data on accessories inserted, use the table Data - Accessories 380 in the table part 453 of
the window Data - Pictures 371 .
Table part of the window Data - Pictures 371 with the table for entering data on accessories
In individual table columns enter the following information:
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 62

Audytor H2O 1.5
Type Info on the accessories type.
Symbol Accessories catalogue symbol 430 . When selecting the symbol, use the help info
439 (button ) in form of the accessories catalogue 231 , or using the button
select the requires accessories symbol from the list. The list contains only the
accessories previously selected, but the catalogue enables choosing any
accessories available in the program catalogue. If the necessity of the accessories
type modification occurs, eg. from the regular cut-off valve into the ball valve, use
info as help only, not the list.
the accessories symbols available in the project.
dnom Imposed accessories nominal diameter, [mm]. The program will select the
diameters automatically, and in this case leave the field empty, or enter 0 value
meaning the automatic diameter selection. If you need to impose the specific
diameter, enter its value here. Use help info 439 when selecting the accessories
diameters in form of lists (called by the button ) with available diameter values.
Status Info on whether the accessories is already existing (black color) or newly designed
(green color).
Remarks Place for remarks on accessories.
4.5.8 Room zones drawing

Room zones 450 enable graphic assignment of the system components (pipes, receivers,
accessories, etc.) to rooms. Thanks to that, the program will automatically estimate the
parameters of surrounding pipes air temperature, and where individual system components are
positioned.
To draw the room zone, select the tab Construction in the drawing functions toolbar 434 , and
then the button Room zone .
63 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
+ 3,00
1
Room zone
24 °C
Bathroom
+ 0,00
CELL
5 °C
Cellar
Installation diagram fragment with entered room zones
WARNING !!!
Do not overlap room zones while drawing, do not position one inside another, keep
their borderlines away from the pipes.
Try to align the room zone borderlines with the ceilings axes.
To enter data on room zones, use the table Data - Rooms 391 in the table part 453 of the window
Data - Pictures 371 .
Table part of the window Data - Pictures 371 with the table for entering data on rooms
Symbol Room number (symbol) 450 .
ti Room calculation internal temperature, [°C].
Zone Building zone 429 symbol for the room. Zones inform about room functions. It is
therefore possible to execute calculations for the hot- and cold water supplying
system for multi-functional buildings, eg. an apartment- and office building.
Maximum 30 different zones can be defined for one building.
To enter data on room zones, use the dialogue Data - General 297 called with
General 226 command from Data 225 menu.
Description Room description.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 64

Audytor H2O 1.5
Remarks Place for remarks on rooms.
Data on rooms can also be entered in the dialogue Data - Rooms 308 called from menu Data 225
with the command Rooms 226 , or moved from the program Audytor HL 447 .
4.5.9 System components labels drawing

System components labels 452 enable presentation of data and calculations results in the pictures,
they are frequently associated with pipes and accessories.
To draw a system component label
1 Select the tab Construction in the drawing functions toolbar 434 , and then the button
Component label .
2 With the mouse cursor, indicate the item where the label is to be connected, press and hold the
left mouse key.
3 While holding the left mouse key pressed, pull the label text part onto the appropriate place of
the picture, and release the mouse key.
Info on the label depends on the component the label is associated with. The info set to be placed
on individual labels in the installation diagram with calculations data, can be established with the
command Component label format 233 called from menu Data 225 . Use the command Results label
format 247 called from menu Results 234 , to establish the info set to be placed on labels in the
installation diagram with calculations results.
BALL VALVE
DN Cal. DN Cal.
DN Cal.
L ›0,35‹ m DN Cal.
L ›0,89‹ m
L ›1,35‹ m
DN Cal.
WATER SOURCE
L ›1,55‹ m
BALL VALVE FILTER
DN Cal.
DN Cal. DN Cal.
L ›1,20‹ m
Installation diagram fragment with entered labels for pipes and accessories
65 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
WARNING!!!
To facilitate formatting the label appearances, mouse double-click it. This action will call
the dialogue Data - Labels format 304 , or Results - Labels format 353 in case of the picture
with the calculations results.
The program will not create system components labels automatically.
4.5.10 Completing data in table part

When the picture has been finished, the data on components needs to be completed if it has not
been entered in the time of the drawing in the table part 453 of the window Data - Pictures 371 . In his
case, it is advised to enter the program into the components data edition mode, which will protect
components from the accidental moving or deleting.
To do so, select the button Edit components data in the drawing functions toolbar 434 .
It is also possible to freeze selected picture layers 444 , which will immobilize the components in
these layers (modification will be impossible, only the alteration of their table data). To do so, select
the command Picture layers format 232 from menu Data 225 , and in the displayed dialogue Picture
layers 324 freeze the appropriate layers (column Freeze in the picture layers table).
Components data can be completed in two ways: either individually clicking the following items in
the picture and enter their data in the table part, or select 115 the entire picture fragment, and enter
data choosing the subsequent tabs in the table part. Before starting though, it is advised to
familiarize yourself with the point Entering table data 105 , this should facilitate the process
significantly.
To re-enter the drawing mode after entering data has been completed, select the button Draw
elements in the drawing functions toolbar 434 .
In the way described above, it is relatively easy to draw the arbitrary system fragment, which can
be then copied into different parts of the picture, and thus complete the entire system.
Still, this procedure is not considered as optimal, as the program facilitates drawing when copying
functions 71 and the library of ready blocks 67 are used.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 66

Audytor H2O 1.5
4.5.11 Using ready blocks

The library of ready blocks 437 available in the program enables fast entering complete and ready
fragments into the picture. After doing so, when necessary complete the data on the block
components.
To enter the ready block
1 Select the tab Copying and blocks in the drawing functions toolbar 434 .
2 Select one of the block buttons .
3 Select from the list 440 the appropriate block in the displayed dialogue Blocks 289 . After pressing
the button Select, the highlighted block will be stored into the clipboard 430 , which will change
the mouse cursor for the symbol , and signify the clipboard pasting mode.
4 Indicate the clipboard contents destination with the mouse cursor 440 , and pres the left mouse
key.
5 Holding the left mouse key pressed, move the graphic elements being pasted onto the desired
position and release the left mouse key.
Dialogue Blocks
You can also create your own blocks 68 .
67 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
4.5.12 Own blocks creation

The program enables saving any picture fragment as a graphic block 437 . This can be then pasted
67 into any chosen position, both in the current project 433 and others.
To create the new block
1 Select the button in the drawing functions toolbar 434 to enter the program into the mode of
highlighting and selecting components in the picture.
2 With the mouse cursor 440 , select 115 the components which will constitute the block under
creation.
3 Select the command Create block 206 from menu Edition 197 , or in the tab Copying and blocks
select the button Create block .
4 In the displayed dialogue Block creation 289 , select the category where the block should be
included.
Dialogue Block creation
When creating blocks meant for copying, remember about the rules of copying the data and picture
fragments onto next storeys 125 and horizontal copying of data and pictures 124 .
Some number of exemplary ready standard blocks is available in the program.
To modify the existing block

1 Select the tab Copying an blocks in the drawing functions toolbar 434 .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 68

Audytor H2O 1.5
2 Select one of the buttons calling block sets .
3 In the displayed dialogue Blocks 289 , select the block to be modified.
Dialogue Blocks
4 Click the Edit button.
The program will then enter the block edition mode.
69 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
The program in the block edition mode
In the block edition mode, it is possible to freely modify blocks appearances, using the commands
from the drawing functions toolbar 434 , and edit system components data in the table part 453 . In the
fields Symbol and Description enter the short symbol and detailed block description.
Press the Close button to finish the block's edition. This will save the modified block and re-enter
the program in the regular functioning mode.
WARNING!!!
In the block edition mode, the functions of file operations, calculations, entering data
and calculations overview are unavailable.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 70

Audytor H2O 1.5
4.5.13 Picture fragments copying

These functions facilitate the drawing process significantly and enable vertical copying onto the
next storey or copying horizontally to the left- or right.
The functions differ from the regular copy- and paste functions by the means of the possibilities to
renumber the rooms or pipe-runs, adjust the copied fragment to the floor height, and if necessary
prolong pipe fragments, so as to connect the newly created installation diagram fragment with its
original part.
Any picture fragment can be copied, still it should fit within one storey. The detailed rules of copying
have been described in the points Copying data and picture onto next storey 125 and Horizontal
copying data and pictures 124 .
Tab Copying and blocks
Assuming that floors have already been drawn, the system picture can be performed as follows,
using ready blocks and copying functions:
1 Select the tab Copying and blocks in the drawing functions toolbar 434 , and then the
button Blocks set 1.
2 In the displayed dialogue, select the appropriate block and paste it into the picture, remembering
to position the horizontal room zones 450 edges in the ceilings axes.
3 In the table part, enter data on accessories, rooms and pipes.
Highlighted picture fragment ready to copy
4 With the button Copy right copy the ready picture fragment the required number of times.
71 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
The picture after double-performing of the command Copy right
5 Perform necessary modifications if there are any differences in the subsequent risers.
6 Then select 115 the entire created storey.

7 Finally, using the button Next storey copy this fragment onto the next storeys, as many
times as it proves necessary.
The picture after double-performing of the command Next storey
Only a few minutes will be enough to create the repeatable system, consisting of even a couple of
hundreds receivers and equipment pieces. Naturally, the full repeatability is rarely encountered, and
then required modifications need to be entered.
4.5.14 Other graphic elements drawing

The last stage of creating the installation diagram is usually drawing tables, frames, comments,
system component descriptions, etc. This actions can be performed with commands called from
the tab Graphics in the Drawing 259 toolbar
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 72

Audytor H2O 1.5
Tab Graphics
In the program Audytor H2O, as in other CAD applications, the layer 444 concept has been utilized.
Graphic items from Graphics tab can be positioned in the standard "0" symbol layer, or any
layer created by the user 455 . All other picture elements are fixed to their default layers 433 . Selecting
the layer for positioning the tab elements is done with the pull-down list on the right hand-side of it.
A good example of using the graphic tab elements is drawing the table.
This is commenced with the creation of the new layer where the table will be entered. To do so, in
the tab Graphics select the button Picture layers format .
The dialogue Picture layers 324 for edition purposes will be displayed on the screen.
Dialogue Picture layers
Individual dialogue elements have been described below:
Table
In the subsequent table columns the following information is to be found:
Layer name The name of the layer.

Line style The style of the line (solid, dash, etc.).
Line thickness The thickness of the line.
Line color The color of the line.
Filling color The color of the filling for the items positioned in the layer.
Font type The name of the font type (eg. Arial).
Style Graphically presented font style (regular, bold, italic, underlined).
Size Font size in typographic points.
73 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
Vis. Option field informing whether the layer is to be visible in the picture.
Print. Option field informing whether the layer is accessible for printing.
Frozen Info on whether the layer is frozen.
WARNING!!!
Freezing the layer means that its graphic elements are
inaccessible for modification. This can be the cause of problems
if you happen to forget about changing the layer status and try to
modify the elements. Always check that possibility before
contacting the helpline.
User Info on whether the layer has been defined by the user.
If the calculations data layers are under modification, the following buttons are additionally available
in the dialogue:
Buttons
Adding new user layer.
Removing the selected layer from the list. Only the user defined layers 455 can be
deleted, the default picture layers 433 will not be removed.
WARNING!!!
Removing the layer means naturally deleting all the graphic elements available in this
layer. The delete operation is not to be undone.
Move layers up- or down. The layers order will influence the chronology of drawing
the elements, the layers are drawn according to their table order. The last layer
elements will be drawn as the last, this is important when the elements from
different layers overlap.
WARNING!!!
Only the user defined layers can be moved.
In the displayed dialogue, select the button to create the new table layer. This layer will
be automatically added to the layer table, with the standard name New layer 1. The name should
be changed, let's choose the better one, eg. Table. Now add the remaining layer parameters, such
as the line style, thickness and color, filling color, etc.
The dialogue Picture layers with the added Table layer has been shown below. It has been
assumed that the table layer will be drawn with the solid black line, 1-point thick, the texts will be
written with the bold italic Arial font size 12.
Dialogue Picture layers fragment with the Table layer added
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 74

Audytor H2O 1.5
When the parameters have been established, close the dialogue with the button , and
the new layer has been added to the picture. Now it needs to be selected as the current layer 432 ,
with the pull-down list in the tab Graphics.
Current layer selection
When this action has been performed, all the elements form the Graphics tab will be entered onto
the layer Table.
To draw table frames, use the rectangles, lines, etc., or other elements from the Graphics table, in
order to create eg. the company's logo. When drawing graphic elements, the table part 453 of the
window Data - Pictures 371 will display the table Data - Graphics 381 , where the appearance of
graphic elements being drawn can be modified.
Table part of the window Data - Pictures 371 with the table for edition of graphic elements
Type Graphic element type. A read-only field.
Line style The style of the line for drawing the graphic element.
WARNING!!!
Due to the Windows system limitation, line style other than solid is only
applicable for the thickness 0 or 1.
Line thickness
The thickness of the line for drawing the graphic element.
Line color The color of the line for drawing the graphic element.
Filling color
The color of the filling for the graphic element.
Fill Info on whether the graphic element is to be color-filled.
75 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
Layer Name of the layer where the graphic element is positioned. Pressing the button
on the cell right hand-side will display the dialogue Picture layers 324 which enables
modification of the layers available in the picture and moving the element being
currently edited onto another layer.
WARNING!!!
Graphic elements from the Graphics tab can be moved onto the user
defined layers 455 and default layer 433 0 only.
Prop. Element properties. This field is only active for the DWG 435 , DXF 435 , TIFF 454 , JPG
439 etc. pictures. Pressing the button on the cell right hand-side will display the
dialogue Picture properties 329 which enables modification of the currently edited
picture appearance, loading 90 or scanning 90 the new picture, calibrating, levelling
90 and correcting 100 the existing picture.
WARNING!!!
Mouse double-click the picture edge 443 to obtain the dialogue Picture
properties 329 fast.
WARNING!!!
In the columns "Line style", "Line thickness", "Line color" and "Filling color" it is
possible to select the option "As layer ". This means that the layer properties will be
automatically ascribed to the graphic element being entered onto this layer. This step
will considerably facilitate the drawing process in case of the significant number of
elements to be drawn.
Use the button Text to enter texts onto the picture. The table Data -Texts 392 in the table part of
the window Data - Pictures 371 will enable text modification.
Table part of the window Data - Pictures 371 with the table for text edition
Type Type of the text element. A read-only field.
Texts Texts positioned in the picture. Pressing the button on the cell's right hand-side
will display the dialogue Text 368 with which you can enter several-lines-long texts,
load the text from a file, enter special characters, etc.
Mouse double-clicking the picture text will call the dialogue Text 368 fast.
Justify Text justification method (to the left, center, right).
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 76

Audytor H2O 1.5
Font Font type.
Style Font style (italic, bold, etc.).
Size Font size.
Color Text color.

on the cell's right hand-side will display the dialogue Picture layers 324 which
enables modification of the layers available in the pciture and moving the text being
WARNING!!!
WARNING!!!
In the columns "Font", "Style", "Size" and "Color" it is possible to select the option "As
layer ". This means that the layer properties will be automatically ascribed to the text
element being entered onto this layer. This step will considerably facilitate the drawing
process in case of the significant number of elements to be drawn.
Table-drawing is then fast and easy. When the table has been completed, group all its elements.
To group selected picture elements
1 Select 115 in the picture all elements to be grouped.
2 In the toolbar Graphics edition 262 menu, select the command Group .
Picture fragment with the created table
In the similar way you can also enter the picture frame, additional descriptions and other elements.
The program does not supply ready table filters, still it is possible to create such with the available
graphic elements, and save as blocks 68 .
If any element of the Graphics tab has been pasted onto the incorrect layer, move it onto
another layer created by the user 455 , or the "0" symbol layer.
To move elements onto another layer
1 Select the elements to be moved.

2 In the tab Graphics , click the button Move onto another layer .
3 In the displayed dialogue Picture layers 324 , select the new layer for elements being moved.
77 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
4.6 Deciding on pictures layout

After- or while drawing the installation diagram, it is possible to establish parameters of individual
picture elements appearance, as well as decide which elements are to be visible, or are meant for
printing.
To modify line thickness, styles and colors, and styles, sizes and types of fonts ascribed to
individual picture layers 444
1 In menu Data 225 select command Picture layers format 232 .
2 In the displayed dialogue Picture layers 324 , establish new parameters of the selected layers.
In the dialogue Picture layers 324 you can also directly establish parameters of visibility and printing
for individual layers. Dialogue Picture layers has been described in detail in the previous point.
It is also possible to modify label format for individual system components.
To modify label format
1 In menu Data 225 select command Component label format 233 .
2 In the displayed dialogue Data - Labels format 304 , select the tab corresponding to the type of
labels being modified.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 78

Audytor H2O 1.5
Label type
se lection tabs
Preview of the
edited label
Label
styles
list
De scription of the
se lected label e le m ent
Available
elem ents
list
Buttons for
Ite m line
the m anagem ent Label elem ent
param e te rs
of styles lis t param e te rs
Dialogue Data - Component labels format
The dialogue has been described in detail below:
In the dialogue top part there are tabs for selecting the type of the label being formatted.
Label styles - list
This is the list of the defined available label styles. The buttons positioned below the list enable
defining new styles, opening and saving styles in files, and deleting styles. Individual buttons will
perform the following operations:
Saves changes made in the label style currently being modified. These changes are also
saved when other label symbol is highlighted in the list.
Cancels changes made in the currently modified label style.
Adds new label style to the list.
Deletes selected label styles from the list.
Displays dialogue Open labels 320 loading label styles saved in files.
Displays dialogue Save labels 358 storing label styles highlighted in the list.
Highlights all list elements.
Symbol - edition field
79 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
Label style symbol, unique for each label style, obligatory to enter.
Description - edition field
Label style description.
Labels elements - list
List of elements to be entered in the label. The description of highlighted element is displayed in the
window below the picture with the defined label preview.
Preview - picture
The picture with the defined label preview.
Label format - pull-down list
The list enabling selection of the format for the label under design.
Item format - group
The group containing controls for establishing the format of the currently selected label element.
The function of each controls is as follows:
Text before The text is positioned before the label element eg. Insul. before the
insulation symbols.
Text after The text is positioned after the label element eg. mm after the insulation
thickness.
Hide when empty Hides the label element when it's empty.
Buttons The buttons in the lower group part for entering untypical characters into
the fields Text before and Text after.
Item line format - group
Justifying Justifying style for the label line.
Frame style Style of the frame drawn around the label line.
Hide outermost spaces Hides optional spaces occurring at the beginning and at the end of
the line.
Entire line Drawing the frame of the width of the whole line, independently on the
text's width.
Defining the label format is done by pulling the symbols of the label elements from the list Label
items onto the preview picture.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 80

Audytor H2O 1.5
To place the new item in the label definition
1 Move the mouse cursor onto the item symbol in the list Label items.
2 Click and hold the left mouse key.
3 Holding the left mouse key pressed, move the item symbol onto the Preview.
4 Place the element in the selected label place and let go of the left mouse key.
Insert point
Insert m ode cursor
Dragging of the label elem ent

into previe w panel
Adding new item to the label
The activities described above are called element moving.

Deleting the items form the label definition or changing their position is equally easy, and done
analogically with the mouse.
Re m ove m ode curs or
Removing the item from the label
After approved positioning of label elements, decide on their appearance and that of the entire lines,
81 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
by using the controls from the groups Item format and Item line format.
You can define the unlimited number of label styles. The functions of styles saving- and loading
enable to move these between different computers.
WARNING!!!
Dialogue Data - Labels format 304 can be quickly called by mouse double-clicking the
label in the picture.
See also: menu Data 225
commands: Picture layers format 232 , Component label format 233
menu Results 234
commands: Picture layers format 245 , Results labels format 247 , Installation diagram drawing
and entering data on system components 32 , Storeys plan views drawing 82 , Entering
underlays into the project 89 , Entering pictures from a file 90 , Scanning pictures 90 , Entering
pictures from the clipboard 93
4.7 Drawing storeys plan views

The program enables creation of the complete graphic documentation of the system design, thanks
to the possibility of displaying the calculations results on the storey plan views.
In the bottom part of the window Data - Pictures 371 , there are tabs with pictures available in the
project.
Available graphic measures are installation diagrams, plan view and pictures (ie. rough drawings,
schematic diagrams, etc.). Button on the left hand-side of the tabs will edit the picture list in the
project, it will display the dialogue Pictures list 333 .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 82

Audytor H2O 1.5
Example of the pictures list in the project
Buttons on the list left hand-side will add and delete pictures from the project, and change their
order. Bottom right hand-side part edition field will change the name of the picture selected in the
list.
Moving the tabs can be also used for the management of the project pictures list.
Fast modification of the pictures names, adding and deleting can also be performed with the pop-
up menu 447 obtained by pressing the right mouse key over the pictures tabs.
Pop-up tab menu with the pictures list
The program Audytor H2O facilitates design, however it has not been equipped with the graphic
functions for creating the underlays. Naturally, it is possible to utilize for this purpose graphic
elements available in the drawing functions toolbar in the tab Graphics . In this way, you can
create your own blocks 441 with typical building components (eg. windows, doors), still the time
needed for drawing the entire project this way will be relatively long.
Optimally, the designer should have the underlay available in the electronic version (as a file 436 ).
Then it could be easily inserted from a file 90 . If the underlay is accessible as the "paper version"
only, it will be advisable to scan 90 it.
Pictures can also be moved 93 from other programs using the clipboard 430 . The preferred graphic
83 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
format 437 - because of the pictures quality and size - is EMF 435 , optionally WMF 456 .
The methodology of preparing underlays has been described in detail in Entering underlays into the
project 89 .
To start drawing system components on storey plan views, first choose the tab of one of the
pictures meant for the plan views (picture icon ).
Exemplary situation of drawing on the underlay read from the file has been described below.
At first, prepare the layer where the underlay will be entered. To do so, in menu Data 225 select the
command Picture layers format 232 . In the displayed dialogue Picture layers 324 , press the button
Add to obtain a new layer, which then should be named, eg. Underlays.
Dialogue Picture layers with the added layer Underlays
WARNING !!!
Position the layer meant for underlays at the very top if the layer list in the project.
Otherwise - while printing and refreshing the screen - the picture components placed
on the earlier layer may be covered by the underlays.
After the new layer has been created, mark it as active by selecting such an option in the drawing
functions toolbar (tab Graphics ).
Drawing functions toolbar, tab Graphics with the selected active layer Underlays
To load underlays from files, use the pull-down button 448 Insert picture from the drawing
functions toolbar 434 .
Loading the underlay form a file
The program accepts pictures in most commonly encountered vector formats 455 (WMF 456 , EMF
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 84

Audytor H2O 1.5
435 , DXF 435 , DWG 435 ), as well as the raster 449 ones (BMP 429 , JPG 439 , JPEG, TIF 454 , TIFF, GIF
437 , ICO, PNG).
DXF and DWG-format pictures are automatically calibrated while loading, but other pictures need
the calibration to be performed after loading. This action has been described in detail in the point
Levelling, calibrating, cropping 94 .
When the underlay is ready, you can start entering system components by selecting the tab Plan
views in the drawing functions toolbar 434 . There you will find all the system components to
be drawn in the plan views.
Tab Plan views
On storey plan views you can enter pipes, water sources, heat sources, receivers, equipment,
accessories, appliances and labels. In case of water sources, heat sources, receivers, equipment,
accessories or appliances, there are suitable pull-down buttons to select individual component
type.
WARNING !!!
Pictures with storey plan views are only to be used for displaying the calculations
results. The program will not control the correctness of connections for pipes drawn in
plan views, will not read their length form the view, or check the correctness of the
accessories positioning. All data of this sort must be entered into the installation
diagram.
The order of drawing for individual components of the system is arbitrary. It is advised, though, to
start with drawing the equipment and then receivers. The following step can be drawing pipes and
accessories. As the last step, labels should be attached to components.
Drawing components on views of subsequent storeys can be facilitated by the use of painting the
previous picture option, activated with the button , positioned in the bottom right corner of the
picture window 371 .
Paint the pre vious picture
Activated option paint the previous picture
Thanks to this option, while drawing you can see the picture of the previous storey as through the
"tracing paper", which facilitates positioning of analogous appliances on the view currently being
drawn. The visibility of the previous picture elements can be modified in the dialogue Drawing
85 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
properties 309 (edition field Previous picture grey level), called from the menu View 206 with the
command Drawing properties 213 .
Underlay with the active option paint the previous picture
Remember to switch off the painting function when you finish drawing plan views with many
components, as it slows down the drawing process considerably (two pictures must be prepared
at once).
WARNING!!!
Do not draw the components from the tab Plan views on the installation diagram. Also,
do not draw the items from the remaining tabs (except for the Graphics tab) on the
storey plan views.
The text Not linked appears on the labels linked to the system components drawn on the plan
view. This text informs that the item drawn on the view has not been connected (does not
recognize its equivalent) with the corresponding element on the installation diagram.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 86

Audytor H2O 1.5
Plan view fragment with entered system components
To connect the view item with its equivalent on the diagram
1 In the drawing functions toolbar 434 select the tab Plan views , and then - using the button
Connect the installation diagram with the plan view switch the program into the
corresponding linking mode.
2 In the drawing part of the system picture window, display the diagram and the view of the
pictures next to each other.
87 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
Installation diagram- and plan view pictures ready to initiate the connecting procedure.
3 Click the first element of the couple (eg. cold water pipe on the diagram) with the mouse cursor
440 (shape - indicating the first element).
4 Click the corresponding element on the view, when the cursor takes the following shape
(indicating the second element).
Repeat the above procedure until all labeled system components on the storey plan views are
connected to the corresponding installation diagram items. When linking has been completed, the
items on the view will be described with labels analogous to the ones on the diagram.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 88

Audytor H2O 1.5
Plan view fragment with connected system components
While connecting diagram elements with the ones of the view, remember to keep the type
conformity. You will not connect eg. the receiver from the diagram with the pipe from the view. The
specific diagram element is System component info which can be connected to any system
component from the diagram. Such info can be also accompanied with any picture of an untypical
appliance to be shown on the view (eg. "different receiver"). System component info can be also
connected with the diagram room zone.
Entering underlays into the project 89 , Entering pictures from a file 90 , Scanning pictures 90 ,
Entering pictures from the clipboard 93 , Installation diagram drawing and entering data on
system components 32 , Deciding on pictures layout 78
4.8 Entering underlays into the project

It is often required to enter the picture of the project under design. Pictures can be entered by
reading pictures from a file 90 , scanning 90 or pasting from clipboard 93 . After being entered,
pictures frequently require levelling, calibrating, cropping 94 and additional correction 100 .
See also: Entering data 21 - overview, Entering underlays into the project 89 - overview
Entering pictures from a file 90 , Scanning pictures 90 , Entering pictures from the clipboard 93
, Levelling, calibrating, cropping 94 , Picture processing 100 , Graphic formats 437
dialogues: Open picture 320 , Scan 358 , Level, calibrate, crop 326 , Picture processing 321 ,
Picture properties 329
89 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
4.8.1 Entering pictures from a file

Technical drawings (eg. underlays) are now as a default created using computers. They are then
available in the electronic format as files 436 . Vector formats 455 (eg. DWG 435 , DXF 435 , WMF 456 ,
EMF 435 ) are the most suitable for technical drawings. Picture files can also be created as scans,
then they are almost always available in the raster format 449 .
To enter a picture in the DWG or DXF format
If the picture to be entered is available as the DWG or DXF format, while loading the picture, it will
be necessary to complete information from the dialogue Picture units 332 :
Dialogue Picture units
Select the appropriate unit from the pull-down list.
To facilitate this operation, the program will display the original dimensions in the picture, for the
highlighted unit.
The program cooperates with the most frequently used vector formats 455 (WMF, EMF, DXF,
DWG) and the raster 449 ones (BMP, JPG, JPEG, TIF, TIFF, GIF, ICO, PNG).
4.8.2 Scanning pictures

Scanning enables to transfer into the computer technical drawings available in the "paper version"
only.
To scan the picture in the program
1 Insert the picture into the scanner neatly. You will be able to level the picture later, still the
precision is important.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 90

Audytor H2O 1.5
2 In the drawing functions toolbar, select the tab Graphics , press the pull-down button 448
Insert picture and select the command Scanning picture .
The dialogue Scanning 358 will be displayed:
Dialogue Scanning
3 Select the available scanner in the field Scanner by choosing from the list called with F1 or
button.
4 Decide, whether the standard scanner interface 433 will be used. If not, control the scanning
from the dialogue Scanning 358 . This will enable eg. automatic resolution selection, and
therefore is recommended.
91 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
WARNING!!!
Not all scanner drivers fully comfort with the TWAIN specification 455 , so the
performance of the scanning may depend on the scanner and its driver. To avoid
problems, use the standard scanner interface (marked field "Show the standard
scanner interface"). However, this means that the user personally will have to enter
preferred resolution values into the scanner interface.
5 Enter data on the scanned original and the predicted printout in the section Resolution
selection, and click the button , which will display the selected
resolution. If the field Show the standard scanner interface is marked, this value will have to
be entered manually in the interface.
Section Resolution selection
6 Next select color depth 430 . To save memory, technical drawings should be entered as
"black&white", so this option can be selected already here, before scanning. However, many
correction 100 possibilities will be from then on unavailable, that is why it is recommended
(especially to the advanced users) to scan the pictures in the "greyscale", correct the picture if
necessary, and only then convert it into "black&white" format.
7 If the standard scanner interface is in use, move directly to point 10.
8 Click the button Scan preview, which will display the preview in the window on the right hand-
side of the dialogue.
9 Mark the scanning area with the tool Cutting . It should be done with some safety margin,
and then cropped precisely in the dialogue Level, calibrate, crop 326 .
10 Now click the button , which will start the scanning procedure, or show the
standard scanner interface, if the appropriate option has been selected.
WARNING!!!
In case of the standard scanner interface, remember to enter the proper resolution
and color depth.
11 The scanned picture will be displayed above the tab Scanned picture. You can enter
necessary corrections now or after entering it into the project.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 92

Audytor H2O 1.5
12 Click the button . The dialogue Level, calibrate, crop 326 will appear, where you will be able to
perform basic operations on the picture 94 .
13 Next click the button which will call the dialogue Picture correction 321 , especially useful with
low quality originals.
WARNING!!!
Remember to eventually convert the picture into the "black&white" format.
14 When the correction has been performed successfully, click the button . The picture
will be ready to be inserted into the project, and the mouse cursor will appear as .
4.8.3 Entering pictures from the clipboard

Pictures in the electronic format (CAD, CorelDraw, MS Word pictures) can be directly moved to the
program Audytor H2O and used as underlays. One of the methods to do so is using the clipboard
430 , alternatively you can save the picture as a file and then insert it 90 .
When inserting the picture from the clipboard to the programAudytor H2O, for the raster 449
pictures select the option From clipboard TIF, and for the vector 455 ones - From clipboard EMF
(optionally WMF).
WARNING!!!
The quality and volume of pictures will be optimized when the vector graphics is
used.
Any graphic element can be inserted, such as spreadsheet tables, word processor texts, pictures,
company logos, etc., both into plan views, as well as installation diagrams.
Select the appropriate layer in the tab Graphics for entering pictures, eg. create the new
Underlay layer and there place the plan view drawing.
WARNING!!!
Underlay layer should be positioned as the first in the layer list, otherwise while screen
printing and refreshing, the picture components positioned in the earlier layers will be
obscured by the underlay.
Frequently, after inserting, the picture requires additional calibration 94 , so that its dimensions
93 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
agree with the ones in the program Audytor H2O. Also cropping might prove necessary.
4.8.4 Levelling, calibrating, cropping

After the picture has been inserted into the program Audytor H2O, it is usually necessary to
perform its levelling and cropping, also the calibration might prove necessary to adjust the picture to
its electronic equivalent.
To level the picture
1 Mouse double-click the picture edge 443 .
Picture's edge
2 Dialogue Picture properties 329 will be displayed.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 94

Audytor H2O 1.5
Dialogue Picture properties
3 Click the button which will display the dialogue Levelling, calibrating,
cropping 326 .
95 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
Dialogue Levelling, calibrating, cropping
4 To level the picture, select a relatively long horizontal or vertical segment in the picture.
WARNING!!!
The longer the segment, the more accurate the levelling operation.
5 Select the tool Level picture or Plumb picture . The mouse cursor will change its
appearance appropriately.
6 Draw the levelling or plumbing segment so as to align it with any horizontal or vertical element
of the picture.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 96

Audytor H2O 1.5
Le velling segm e nt
Levelling of the picture
7 Zoom the picture to set the segment ends precisely. Select the tool Zoom - Window and
mouse mark one of the levelling- or plumbing segment ends.
Zoom on one of the ends of the levelling segment
8 Move the segment's end onto the appropriate position.
97 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
9 Repeat this operation for another end of the segment.
10 Click the button or .

The picture will be rotated suitably.
If required, in the same dialogue you can then perform the calibration.
To calibrate the picture
1 As previously, decide on one horizontal- or vertical picture segment of the known length.
2 Select the tool Horizontal calibration or Vertical calibration .
3 Draw the levelling or plumbing calibrating segment of the known length.
Calibrating se gm ent
Picture calibration
WARNING!!!
The longer the segment, the more accurate the calibrating operation.
4 As previously, zoom the picture to set the segment ends precisely.
5 In the edition field Horizontal/Vertical dimension, enter the actual dimension of the calibrating
segment (in meters):
The field Calibrate proportionally should usually be selected. However, if the picture is not
calibrated properly, it is recommended to unmark this field and perform the separate levelling
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 98

Audytor H2O 1.5
and plumbing.
6 Click the button or .

The picture will be calibrated suitably.
If the picture has got unnecessary margins, it is now recommended to crop it
To crop the picture
1 Select the tool Cropping . The mouse cursor will change its appearance correspondingly.
2 Select the target rectangular area in the picture.
Cropping
area
Picture cropping
3 Click the button . The picture will become suitably cropped.
Picture correction 100 might now prove necessary, as well as eg. line enhancement, change into the
"black&white" format, etc.
99 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
4.8.5 Picture correction

Raster 449 (bitmap) pictures often require additional correction, eg. brightness or contrast change,
line enhancement, changing into the "black&white" format, etc., after being read from a file 90 or
scanned 90 .
To save memory and facilitate operations, scanned underlays should be entered as "black&white"
format, rather than "color" or "greyscale". Still, it is recommended to scan the pictures in the
"greyscale", correct the picture if necessary, and only then convert it into "black&white" format.
To perform the picture correction after inserting it into the project
1 Mouse double-click the picture edge 443 .
Picture's edge
2 Dialogue Picture properties 329 will be displayed.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 100

Audytor H2O 1.5
3 Click the button which will display the dialogue Picture correction 321 .
101 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
Dialogue Picture correction
4 On the right hand-side, the picture under correction will appear. Select the picture fragment
which will serve as a sample for observing the results of executing individual commands of the
picture correction.
In the middle part of the dialogue, the selected sample will appear in three versions: the original
picture before correction, the result picture after performing all the commands except for the
last one, and the final result picture after performing all the selected commands.
Select the sample size with the zoom button .
5 Click the pull-down button 448 to display the list of available commands.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 102

Audytor H2O 1.5
Available commands
6 Select the appropriate command from the list.
7 If the picture's brightness is inappropriate (too fair or too dark), select the command
Brightness and choose the parameter value from the range –255 to +255. Positive values will
lighten the picture, while the negative ones will darken it. Zero value will not change the
brightness level.
8 To modify the picture's contrast, select the command Contrast and choose the parameter
value from the range 0 to 65000. Value 100 is neutral, not changing the contrast level. Those
above 100 will increase the contrast level, and below 100 will decrease it.
WARNING!!!
Commands Brightness and Contrast will have no effect if the picture format is
"black&white".
All available commands have been described in Picture correction - dialogue 321 .
9 Convert the picture into the "black&white" format if the correction has been completed. To do
so, select the command Black&white (threshold). Three conversion methods exist, but it is
the threshold method which seems to be the most suitable for technical drawings. All pixels
fairer than the given threshold value will be assumed as white, and those darker - as black.
10 Initially, the threshold value will be assumed automatically, you can change it with the buttons
though, simultaneously observing the picture's sample. In this way, the optimal threshold value
can be established, so that the picture is clear and does not contain any optical disturbances.
Below, you will find three pictures acquired in the result of applying three example threshold
values. In the first case, the threshold value has obviously been too low. It is relatively clear, still
103 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
the lines are dash. The second picture - obtained for the middle threshold value level - is legible.
In the last picture the threshold value has been set as too high, and the picture is illegible.
Threshold value too low. The lines loose continuity.
Threshold value set correctly. The lines are readable.
Threshold value too high. There are optical disturbances.
Adding the subsequent command, you create the picture correction scheme 445 . You can use
this scheme to correct next pictures.
11 After the entire correction scheme has been completed, click the button and wait,
until the program corrects the whole picture (this can take even several minutes, depending on
its size and the number of commands selected).
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 104

Audytor H2O 1.5
4.9 Entering table data

The program has been equipped with the table set for entering and correcting the current data 432
on system components entered into the picture of the installation diagram. Below, you will find the
detailed description of the rules for entering table data.
The table consists of several cells arranged as columns and rows. The cells in subsequent
columns have got specific length (for specific number of characters), there you will enter the
necessary quantities (eg. the pipe length, the receiver symbol, etc.) In the table heading 454 there
are symbols informing what should be entered into individual columns.
Example table with data on pipes
Some of the column headers contain texts written in green font. In this case, the cells can often be
left empty and then the program will assume relevant values for them when performing the
calculations. It is however important to ensure if the automatically assumed value is correct, in
order to avoid possible errors.
Entering data means appropriate filling of individual table cells. Data entered into individual cells is
simultaneously checked. In case the error is detected, the program displays the warning message
about the cause and type of this error. In most cases, it also prohibits entering the next table cell.
Exemplary error warning message
The value entered wrongly should be corrected, or the cell completely emptied, then it will be
possible to continue work with other table cells.
WARNING!!!
The quantity being entered into the current table cell 433 will be saved only when the
next cell has been entered. This means that until the current cell is active, the program
keeps the previously saved value stored.
The following points contain the detailed description of the selected rules for entering table data.
See also: Entering data 21 - overview, Entering table data 105 - overview
tables: Data - Water sources 393 , Data - Heat sources 382 , Data - Pipes 385 , Data - Receivers
105 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
and equipment 387 , Data - Accessories 380 , Data - Rooms 391 , Data - Remote pipes links 391 ,
Data - Texts 392 , Data - Graphics 381
Help info 106 , Table navigation 106 , Sorting table contents 107 , Fast table filling 108
terms: Current table column 433 , Current table cell 433 , Current table row 433 , System pictures
window table part 453 , Table heading 454
4.9.1 Help info

Each table cell is associated with the help info 439 , whose type depends on the table value being
entered: this can be the dialogue with the short value description, or catalogue or list for selecting
the appropriate value. This info is available after pressing button, or moving the mouse cursor
onto the appropriate table cell (the info will be displayed in the status bar 452 ).
If, for instance the catalogue symbol 430 of the receiver or equipment is to be entered into the cell,
the help info will be the dialogue Receivers and equipment catalogue 231 , where the appropriate
symbol should be selected.
Sometimes the button is displayed in the table next to the edition field, which calls the available
field list or the appropriate catalogue.
4.9.2 Table navigation

This can be done with the mouse or keyboard buttons.
Selected table navigation keys
Enter new line.
Remove current line 433 .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 106

Audytor H2O 1.5
4.9.3 Sorting table contents

To sort the table contents
1 From menu View 206 or the pop-up menu 447 select the command Sort table 224 .
2 In the displayed dialogue, select the filter 452 according to which the table will be sorted.
Exemplary dialogue for determining the table sorting filter
You can also use fast sorting function.
To sort the table contents fast
1 Move the mouse cursor 440 over the heading of the column to be sorted.
2 Point with the mouse cursor and press the sorting button.
Sort button highlighted with the mouse cursor
In some cases, sorting facilitates data entering, still not every table can be sorted!
107 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
4.9.4 Fast table filling

This function will enable entering the same values into more than one table line and it will usually
facilitate entering table data procedure.
To enter data simultaneously (eg. for more than one valve)
1 Select the picture fragment (or the entire picture) where the valves are positioned.
Selecting the picture fragment with the valves
2 In the table part of the picture window 453 , select the tab Accessories to display the table
Data - Accessories 380 .
3 Sort the table according to the Type column, so that individual accessories types are
positioned in the table next to one another.
4 For the first valve, enter the valve symbol with its diameter and mark the entered fields.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 108

Audytor H2O 1.5
Table Data - Accessories 380 with entered and highlighted data for one valve
5 Move the mouse cursor onto the small black square ( ) in the right bottom corner of the
selected area (the cursor will display the shape to signify that the program is ready to fill table
rows).
6 Holding the left mouse key pressed, point the table area to be filled with data entered earlier in
the originally highlighted fragment.
Table Data - Accessories 380 with the highlighted area for filling
7 Release the left mouse key, and the program will fill the pointed table area.
109 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
Table Data - Accessories 380 with the filled area
4.10 Drawing graphic elements: basics of creating and editing

The program's graphic processor enables drawing individual system components and other
graphic elements, with their later edition (moving, copying, pasting, deleting, editing components
data).
Drawing and edition methods in the program are very similar to the methods you are familiar with
from other popular graphic programs of the MS Windows environments.
The following points contain the detailed description of the selected rules for drawing graphic
elements.
See also: Drawing graphic elements: basics of creating and editing 110 - overview
Drawing: getting started 111 , Graphic elements drawing 112 , Graphic elements selecting 115 ,
Graphic elements dimensions change and rotating 116 , Copying data and the picture onto the
next storey 125 , Copying data and the picture horizontally 124 , Drawing functions toolbar 434
menu Edit 198 , menu Data 225
command Drawing properties 213
dialogue Drawing properties 309
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 110

Audytor H2O 1.5
4.10.1 Drawing: getting started

To start drawing the installation diagram, use the window Data - Pictures 371 . After the program has
been started, or the new data file opened, this window will be displayed, taking the entire program
work area 18 .
To display the window also use the command Pictures 226 called from menu Data 225 , or the button
Data - Pictures in the Data toolbar 260 .
Draw ing functions

toolbar
Scale selection
Table part

The window consists of the drawing part 453 (two picture views of the installation diagram) meant
for drawing, and the table part 453 for entering data on the entered system components. The
proportions between the window parts can be modified with the mouse.
When drawing individual elements, select the proper picture scale 445 with the commands in menu
View 206 and the pop-up menu 447 . Also the picture calibration button 442 from the drawing functions
toolbar 434 can be used here.
In the picture's right bottom corner, you will find the buttons for the most frequently used drawing
aid functions.
111 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
Grid
Mous e s nap precision
Paint pipes as broken lines
Pipe link ing aid function
ORTO m ode
Se lect crosse d com ponents

Paint previous picture
Show w ater flow direction

De taile d draw ing propertie s
Drawing aid functions buttons
4.10.2 Graphic elements drawing

The window Data - Pictures 371 has got two activity modes:
The first is the drawing mode 435 (it is switched on as a default immediately after the window has
been displayed). It enables drawing, moving and deleting the elements in the drawing part of the
window 453 , as well as edition of data on selected picture components in the table part of the
window 453 .
The second mode is the mode for edition data on the selected elements 431 . This one will enable
highlighting the elements 115 (without the possibility to move them, delete or modify their
appearance) in the drawing part of the window 453 , as well as edition of data on the highlighted
picture's elements in the table part of the window 453 . Thanks to this solution, it will be possible to
enter data without the possible displacement of the components under modification.
Use the buttons in the drawing functions toolbar 434 to select the window's mode.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 112

Audytor H2O 1.5
Re painting the picture
Se lecting Moving
m ode the picture
Draw ing m ode
Data editing
m ode
Scale selection
The program in the mode of graphic elements drawing
If the drawing functions toolbar 434 is not displayed on the screen, switch it on with the command
Toolbars 212 called from menu View 206 .
As a default, after displaying the window Data - Pictures 371 , the program will be in the mode of
element selection (chosen button in the drawing functions toolbar) in the picture. To enter the
drawing mode, select the component to be drawn. To do so, in the drawing functions toolbar select
the tab with the category of the components to be drawn, and then click this component's button.
Se lected button for

cold w ate r pipe draw ing
Se lected tab
Pipes
Example of drawing cold water pipes
The relevant component button is now pressed, which means that the program has entered the
drawing mode. This is also visible in the mouse cursor shape, which will look as follows : in
case of the cold water pipe about to be drawn.
To draw a pipe
1 Select the pipe drawing button (see the picture above).
2 Mouse-cursor point the pipe's point of origin in the drawing part of the window. Press and hold
the left mouse key (or click it once).
3 Holding the left mouse key pressed, move the mouse cursor to the pipe's end-point (or show
the end-point and click once again).
4 Release the left mouse key (if still pressed).
When these actions have been correctly executed, as a result you will obtain the pipe picture,
similar to the one below.
113 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
Cold water pipe's picture is ready
While the program is still in the drawing mode, repeating above actions will result in drawing
subsequent graphic elements (more cold water pipes in the example).
To re-enter the selecting mode, press the elements selection button , or in the drawing
functions toolbar. The mouse cursor will then appear as the arrow .
Receivers, equipment, accessories and some other graphic elements will be drawn differently,
though.
To draw a washbasin
1 In the drawing functions toolbar 434 select the tab Receivers and equipment , and then
the button Washbasins .
2 If the option Draw the component is marked in the drawing properties (menu View 206
command Drawing properties 213 ), then this component will be immediately entered when the
moving cursor is moved across the screen. In this case, point with the mouse cursor your
washbasin's desired destination in the drawing part.
If the above option is unmarked, press the left mouse key to point the washbasin's destination
precisely and release the left mouse button.
You can switch on the grid 439 and the thread cursor 454 to facilitate precise optical estimation of the
cursor location on the screen. To do so, in the menu View 206 select the command Drawing
properties 213 , and in the displayed dialogue Drawing properties 309 mark the option fields Grid and
Thread cursor.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 114

Audytor H2O 1.5
4.10.3 Graphic elements selecting

To select elements in the picture
1 In the drawing functions toolbar 434 , select the button to enter the program into the point and
select 431 mode.
2 Move the mouse cursor onto the element to be selected and click the left mouse key.
3 While holding the button pressed, you can click other elements to select them as well.
WARNING!!!
In case of pasted pictures (eg. underlays), click their edge 443 to select them.
Selected objects change their color to green, as a default.
Some picture elements selected
It is also possible to simultaneously select the group of elements inside the highlighted area, or
crossing it.
To select the group of elements simultaneously
1 In the drawing functions toolbar 434 select the button to enter the program into the point and
select 431 mode.
2 With the mouse cursor, point one of the corners of the area where you wish to select the
elements.
3 Holding the left mouse key pressed, highlight the selection area.
4 Release the left mouse key, and the program will select the elements within the highlighted
area.
5 While holding the button pressed, you can mark subsequent elements by clicking, or
using the selection areas.
115 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
Some components in the picture highlighted using the window selection
As a default, only the elements entirely positioned within the selection area will be marked by the
program. In the above picture, some pipes have not been highlighted, because they are located
partially out of the selecting area. However, it is possible to modify the elements selection mode, so
that also the objects crossed by the selection area are highlighted (ie. if only a part is located within
the area). To do so, in menu View 206 select the command Drawing properties 213 , and in the
displayed dialogue Drawing properties 309 , in the group Components selection, mark the field
Select crossed components. Temporarily, highlighting crossed components can be obtained by
holding the key pressed.
4.10.4 Graphic elements dimensions change and rotating

You can modify dimensions, as well as the rotation angle of previously drawn components.
To change dimensions or rotate the graphic element
1 In the drawing functions toolbar 434 select the button to enter the program into the point and
select 431 mode.
2 With the mouse cursor, select 115 one element only, whose dimension or the rotation angle is
to be modified. If these actions are feasible for the selected element, in its characteristic points
small dark squares will appear.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 116

Audytor H2O 1.5
Selected pipe with visible characteristic points for moving its ends
3 Move the mouse cursor onto the selected square, so that it will display the following shape .
4 Press the left mouse key.
5 While holding the left mouse key pressed, move the highlighted point onto the new position and
release the mouse key.
Some elements (eg. washbasins) do not have characteristic points for modifying their dimensions.
Some components only have points for changing their rotation angle. Typical cases have been
described below:
Select these points to modify the location of the

segment's ends.
Select this point to rotate the element 180 deg.
Select this point to rotate the element 180 deg.
Select the left (or right) point to obtain the horizontal

reflection.
Select the left or right point to modify the length of the

apartment manifold.
117 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
Select this point to obtain the vertical mirror reflection
Select the left or right point to modify the length of the

pipe manifold.
Select the points to modify the size of the element.
Select the square points to move the knot points.

Circular points will enable modification of the curves.
Select this point to rotate the text.
Select the circular points to rotate the element smoothly.
This graphic element can be moved, but its dimensions

are not modifiable, it is not rotatable or will not be
mirrored.
The specific example of the graphic element is the system component label 452 or text label 454 .
Moving w hole Te xt rotating

label
ABC
Moving the labe l's Te xt m oving

link ing position
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 118

Audytor H2O 1.5
Select the top point to rotate the label's text.
Select the bottom point to move the label's linking

position.
Move the line under the label's text to modify this text
position without changing the linking point.
Move the line connecting the label's linking point with the
label text underline to relocate the entire label.
WARNING!!!
When drawing or moving, the element or its point will relocate with the specific mouse
snap precision (it is 5 cm in the actual scale 1:1 as a default). This should facilitate
detailed linking of the individual system components. Mouse snap precision
modification can be performed in menu View 206 or Pop-up menu 447 by selecting the
command Drawing properties 213 . You can switch off the mouse snap precision
temporarily by holding the button pressed.
4.10.5 Drawing properties

Drawing properties enable modification of the picture's appearance, element selection method,
undo history, system components linking aid and many other features concerning creating the
system picture. To establish the properties, use the dialogue Drawing properties 309 called from
menu View 206 with the command Drawing properties 213 .
119 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
Dialogue Drawing properties
Scale - text field
Text field for establishing the scale of the picture active view.
Current layer - pull-down list
Here you can establish which user layer 455 will become the current layer for the newly entered
lines, circles, rectangles, texts (graphic elements from the tab Graphics in the drawing
functions toolbar 434 ).
Current view drawing aid - group
This group enables establishing those program parameters which facilitate creation of the current
picture.
Show grid Selecting this option field will display the grid 439 facilitating coordinates
estimation of the picture elements. Enter the grid width in the text field.
Snap on If this field has been marked, elements drawing and moving will be performed
with the snap precision entered in the neighboring text field. This solution will
facilitate connecting individual elements. While holding the button pressed,
you can temporarily switch the snap precision off, even though the field Snap is
marked.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 120

Audytor H2O 1.5
Show horizontal ruler

Marking this field will display the horizontal ruler with the scale in the active part
of the picture.
Show vertical ruler

Marking this field will display the vertical ruler with the scale in the active part of
the picture.
Marking this field will display the previous picture, as if the pictures were made
on the tracing paper. The previous picture will be displayed in grey, the color
level can be established in the field Previous picture grey level which you will
find described in the following part of this text.
Apply to all views

Marking this field will apply the parameters established above to all the views in
the active window with the pictures.
Drawing aid - group
This group enables estimation of the program's parameters for drawing's aid.
Drawing in ORTHO mode

Marking this field will enforce drawing only horizontal and vertical pipes and
segments.
Linking aid
Marking this field will make the program automatically connect close system
components while drawing, which will facilitate connecting pipes, receivers 449 ,
equipment 435 , accessories 428 , etc.
Draw the inserted element

Marking this field will make the components visible while being entered.
Mouse-scroll the picture

Marking this field will mouse-scroll the picture. When this option is off, mouse
scroll enables dynamic calibration of the picture.

Marking this field will enter the drawing pipes as broken lines mode.
Components selection - group
This group will establish selecting parameters for the graphic elements in the picture.
Selected component color

This list will select the color for the elements in the picture.
Focused component color

This list will select the color for the elements identified in the picture due to
approaching the mouse cursor.
Selected focused component color

This list will select the color for the elements first selected, then identified in the
picture due to approaching the mouse cursor.
121 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
Select components in the window

Marking this option field will have the following results: when highlighting the
elements by pointing the area, only these elements will be selected which are
entirely positioned within this area.
Select the crossed components

entirely positioned within this area, and the components crossed by the area's
borders.
Global drawing properties - group
Properties established in this group will apply to all views of data pictures and calculations results.
Components being moved: line style

From the pull-down list, choose the line style for displaying the components
while being moved.
Components being moved: color

From the pull-down list, choose the color for displaying the components while
being moved.
Previous picture grey level

In this edition field, establish the level of the grey color for displaying the
previous picture. The effect can be traced in the neighboring view. This field
accompanies the field Paint previous picture.
Paint when of the same type

Marking this field will display the previous picture only if it is of the same type as
the current picture (installation diagram, plan view, picture). This field
Simplified text height

This field will establish the height of the text on the screen, under which it will
be simplified - ie. shown as a rectangular area.
Undo history
This field will establish the maximum undo steps to be traced backwards with
the command Undo 199 .
Grid points color

This field will establish the grid 439 points color. This field accompanies the field
Show grid.
Thread cursor
Marking this field will display the thread cursor 454 .
Thread cursor: color

This field will establish the color of the thread cursor. This field accompanies
the field Thread cursor.
Paint DXF, DWG, TIF, BMP pictures - group
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 122

Audytor H2O 1.5
This group will establish the way of creating DXF 435 , DWG 435 , TIF 454 and BMP 429 pictures.
Bitmaps painting
This field will establish the method of bitmaps painting 428 on the screen.
Color representation
This field will establish the method of the color representation 430 .
Monochromatic picture color

This field will establish the color used when drawing in the monochromatic
mode.
Picture synchronization - group
This group will establish the range of the synchronization of the pictures.
Synchronize installation diagrams

Marking this field will have the following results: when choosing the subsequent
installation diagrams tabs, the program will display the same fragment of these
pictures (the same scale and rulers range).
Synchronize plan views

plan views tabs, the program will display the same fragment of these pictures
(the same scale and rulers range).
Synchronize pictures
picture tabs, the program will display the same fragment of these pictures (the
same scale and rulers range).
Synchronize data and results

Marking this field will have the following results: when viewing the picture
fragment with the calculations data, the program will attempt to display the
same fragment of the picture in the calculations results window, and opposite -
in case of viewing the calculations results picture.
This button will retrieve the default values for the drawing properties.
This button will display the dialogue Picture layers 324 which will enable formatting individual picture
layers 444 .
123 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
4.11 Copying data and the picture horizontally

When drawing repeatable fragments of the installation diagram, use the copying functions for
horizontal copying (to the left- or right).
While creating data on the rooms being copied, the program will increase (when copying to the
right) or decrease (copying to the left) room numbers. For instance, if the rooms selected for
copying are number 10, 11, 12 then, as a result of copying to the right, rooms with numbers 13, 14,
15 will be created, and - when copying to the left - room numbers 9,8,7. Similarly, riser numbers
within pipe-run numbers are renumbered. Thus, these commands should be applied for copying
within one storey only, as in other cases the numbering obtained will not be correct. Still, when the
numbers for the pipes- and pipe-runs to be copied have not been entered, horizontal copying of
data onto several storeys is not limited.
Before copying operation is commenced, attempt to enter all repeatable data on the accessories,
receivers, equipment, rooms and pipes to be copied. This action should facilitate entering info on
these components.
It is also recommended that the components to be copied are positioned at least partially in the
room zones 450 .
To copy installation diagram fragment to the right- or left
1 In the drawing functions toolbar 434 select the button to enter the program in the point and
select 431 mode.
2. With the mouse cursor highlight components 112 to be copied horizontally. Remember to select
the elements within single storeys only, to avoid problems with numbering of rooms and pipe-
runs. Not all components in the storey need to be selected.
3. Select the command Copy left 205 or Copy right 205 from the Edit 198 menu. These commands
can also be called with the buttons Copy left and Copy right from the drawing
functions toolbar 434 in the tab Copying and blocks .
Drawing functions toolbar, tab Copying and blocks
While copying horizontally, the program will automatically lengthen the horizontal pipes, so that they
connect the nearby pipes.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 124

Audytor H2O 1.5
Highlighted storey's fragment ready to be copied to the right
Only those horizontal pipes are lengthened whose free end (with no connection) is positioned on
the edge or beyond the room zone 450 .
There is no limit for the number of components from the same storey that can be copied.
To facilitate entering data for a few repeatable systems, eg. apartments, draw the repeatable
apartment's fragment for one storey (ground-floor recommended), highlight data on the entire
apartment, and execute commands for copying left- or right. The necessary modifications can be
then entered.
See also: menu Edit 198
commands: Next storey 205 , Copying data and the picture onto the next storey 125
Installation diagram drawing and entering data on system components 32 - overview, Drawing
graphic elements: basics of creating and editing 110 - overview
4.12 Copying data onto next storeys

When drawing repeatable fragments of the installation diagram, use the copying functions for
copying the picture's fragments onto next storeys. As the copying functions not only multiply the
picture's graphic elements, but also move necessary data, when you number the rooms and pipe-
runs creatively, the drawing process for repeatable system fragments can be facilitated
significantly.
While creating data on the next storey rooms, the program will increase room numbers with 100 or
1000, depending on the numbering scheme established with the menu Parameters 247 (dialogue
Program parameters 346 tab Numbering). The same renumbering rules are valid for pipe-runs.
Before copying onto the next storey, draw the floor system 36 , and the program will adjust the
system components location to the height of individual storeys.
Also, attempt to enter all repeatable data on the accessories, receivers, equipment, rooms and
pipes to be copied. This action should facilitate entering info on these components.
To copy installation diagram's fragment onto the next storey
1 In the drawing functions toolbar 434 select the button to enter the program in the point and
select 431 mode.
2 With the mouse cursor, highlight components 112 to be copied onto the next storey.Remember
125 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
to select the elements within single storeys only, to avoid problems. Not all components in the
storey need to be selected.
3 Select the command Next storey 205 from the Edit 198 menu, or with the button Next storey
from the drawing functions toolbar 434 in the tab Copying and blocks .
Drawing functions toolbar, tab Copying and blocks
While copying onto the next storey, the program will automatically adjust the height of the room
zones to the storey's height, and lengthen the vertical pipes, so that they connect the pipes from
the storey below.
Only those vertical pipes are lengthened whose free end (with no connection) is positioned in- or
below the axis of the bottom floor, or with no floors, on- or below the bottom edge of the room zone
450 .
Highlighted storey's fragment ready to be copied onto the next storey
There is no limit for the number of components from the same storey can be copied vertically.
To facilitate entering data for a few repeatable systems, eg. apartments, draw their repeatable
fragments for one storey (ground-floor recommended) - here you can use horizontal copying 124
functions, highlight data on the entire apartment, and execute commands for copying to the next
storey. The necessary modifications can be then entered.
See also: menu Edit 198
commands: Next storey 205 , Copying data horizontally 125
Installation diagram drawing and entering data on system components 32 - overview, Drawing
graphic elements: basics of creating and editing 110 - overview
4.13 Drawing functions toolbar

The drawing functions toolbar contains buttons for installation diagram drawing and entering data
on system components 32 commands.
Drawing functions toolbar
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 126

Audytor H2O 1.5
As a default, this bar is displayed at the top of the main program window. It contains several regular
and pull-down buttons 448 enabling fast access to the components being drawn in the installation
diagram, as well as the drawing functions. The tabs below the buttons enable the choice of
categories for the components being drawn.
To execute commands for the selected button, click this button with the left mouse key.
Decision about displaying the toolbar and its location is made with the command Toolbars 212 from
menu View 206 .
On the toolbar's left hand-side there are buttons for picture edition which perform the following
functions:
Entering the program into the installation diagram drawing mode. Here you can draw, move
and delete graphic elements in the picture, as well as edit their data in the table part of the
installation diagram 105 .
Entering the program into the mode for editing data on individual diagram elements. Here
the drawing functions are not accessible, but in the table part of the installation diagram you
can still edit data on the elements selected in the picture. While editing the the picture
components, this protects them from the accidental moving.
Entering the program into the mode for pointing and selecting picture elements 431 .
Repainting the picture. The necessity to repaint the picture occurs when it has been
graphically disturbed with the leftovers of the moved or deleted graphic elements.
The button for moving the picture active view 442 .
The button for highlighting the picture part to remain visible. After pressing the button, point
the desired picture fragment with the mouse cursor.
The button for preview scale selection, so as to fit the window.
The button for smooth scale calibration of the picture active window.
The button for restoring the previous scale of the picture active window.
The button for zooming in (enhancing) the picture active window.
The button for zooming out (reducing) the picture active window.
The remaining toolbar part contains buttons for drawing individual installation diagram elements.
These buttons have been grouped in a few tabs according to their function.
Below, the individual tabs have been described.

See also: Drawing graphic elements: basics of creating and editing 110 - overview, Drawing functions
toolbar 434
tabs: Water sources 128 , Heat sources 128 , Pipes 129 , Draw-off equipment and accessories 130 ,
Accessories 131 , Appliances 131 , Construction 132 , Graphics 133 , Copying and blocks 134 , Plan
views 134
127 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
4.13.1 Water sources

This tab contains buttons for drawing different variants of water sources.
Tab Water sources
Ascribed to the following buttons are the functions listed below:
Cold water source drawing.

Hot water source drawing.
Cold- and hot water source drawing.
Hot water source drawing and circulation.
Cold- and hot water source drawing and circulation.
toolbar 434
views 134
4.13.2 Heat sources

This tab contains buttons for drawing heat sources.
Tab Heat sources
The pull-down button 448 enabling choosing and drawing the double function boiler.
The pull-down button enabling choosing and drawing the suspended double function boiler.
The pull-down button enabling choosing and drawing the solid fuel hot water heater.
The pull-down button enabling choosing and drawing the liquid fuel hot water heater.
The pull-down button enabling choosing and drawing the gas fuel hot water heater.
The pull-down button enabling choosing and drawing the electric hot water heater.
The pull-down button enabling choosing and drawing the vertical volume heat exchanger.
The pull-down button enabling choosing and drawing the horizontal volume heat exchanger.
The pull-down button enabling choosing and drawing the vertical flow heat exchanger.
The pull-down button enabling choosing and drawing the horizontal flow heat exchanger.
The pull-down button enabling choosing and drawing the plate heat exchanger.
The pull-down button enabling choosing and drawing the hot water accumulator.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 128

Audytor H2O 1.5
The pull-down button enabling choosing and drawing the different heat source.
toolbar 434
views 134
4.13.3 Pipes
This tab contains buttons for drawing pipes and pipe fittings.
Tab Pipes
The pull-down button 448 enabling choosing pipe types and drawing cold water pipes.
The pull-down button enabling choosing pipe types and drawing hot water pipes.
The pull-down button enabling choosing pipe types and drawing circulation pipes.
Drawing the copper pipe approach (T-joint or elbow) for the cold water receiver.
Drawing the copper pipe approach (T-joint or elbow) for the hot water receiver.
The pull-down button enabling drawing drainage pipes.
Remote pipes links drawing eg. in the manifold system.
Remote pipes links drawing within one picture or between two pictures.
Inserting 90 deg. elbows.
Inserting 90 deg. bends.
Inserting 45 deg. elbows.
Inserting 45 deg. bends.
Inserting bypasses.
Inserting S-bends.
Inserting U-shaped compensators.
Bellow or choke compensators.
Inserting reductions.
Inserting expanders.
The pipes from this tab are always inserted onto the relevant default layer 433 (Cold water pipes,
Hot water pipes, Circulation pipes or Drainage Pipes). Remote pipes links are inserted onto
the layer Remote pipes linking, and the fittings (elbows, bends, etc.) onto the layer Fittings.
toolbar 434
129 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
views 134
4.13.4 Receivers and equipment

This tab contains buttons for drawing receivers 449 and equipment 435 .
Tab Equipment and draw-off accessories
The pull-down button 448 enabling choosing and drawing washbasins.

The pull-down button enabling choosing and drawing bath-tubes.
The pull-down button enabling choosing and drawing swimming pools.
The pull-down button enabling choosing and drawing washing machines.
The pull-down button enabling choosing and drawing toilets.
The pull-down button enabling choosing and drawing urinals.
The pull-down button enabling choosing and drawing bidets.
The pull-down button enabling choosing and drawing flushing reservoirs.
The pull-down button enabling choosing and drawing drinking fountains.
The pull-down button enabling choosing and drawing sinks.
The pull-down button enabling choosing and drawing dishwashers.
The pull-down button enabling choosing and drawing dirty linen rooms.
The pull-down button enabling choosing and drawing spittoons.
The pull-down button enabling choosing and drawing draw-off valves.
The pull-down button enabling choosing and drawing mixers.
The pull-down button enabling choosing and drawing flushing valves.
The pull-down button enabling choosing and drawing hydrants.
The pull-down button enabling choosing and drawing other receivers.
The equipment is always inserted onto the default layer 433 Equipment, and the draw-off
accessories - onto the layer Draw-off accessories.
toolbar 434
views 134
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 130

Audytor H2O 1.5
4.13.5 Accessories
This tab contains buttons for drawing pipe accessories 428 .
Tab Accessories
The pull-down button 448 enabling choosing and drawing domestic hot water circulation
thermostatic valves.
The pull-down button enabling choosing the type and drawing cut-off valves.
The pull-down button enabling choosing the type and drawing gate valves.
The pull-down button enabling choosing the type and drawing flowmeters 437 .
The pull-down button enabling choosing the type and drawing reverse valves.
The pull-down button enabling choosing the type and drawing reverse plates.
The pull-down button enabling choosing the type and drawing anti-contamination valves.
The pull-down button enabling choosing the type and drawing pipe manifolds.
The pull-down button enabling choosing the type and drawing manifolds.
The pull-down button enabling choosing the type and drawing filters.
The pull-down button enabling choosing the type and drawing orifices.
The pull-down button enabling choosing the type and drawing elements of the known Kv 437 ,
dP or zeta 440 .
Graphic elements from this tab are always inserted onto the default layer 433 Accessories.
toolbar 434
views 134
4.13.6 Appliances
This tab contains buttons for drawing other appliances in the installation diagram drawing.
Tab Appliances
Pump drawing.
De-airing and air valve drawing.
131 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
Thermometer drawing.
Manometer drawing.
Safety valve drawing.
Pressure tank drawing.
Non-pressure tank drawing
Basket strainer drawing.
Inspection opening drawing.
Drain trap drawing.
Flushing funnel drawing.
Inlet drawing.
Cleanout drawing.
Storm gate drawing.
Vent drawing.
Settling tank drawing.
Separator drawing.
Graphic elements from this tab are always inserted onto the default layer 433 Appliances and
accessories.
WARNING !!!
Currently, no appliances will be selected from this tab, they are only graphic
representations.
toolbar 434
views 134
4.13.7 Construction
This tab contains buttons for drawing installation diagram construction elements and system
appliance labels 452 .
Tab Construction
Room zone 450 drawing.

Floor system creation 36 .
Individual floor drawing.
Reference ordinate 449 drawing.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 132

Audytor H2O 1.5
Ordinate 441 drawing.

Horizontal dimension line drawing.
Vertical dimension line drawing.
System component 452 drawing.
Room zones are always inserted onto the default layer 433 Rooms, floor systems and individual
floors - onto the layer Floors, and ordinates - onto the Ordinates layer. Component labels,
depending to which type of component they have been ascribed, are inserted onto one of the
following layers: Room labels, Water source labels, Heat source labels, Pipe labels,
Receivers and equipment labels, Accessories labels or Appliances and accessories labels.
Dimension lines are inserted onto the picture's current layer 432 .
toolbar 434
views 134
4.13.8 Graphics
This tab contains buttons for drawing typical graphic elements.
Tab Graphics
Drawing points.
Drawing lines.
Drawing triangles.
Drawing rectangles.
Drawing curves.
Drawing broken lines (ie. polylines).
Drawing bends.
Drawing symmetrical bends (semi circles or ellipses).
Drawing circles or ellipses.
Entering text.
Drawing text labels 454 .
Inserting pictures from a file 90 , by scanning 90 , or from the clipboard 93 .
Moving the elements highlighted in the picture onto another layer 444 .
Picture layers edition 324 .
Graphic elements from this tab are always inserted onto the layer 444 currently selected from the
pull-down list on the right hand-side of the buttons. They will not be inserted onto the drawing
133 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
default layers 433 except from the 0 (zero) symbol layer.
The user can define practically unlimited number of own layers 455 , where every element from the
Graphics tab can be inserted.
Also, earlier inserted picture elements can be moved onto another layer with the button Move onto
another layer .
toolbar 434
views 134
4.13.9 Copying and blocks

This tab contains buttons for fast copying of the picture fragments and inserting ready blocks 437 .
Tab Copying and blocks
Selected picture fragment copying to the left 205 .

Selected picture fragment copying onto next storey 205 .
Selected picture fragment copying to the right 205 .
Buttons enabling access to the blocks created by the user 68 .
New block creating 68 from the elements highlighted in the picture.
toolbar 434
views 134
4.13.10 Plan views

This tab contains buttons for drawing system components in plan views and connecting the views
with the installation diagram.
Tab Plan views
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 134

Audytor H2O 1.5
Hot water pipes drawing.

Cold water pipes drawing.
Circulation pipes drawing.
Drainage pipes drawing.
Pull-down buttons for selecting the type and drawing heat sources.
Pull-down buttons for selecting the type and drawing receivers and equipment.
Pull-down buttons for selecting the type and drawing accessories.
Pull-down buttons for selecting the type and drawing appliances.
Entering description for any system component.
Drawing the label for any system component.
Switching on the mode for connecting installation diagram elements with the ones in the
storey plan views.
Pull-down buttons 448 enable the choice of the specific appliance type to be drawn in the plan view.
toolbar 434
views 134
4.14 How to number system components

The program does not require the user to number individual system components (rooms are the
exception). Still, this action would facilitate entering data and analyzing results, so it is
recommended to number water sources 455 , heat sources 439 , distributing pipes 434 , receivers 449 ,
equipment 435 , and rooms where system pipes are positioned.
Identifiers of system components do not consist only of numbers but also of letters, therefore
sometimes they are referred to as symbols.
General requirements toward numbering
1 Each distributing pipes 434 system pipe-run 446 should have the original number (symbol) 446 ,
and the cold-, hot water and circulation pipes are considered separately, which means that
those can have the same numbers (symbols). The program does not require the user to
number pipe-runs, as the information about possible pipe- and other element connections are
found from the picture, still numbering pipe-runs will clarify the calculations results in the table
form.
2 Each water source should have its own unique number (symbol) 450 .
3 Each heat source should have its own unique number (symbol) 450 .
4 Each receiver or equipment piece should have their own unique number (symbol) 450 .
6 Each room should have its own unique number (symbol) 450 . In the installation diagram, the
same room - as the element of the picture - can occur in more than one place, still it always
refers to the same data set.
135 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4 Entering data
Number the system components reasonably, so as to effectively apply the tools facilitating entering
data, available in menu Edit 198 .
Recommended numbering scheme has been described below.
4.14.1 Rooms numbering

A room number (symbol) can consist of any eight characters (letters and figures).
It is recommended to increase the numbers with 100 or 1000 (if the amount of rooms on one storey
exceeds 100) for the subsequent storeys. So, the ground floor rooms will have the numbers 1, 2, 3,
etc., the first floor rooms - 101, 102, 103, etc., the second floor rooms - 201, 202, 203, etc.
If the room scheme for the subsequent storeys is the same, use this information when numbering.
For instance, if there are the same or similar rooms on the following storeys, number them as 101 -
ground floor, 101 - first floor, 201 - second floor, etc.
This method of room numbering will facilitate creation data for next storeys with command Next
storey 205 .
See also: Drawing graphic elements: basics of creating and editing 110 - overview, How to number
system components 135 - overview
Rooms numbering 136 , Pipe systems numbering 136 , Water- and heat sources, Draw-off points-
and equipment numbering 136
4.14.2 Pipe systems numbering

A number (symbol) of the pipe-run 446 consists of two parts. The first is the three-character (letters
and figures) number (symbol) of the pipe-run riser. The second is the five-character (letters and
figures) number (symbol) of the pipe-run within the riser.
As with rooms, it is recommended to increase the pipe-runs numbers (symbols) with 100 or 1000
for the subsequent storeys.
When numbering horizontal pipe systems supplying water to risers, you may assume the S
(supply) letter as the riser symbol.
4.14.3 Water- and heat sources, draw-off points and equipment numbering
If it is required to number water sources 455 , heat sources 439 , receivers 449 or equipment 435 , they
should follow the rules for the pipe system 136 .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 136

Chapter
5
Calculations
5 Calculations
5 Calculations
The program performs full hydraulic- and heat calculations for systems.
The calculation process consists of several stages, after which the program repeats check of
errors that would make further calculations impossible. If this situation occurs, the process is
stopped. Info on errors 429 will be stored in detected errors file 429 .
If errors are detected, after completing the calculations, the program will display the relevant info
message and show the window with the detected errors list 373 (see Detecting and removing errors
139 ).
To perform calculations basing on the current data 432 , select the command Calculations 234 . While
calculating, the program considers calculation parameters 429 established in the project general
data 22 (menu Data 225 command General 226 ).
The subsequent calculations stages have been described below:
Saving calculations data

To start with, the program displays the dialogue Calculations 290 with info on the current
calculations stage, and saves the relevant file on the disc.
The button in this dialogue enables stopping the calculations after each
stage has been completed.
Dialogue Calculations
General data and variables check

Detecting errors at this stage will stop the calculations.
Picture correctness check

Pipe-runs, receivers, heat- and water sources connections check

Correctness check for the connections of pipe-runs 446 within the distributing pipes 434 system.
Correctness check for the connections of receivers 449 and equipment 435 to the distributing pipes
system. Correctness check for the accessories 428 .
Data correctness check

At this stage, the program will detect empty table cells, incorrectly entered catalogue symbols and
markings, and checks the accessories 428 positioning correctness.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 138

Audytor H2O 1.5
Cold- and hot water pipe diameters selection

Cold- and hot water pipe diameters selection according to criteria established in general data 22 .
Hot water pipes insulation selection
Cold- and hot water pipes hydraulic resistance calculations
Circulation system water flux calculations
Circulation system pipe diameters selection
Circulation system pipes insulation selection
Valves and initial preset selection
Establishing hydraulic resistance in individual system circuits and preset selection for governing
accessories 437 .
Calculations results check

At this stage, the program will conduct the final check of the obtained calculations results.
Saving calculations results

If no critical errors have been detected while conducting calculations, the calculations results file
will be saved on the disc. However, if due to detected critical errors the program will not be able to
perform the complete calculations successfully, the relevant error message will be displayed.
To view the calculations results and the detected errors list 373 use the commands from menu
Results 234 .
See also: menu Calculations 234 , menu Data 225 , menu Results 234
5.1 Detecting and removing errors

While performing calculations 138 , the program will store error warning messages and info on
detected errors 429 in the error file 429 .
Display the error list 373 window with the command error list 239 called from menu Results 234 .
Error list with distinguished messages on more serious errors
139 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

5 Calculations
There you will find the complete info messages set, starting from the incomplete data message or
wrong data structure message, to finish with messages of any case when the complete system
design is not possible.
Treat the error list as the diagnostics tool to estimate the project quality. Often it is even not
possible to design the system without any error messages, still it is recommended to minimize the
number of serious errors, and assess their influence on the system functioning. It is the designer
who takes the full responsibility for the error messages evaluation and interpretation.
To facilitate interpretation, with the message numbers you will find small colored squares informing
of the error importance. The color code has the following meaning:
White is not an error, but a hint for the designer.
Yellow signifies warnings.
Pink means semi-serious errors.
Red indicated critical errors.
Error list 373 window has been equipped with the function of positioning errors. When this function
has been executed, the program will highlight the relevant fragment of the picture and display the
data table, marking the cell referring to the error that has been found. You can execute this function
either by mouse-selecting and left mouse key double-clicking the error message, or by keyboard
selection of this message in the error list window.
Searching the causes for errors, remember that the program will not locate them precisely in every
case. In some more complicated situations, treat the function described above only as the rough
error indicator.
See also: commands: Calculations 234 , Error list 239
Entering data 21 - overview
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 140

Chapter
6
Calculations results
6 Calculations results
If no critical errors have been detected while conducting calculations, the program will complete
them and save the calculations results file 429 on the disc.
The program will open this file, and in case it is not to be found, it will display the relevant warning
message.
Calculations results can be viewed both in the table- and in the graphic format, as the installation
diagram and plan views of storeys, by choosing relevant commands from menu Results 234 .
Table results can be printed with the Print 191 command. To plot the results as the diagram, use the
command Plot 196 from menu File 178 .
Calculations results will be displayed in the graphic form in the window Results - Pictures 378 , and
in the table form in the following tables:
Results - General 415 ,
Results - Water sources 426 ,
Results - Heat sources 417 ,
Results - Pipes 419 ,
Results - Receivers and equipment 422 ,
Results - Accessories 409 ,
Results - Rooms 425 ,
Results - Branches 411 ,
Results - Circulation circuits 413 ,
Results - Presets 421 ,
Materials list 163 .
You will find the detailed information on the diagram and tables in the next subchapters.
Table contents can be sorted according to the selected filter 452 and formatted, with the commands
Sort table 224 and Format table 224 called from menu View 206 , or the pop-up menu 447 .
While calculations are being performed, the error list file 429 is also being created. Selecting the
command Error list 239 from menu Results 234 will display the window with the error list 373 detected
while calculating.
The program will also create the materials list 163 for the system.
See also: commands: Calculations 234
menu View 206 , commands: Sort table 224 , Format table 224
menu Results 234 , commands: Error list 239 , Materials list 239
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 142

Audytor H2O 1.5
6.1 General calculations results

General calculations results contain basic info on the entire system under design. To overview
them, use the table Results – General 415 called from menu Results 234 with the command General
235 .
Table Results - General
In individual table columns you will find the following information:
Project name Project name.
Project location Project location.
Designer Info on designer.
Calculations date Date and time of the calculations.
Data file Name of file with calculations data.
Info on pipe types Catalogue symbols 430 ascribed to pipe surrogate symbols 446 .
Water sources info
Source symbol Water source symbol.
Source type Water source type.
143 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

Building type Building type supplied from the water source.
Remarks Remarks on the the water source.
Water temperatures, [°C]

Cold (hot) water temperatures on leaving the water source, or circulation
water temperature returning to the water source, [°C].
Disposable pressure, [m]

Required minimum cold (hot) water disposable pressure, or the required
minimum disposable pressure for the hot water circulation pump, [m].
Hydrostatic pressure, [m]

Cold (hot) water hydrostatic pressure, [m].
Standard outflows sum, [l/s]

Standard sum of water outflows from the appliances connected to the
cold (hot) water branches supplied from the water source, [l/s].
Calculation flow, [l/s]

Calculation water flux entering the cold (hot) water branch supplied from
the water source, or the calculation circulation water flux returning to the
water source, [l/s].
Circulation exchanges, [1/h]

Number of water exchanges in the hot- and circulation water pipes within
the circulation zone, [1/h].
Critical receiver Number of the critical receiver 432 supplied from the cold (hot) water
branch connected to the water source, or number of the first circulation
pipe-run of the critical system circuit.
WARNING!!!
The critical receiver for the cold water branch can be the cold- or hot water receiver,
or the heat source.
Pressure before critical receiver, [m]

Water pressure before the critical receiver connected to the cold (hot)
water branch supplied from the water source, [m].
Critical branch length, [m]

The total of pipe lengths counted from the water source to the critical
receiver supplied from the cold (hot) water branch, or the total length of
the pipe-runs in the critical circulation circuit, [m].
Branch resistance up to critical receiver, [m]

Cold (hot) water flow resistance from the water source up to the critical
receiver in the cold (hot) water branch supplied from the water source, or
the hydraulic resistance of the critical circulation circuit, [m].
See also: Calculations results 142 - overview
General calculations results 143 , Results as graphic installation diagram and plan views 145 ,
Calculations results: Water sources 147 , Calculations results: Heat sources 149 , Calculations
results: Pipes 151 , Calculations results: Receivers and equipment 153 , Calculations results:
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 144

Audytor H2O 1.5
Accessories 155 , Calculations results: Rooms 156 , Calculations results: Branches 157 ,
Calculations results: Circulation circuits 158 , Calculations results: Presets 160 , Calculations
results: Error list 162 , Calculations results: Materials list 163
menu Results 234
6.2 Results as the graphic installation diagram and plan views

The window Results - Pictures 378 called with the command Pictures 236 from menu Results 234 will
display graphically results of calculations.
As a default, the window consists of two parts:
The first is the drawing part 453 for the graphic presentation of results as installation diagram and
plan views of storeys. Two independently calibrated 445 picture views are to be found here.
The second is the table part 453 for the presentation of the calculations results in the table form.
Table- and graphic part are dynamically linked with each other. Selecting one graphic component
will automatically show the table on this element, and highlight the row containing the calculations
results for the selected component. At the same time, the component currently being viewed in the
table is automatically displayed and highlighted in the picture active window 442 .
in the graphic form.
in the table form. The tables are dynamically
Window Results - Pictures for results presentation in the graphic- and table form
145 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

W the table part you will find tabs with the following tables:
Results - General 415 ,
together with the tab for the error list 373 detected while calculating.
Picture views properties such as: scale, displaying grid and rulers or parameters of highlighting the
components can be established with the command Drawing properties 213 called from menu View
206 , or the pop-up menu 447 .
In the right-bottom picture part's corner, there are buttons for frequently used functions establishing
layout drawing preferences.
Grid
Show w ater flow direction
Show pipe insulation

Show critical branches
and circuits
De taile d draw ing propertie s
Buttons for functions aiding overview of the pictures with the calculations results
WARNING!!!
While viewing results both in the table part, as well as in the graphic part, you will not be
able to modify them. To relocate individual picture components, modify the preferences
in the window Data - Pictures 371 , and then repeat calculations.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 146

Audytor H2O 1.5
menu Results 234
6.3 Water sources

Calculation results of water sources contain the calculated required work parameters of water
sources 455 . To view them, use the table Results – Water sources 426 called with the command
Results 234 Water sources 236 .
Table with water sources work parameters
Type Graphic info on the water source type.
Riser Riser number (symbol) 450 for the given water source.
Item no. Source number within the riser 446 .
Riser/Pipe-run Riser- and water source number within the riser.
Room Room symbol for the water source.
Building type Building type for the systems supplied from the water source.
Tcw Cold water temperature on leaving the source, [°C].
Qscw Total standard water outflow from the appliances connected to the cold water
branch supplied from the water source, [l/s].
Qcw Calculation water flux on leaving the cold water branch supplied from the
Pcw Required minimum cold water disposable pressure, [m].
Phcw Cold water hydrostatic pressure, [m].
CW cr. The number of the cold water critical receiver.
147 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

Pcw cr. Water pressure before the critical receiver connected to the cold water
branch supplied from the water source, [m].
Lcw cr. Total pipe length from the water source to the the critical receiver supplied
from the cold water branch, [m].
dPcw cr. Cold water flow resistance from the water source to the the critical receiver in
the cold water branch supplied from the water source, [m].
Thw Hot water temperature on leaving the source, [°C].
Qshw Total standard water outflow from the appliances connected to the hot water
Qhw Calculation water flux on leaving the hot water branch supplied from the water
source, [l/s].
Phw Required minimum hot water disposable pressure, [m].
Phhw Cold water hydrostatic pressure, [m].
HW cr. The number of the hot water critical receiver.
Phw cr. Water pressure before the critical receiver connected to the hot water branch
supplied from the water source, [m].
Lhw cr. Total pipe length from the water source to the the critical receiver supplied
from the hot water branch, [m].
dPhw cr. Hot water flow resistance from the water source to the the critical receiver in
the hot water branch supplied from the water source, [m].
qcir Calculation circulation water flux on entering the water source, [l/s].
Pcir Minimum required disposable pressure for the hot water circulation pump,
[m].
Ne cir. Number of water exchanges in the circulation circuits connected to the

source, [1/h]. When establishing the number of exchanges, the program will
consider hot water pipes capacity for the pipes positioned in the circulation
zone, and the circulation pipes capacity.
Cir cr. Number of the first circulation pipe-run in the critical circulation circuit.
Lcir cr. Total pipe-runs length in the critical circulation circuit, [m].
Status Info on whether the water source already exists (black color)or is newly
Remarks Remarks on the water source.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 148

Audytor H2O 1.5
Or cir Circulation pipe connection point ordinate, [m].
menu Results 234
6.4 Heat sources

Calculation results of heat sources contain the calculated required work parameters of heat
sources 439 . To view them, use the table Results – Heat sources 417 called with the command
Results 234 Heat sources 236 .
Table with heat sources work parameters
Source symbol
Water source 455 symbol supplying the system branch with the heat source.
Type Graphic info on the heat source type.
Riser Riser number (symbol) 450 for the given pipe-run.
Pipe-run Pipe-run number (symbol) within the riser 446 .
Riser/Pipe-run
Riser- and heat source number (symbol) within the riser.
Room Room symbol for the heat source.
Symbol Heat source symbol
Cat. no. Heat source catalogue number.
dPw Flow resistance from the water source to the heat source, [m].
Pw Water pressure before the heat source, [m].
149 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

Pmax Maximum allowed water pressure before the heat source, [m].
Thw Hot water temperature on leaving the heat source, [°C]
Qs Total standard water outflow from the appliances connected to the hot water
branch supplied from the heat source, [l/s].
Qsmin Minimum total standard hot water outflow from the receivers supplied from the heat
source, [l/s].
Qsmax Maximum total standard hot water outflow from the receivers supplied from the
heat source, [l/s].
Kv hw Kv coefficient 437 for the hot water flow through the heat source, [m 3/h].
dP hw Hot water flow hydraulic resistance through the heat source, [m].
qcir Calculation circulation water flux on entering the heat source, [l/s].
Ne cir Number of water exchanges in the circulation circuits connected to the source, [1/
h]. When establishing the number of exchanges, the program will consider hot
water pipes capacity for the pipes positioned in the circulation zone, and the
circulation pipes capacity.
Kv cir Kv coefficient, for the given circulation water flow through the heat source, [m 3/h].
dP cir. Hydraulic resistance, for the given circulation water flow through the heat source,
[m].
Pcir Minimum required disposable pressure for the hot water circulation pump, [m].
Cir cr. First circulation pipe-run of the critical circulation circuit.
Status Info on whether the heat source already exists (black color) or is newly designed
(green color).
Remarks Remarks on the heat source.
menu Results 234
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 150

Audytor H2O 1.5
6.5 Pipes
Calculation results for pipes contain information on selected pipes and heat insulation. To view
them, use the table Results – Pipes 419 called with the command Results 234 Pipes 236 .
When entering data, the pipe system has been divided into pipe-runs 446 . Each row contains info on
one pipe-run.
Results table with calculations results for pipes
Source symbol
Water source 455 symbol supplying the system branch with the pipe-run.
Type Info on the pipe type: CW - cold water, HW - hot water, CIR - circulation.
Riser/Pipe-run
Two-part pipe-run number (symbol).
Riser Riser number (symbol) 450 for the pipe-run.

Pipe-run Pipe-run number (symbol) 446 within the riser.
Pipes Surrogate pipes type symbol 446 (A, B, C, D, etc.) for the pipe-run. Pipe catalogue
symbols 430 corresponding to surrogate symbols are given in the general
calculations results 415 table.
Pipes symbol
Pipes catalogue symbol for the pipe-run.
Room Room symbol 450 for the pipe-run.
L Pipe-run's length, [m].
dnom Pipe-run's nominal diameter, [mm].
Catalogue number
Pipes catalogue number for the pipe-run.
Insulation Pipe-run insulation material symbol.
151 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

Diins Internal insulation diameter, [mm].
Thins Insulation thickness, [mm].
Ins. Di x Th Insulation internal diameter and thickness, [mm].
Insulation cat. no.

Insulation catalogue number.
Insulation efficiency
Insulation efficiency 445 for the pipe-run.
N Number of receivers supplied from the pipe-run, considered in calculations.

Results in this column are only shown when in General data 22 calculation method
according to SNIP 2.04.01-85 standard has been selected.
NP NP coefficient. Results in this column are only shown when in General data 22
calculation method according to SNIP 2.04.01-85 standard has been selected.
Alpha Alpha coefficient. Results in this column are only shown when in General data 22
Q Calculation water flow in the pipe-run, [l/s].
v Water velocity in the pipe-run, for the given calculation flow, [m/s].
R Unitary linear pressure losses 455 , for the given calculation flow, [Pa/m].
dP Total pressure drop (including linear- and local resistance) in the pipe-run, for the
given calculation flow, [Pa].
Ts Pipe-run supply water temperature, established for the given hot water calculation
flow, [deg. C].
dT Pipe-run water cooling, established for the given hot water calculation flow, [K].
Qcir Circulation water flux through the pipe-run, [l/s].
Vcir Pipe-run water velocity, for the given circulation water flow, [m/s].
Rcir Unitary linear pressure losses, for the given circulation water flow, [Pa/m].
dPcir Total pressure drop (including linear- and local resistance) in the pipe-run, for the
given circulation water flow.
(green color).
Remarks Remarks on the pipe-run.
Or start Ordinate for the beginning of the pipe-run, [m].
Or end Ordinate for the end of the pipe-run, [m].
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 152

Audytor H2O 1.5
menu Results 234
6.6 Receivers and equipment

Calculation results for receivers and equipment contain information on their work parameters. To
view them, use the table Results – Receivers and equipment 422 , called with the command Results
234 Receivers and equipment 237 .
Calculations results table for receivers and equipment
Each table cell refers to one receiver or piece of equipment.
Source symbol
Water source symbol supplying the system branch with the receiver or equipment.
Zone Building zone symbol with the receiver or equipment.
Type Graphic info on the type of receiver or equipment.
Riser Riser number (symbol) 450 for the entered appliance (receiver or equipment).
Item no. Number (symbol) of the appliance (receiver or equipment) within the riser.
Riser/Pipe-run
Riser number (symbol) 450 and the number of the receiver or equipment within the
riser.
153 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

Room Room number (symbol) 450 with the receiver or equipment.
Symbol Catalogue symbol 430 of the receiver or equipment.
Cat. no. Catalogue number of the receiver or equipment.
Qscw Standard cold water flux on entering the receiver, [l/s].
Pcw Cold water pressure before the receiver, [m].
Pmincw Minimum allowed cold water pressure before the receiver, [m].
Pocw Maximum cold water pressure before the receiver, [m]. The pressure is assessed
for no water flow in pipes.
Pmaxcw Maximum allowed cold water pressure before the receiver, [m].
dPcw Cold water flow resistance from the water source to the receiver, [m].
dHcw Height difference between the cold water connection point to the receiver and the
water source outflow point, [m].
Lcw Branch length supplying cold water from the water source to the receiver, [m].
Qshw Standard hot water flux on entering the receiver, [l/s].
Phw Hot water pressure before the receiver, [m].
Pminhw Minimum allowed hot water pressure before the receiver, [m].
Pohw Maximum hot water pressure before the receiver, [m]. The pressure is assessed
Pmaxhw Maximum allowed hot water pressure before the receiver, [m].
dPhw Hot water flow resistance from the water source to the receiver, [m].
dHhw Height difference between the hot water connection point to the receiver and the
Lhw Branch length supplying hot water from the water source to the receiver, [m].
WARNING!!!
In case when hot water is suppled from the cold water source and it is
heated on its way in the heat source, the cold water pipes length from the
water source to the heat source will also be taken into consideration.
Cal.Qs Info on whether the standard outflow Qs from the receiver has been taken into
account when assessing the total standard outflows.
Status Info on whether the receiver or equipment already exists (black color) or is newly
Remarks Remarks on the receiver or equipment.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 154

Audytor H2O 1.5
menu Results 234
6.7 Accessories
Calculation results for accessories contain full list of the accessories 428 in the system. To view it,
use the table Results - Accessories 409 , called with the command Results 234 Accessories 237 .
SEach table cell refers to one piece of accessories.
Source symbol
Water source 455 symbol supplying the system branch with the given accessories.
Riser Riser number (symbol) 450 for the pipe-run with the accessories.
Pipe-run Pipe-run number (symbol) 446 within the riser with the accessories.
Riser/Pipe-run
Two-part pipe-run number (symbol) with the given accessories.
Riser Riser number (symbol) for the pipe-run.

Pipe-run Pipe-run number (symbol) within the riser.
Room Room number (symbol) 450 with the accessories.
Type Graphic info on the type of the accessories.
Symbol Catalogue symbol 430 of the accessories.
Cat. no. Catalogue number of the accessories.
Dnom Nominal diameter of the accessories, [mm].
Preset Selected initial preset for the governing accessories.
Q Calculation cold- or hot water flux through the accessories, [l/s].
Kv Kv flow coefficient 437 , for the given calculation cold- or hot water flux, [m 3/h].
dP Pressure drop on the accessories, for the given calculation cold- or hot water flux,
[m].
155 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

Qcir Circulation water flux through the accessories, [l/s].
Kvcir Kv coefficient, for the given circulation water flux, [m 3/h].
dPcir Pressure drop on the accessories, for the given circulation water flux, [m].
Status Info on whether the accessories already exists (black color) or is newly designed
(green color).
Remarks Remarks on the accessories.
menu Results 234
6.8 Rooms
Calculation results for rooms contain info on all rooms in the system under design. To view them,
use the table Results – Rooms 425 called with the command Results 234 Rooms 237 .
Rooms parameters table
Symbol Room symbol 450 .
ti Calculation room air internal temperature, [°C].
Zone Building zone 429 symbol with the room.
Remarks Remarks on the room.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 156

Audytor H2O 1.5
menu Results 234
6.9 Branches
Calculation results for pipes and accessories are displayed as branches supplying cold- and hot
water from water sources 455 to receivers 449 . To view them, use the table Results - Branches 411
called with the command Results 234 Branches 238 .
Info on the branch is displayed in the following way:
In the first row you will find the riser number and info on the receiver supplied from the given
branch.
The second row contains the following data:
P Water pressure before the receiver, for the given calculation water flux in the
system, [m].
dP Total pressure drop (including linear- and local resistance) in the branch, for the
given calculation water flux, [m].
dH Height difference between the water connection point to the receiver and the water
source outflow point, [m].
Pover Overpressure exceeding the required minimum pressure before the receiver
(dPover = P - Pmin) in the branch, for the given calculation water flux, [m].
Lb The length of the distributing pipes 434 creating the branch, [m].
If the branch is not the first displayed in the table, and in the table format no option Show entire
branches has been marked, then in the next table row you will find total hydraulic resistance of the
common pipe-runs, meaning those belonging to the current branch, but already presented with the
previous branches.
The following rows contain information on individual branch elements, such as water sources, heat
sources, pipes, receivers, etc.
Calculations results table for branches
157 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

Type Graphic info on the type of element (water sources, heat sources, pipes, receivers,
etc.).
Riser/Pipe-run
Riser Riser number (symbol) 450 for the pipe-run

Pipes Surrogate pipes type symbol 446 (A, B, C, D, etc.) for the pipe-run.
Qs Total standard water outflows from the draw-off accessories, supplied from the
given pipe-run, [l/s].
R Unitary linear pressure losses, for the given calculation flow, [Pa/m].
given calculation flow, [m].
menu Results 234
6.10 Circulation circuits

Calculation results for circulation circuits contain info on individual circulation circuits 430 . To view
them, use the table Results – Circulation circuits 413 called from menu Results 234 with the
command Circulation circuits 238 .
Info on individual circuits is displayed in the following way:
In the first row you will find the riser number and info on the circulation pipe-run in the given circuit.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 158

Audytor H2O 1.5
dPact Active pressure 428 in the circuit, [Pa].
dPgr Gravitation pressure 438 considered in the circuit, [Pa].
dP Total pressure drop (including linear- and local resistance) in the circuit, for the
given circulation water flux, [m].
Pover Overpressure in the circuit, for the given circulation flux, [m].
Lc The length of the distributing pipes 434 creating the circuit, [m].
dT Pipe-run water cooling on the distance from the heat source to the circulation pipe
connection point to the hot water pipe, [K].
Calculations results table for circulation circuits
If the circuit is not the first displayed in the table, and in the table format no option Show entire
circuits has been marked, then in the next table row you will find total hydraulic resistance of the
common supplying pipe-runs, meaning those belonging to the current circuit, but already presented
with the previous circuits.
The following rows contain information on new pipe-runs in the circuit.
Type Graphic info on the type of the circuit element.
Riser/Pipe-run

Pipe-run Pipe-run number (symbol) within the riser
159 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

Insulation efficiency 445 for the pipe-run, [%]
flow, [°C].
circuits has been marked, then in the next table row you will find the total hydraulic resistance of
the common pipe-runs.
menu Results 234
6.11 Presets
Calculation results for presets contain info on governing accessories presets. To view them, use
the table Results – Presets 421 called from menu Results 234 with the command Presets 238 .
Each table cell refers to one governing element.
Source symbol
Water source symbol supplying the system branch with the given governing
element.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 160

Audytor H2O 1.5
Riser Riser number (symbol) 450 for the pipe-run with the governing element.
Item no. Pipe-run number (symbol) 446 within the riser with the governing element.
Riser/Pipe-run

Room Room number (symbol) 450 with the governing accessories .
Symbol Catalogue symbol 430 of the type of the accessories.
Preset Selected preset 439 of the governing accessories.
Q Calculation hot- or cold water flux through the accessories, [l/s].
[m].
Status Info on whether the the accessories already exists (black color) or is newly
menu Results 234
161 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

6.12 Error list

After performing calculations, the program will display error list window 373 .
Window Error list shows warning messages saved while calculating. View the list using the
keyboard or the mouse.
possible to design the system without any error messages. Still it is recommended to minimize the
number of serious errors, and assess their influence on the system functioning.
Thanks to the error location 435 tool, the error list window will facilitate error detection and
establishing the error cause 139 .
Error list can be opened with the command Error list 239 called from menu Results 234 , or located in
the table part 453 of the window Data - Pictures 371 .
Detailed description of the error list has been placed in the subchapter Detecting and removing
errors 139 .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 162

Audytor H2O 1.5
menu Results 234
6.13 Materials lists

Materials lists contain info on water sources 455 , heat sources 439 , pipes, accessories 428 , receivers
449 and equipment in 435 the system. This info is available, when calculations 138 have been
performed for the current data 432 .
Materials lists are displayed in the following tables:
Materials - Water sources table 409 ,
Materials - Water sources 408 ,
Materials - Heat sources table 399 ,
Materials - Heat sources 399 ,
Materials - Pipes table 403 ,
Materials - Pipes 402 ,
Materials - Insulation table 401 ,
Materials - Insulation 400 ,
Materials - Accessories table 397 ,
Materials - Accessories 397 ,
Materials - Receivers and equipment 407 ,
Materials - Receivers and equipment 406 ,
Materials - Producers table 405 ,
Materials - Producers 404 .
Detailed info on results' lists' tables have been given in the subsequent subchapters.
menu Results 234
163 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

6.13.1 Water sources overall table - materials

This list contains the overall table 441 with info on the type and number of water sources 455 in the
system. To view it, use the table Materials - Water sources table 409 called from menu Results 234
Materials lists 239 Water sources table - materials 240 .
Type Info on the type of the water source.
Symbol Symbol of the water source.
Cat. no. Catalogue number of the water source.
N project Number of water sources in the project, [items].
N existing Number of existing water sources, [items].
Cost Total cost.
Producer Symbol of the producer of the water source.
Description Description of the water source.
Remarks Place for remarks on the water source (after the table has been printed).
See also: Calculations results 142 - overview, Materials list 163 - overview
Water sources table - Materials 164 , Water sources - Materials 164 , Heat sources table -
Materials 165 , Heat sources - Materials 166 , Pipes table - Materials 167 , Pipes - Materials 168 ,
Insulation table - Materials 168 , Insulation - Materials 169 , Receivers and equipment table -
Materials 170 , Receivers and equipment - Materials 171 , Accessories table - Materials 172 ,
Accessories - Materials 173 , Producers table - Materials 174 , Producers - Materials 174
menu Results 234 Materials list 239
6.13.2 Water sources - materials

This list contains the information on the type and number of the water sources 455 in the system. To
view it, use the table Materials - Water sources 408 called from menu Results 234 Materials lists 239
Water sources - materials 241 .
Individual water sources are presented in several table rows.
In the first row, the following data is to be found:
Type Water source type presented graphically.
Producer Water source producer symbol.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 164

Audytor H2O 1.5
The second row contains the water source description.
In the next row, the following information is to be found:
N project Number of water sources in the project, [item].
N existing Number of existing water sources, [item].
Cost Total cost.
6.13.3 Heat sources overall table - materials

This list contains the overall table 441 with info on the type and number of heat sources 439 in the
system. To view it, use the table Materials - Heat sources table 399 called from menu Results 234
Materials lists 239 Heat sources table - materials 241 .
Source symbol
Water source symbol supplying the system branch with the given heat source.
Type Graphic info on the type of the heat source.
Symbol Symbol of the heat source.
Cat. no. Catalogue number of the heat source.
N project Number of heat sources in the project.
N existing Number of existing heat sources.
Cost Total cost.
Producer Symbol of the producer of the heat source.
Description Description of the heat source.
Remarks Place for remarks on the heat source (after the table has been printed).
165 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

6.13.4 Heat sources - materials

This list contains the information on the type and number of the heat sources 439 in the system. To
view it, use the table Materials - Heat sources 399 called from menu Results 234 Materials lists 239
Heat sources - materials 241 .
Heat sources list is created individually for each water source.
Individual heat sources are presented in several table rows.
Type Heat source type presented graphically.
Symbol Heat source symbol.
Producer Heat source producer symbol.
The second row contains the heat source description.
N project Number of heat sources in the project, [item].
N existing Number of existing heat sources, [item].
Cost Total cost.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 166

Audytor H2O 1.5
6.13.5 Pipes overall table - materials

This list contains the overall table 441 with info on the type and number of pipes i the system. To
view it, use the table Materials - Pipes table 403 called from menu Results 234 Materials lists 239
Pipes table - materials 242 .
Source symbol
Water source symbol supplying the system branch with the given pipes.
Type Graphic info on the type of the pipes.
Symbol Pipe symbol.
dnom Nominal diameter of the pipes.
Cat. no. Catalogue number of the pipes.
L project Length of the pipes in the project.
L existing Length of the existing pipes.
Cost Total cost.
W project Weight of the pipes in the project.
W existing Weight of the existing pipes.
V project Volume of the pipes in the project.
V existing Volume of the existing pipes.
Producer Symbol of the producer of the pipes.
Description Description of the pipes.
Remarks Place for remarks on the pipes (after the table has been printed).
167 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

6.13.6 Pipes - materials

This list contains the information on the type and number of the pipes in the system. To view it, use
the table Materials - Pipes 402 called from menu Results 234 Materials lists 239 Pipes - materials 242
.
Pipes list starts with the row with the info on the symbol of the water source supplying the system
branch with the given pipes.
Individual pipe types are presented in several table rows.
Type Pipe type presented graphically.
Symbol Catalogue symbol 430 of the pipes.
The second row contains the pipe descriptions.
The following rows contain info on individual pipe diameters in the project:
dnom [mm] Nominal diameter of the pipe.
Cat. no. Catalogue number of the pipe.
L project [m]
Length of the pipes with the given diameter in the project.
L existing [m]
Length of the existing pipes with the given diameter.
Cost Total cost.
At the end, the program displays the totals of individual table columns.
6.13.7 Insulation overall table - materials

This list contains the overall table with info on the type and amount of heat insulation mounted on
the pipes. To view it, use the table Materials - Insulation table 401 called from menu Results 234
Materials lists 239 Insulation table - materials 242 .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 168

Audytor H2O 1.5
Source symbol
Water source symbol supplying the system branch with the insulation.
Pipes symbol
Pipes symbol, on which the insulation has been mounted.
Type Graphic info on the type of insulation.
Symbol Catalogue symbol of the insulation.
Di x Th Internal diameter and insulation thickness, [mm].
Cat. no. Catalogue number of the insulation.
L/A project Length or area (in case of pads) of the insulation in the project.
L/A existing Length or area (in case of pads) of the existing insulation.
Cost Total cost of the insulation.
Producer Catalogue symbol of the producer of the insulation.
Description Description of the insulation.
Remarks Place for remarks on the insulation (after the table has been printed).
6.13.8 Insulation - materials

This list contains the information on the type and amount of the heat insulation mounted on the
pipes. To view it, use the table Materials - Insulation 400 called from menu Results 234 Materials
lists 239 Insulation - materials 243 .
Insulation list is created separately for each water source and pipe-type in the system. Each
accessories type has got its own list.
Individual insulation types are presented in several table rows.
Type Insulation type presented graphically.
169 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

Symbol Catalogue symbol 430 of the insulation.
Producer Symbol of the producer of the insulation.
The second row contains the insulation description.
The following rows contain info on individual insulation diameters in the project:
6.13.9 Receivers and equipment overall table - materials

This list contains the overall table with info on the type and number of the receivers 449 and
equipment 435 in the system. To view it, use the table Materials - Receivers and equipment table 407
called from menu Results 234 Materials lists 239 Receivers and equipment table - materials 244 .
Source symbol
Water source symbol supplying the system branch with the given receiver or
equipment.
Symbol Symbol of the receiver or equipment.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 170

Audytor H2O 1.5
N project Number of appliances in the project.
N existing Number of existing appliances.
Cost Total cost.
Producer Symbol of the producer of the receiver or equipment.
Description Description of the receiver or equipment.
Remarks Place for remarks on the receiver or equipment (after the table has been printed).
6.13.10 Receivers and equipment - materials

This list contains the information on the type and number of the receivers 449 and equipment 435 in
the system. To view it, use the table Materials - Receivers and equipment 406 called from menu
Results 234 Materials lists 239 Receivers and equipment - materials 244 .
Receivers- and equipment list is created separately for each water source.
Individual receivers- and equipment types are presented in several table rows.
Type Receiver- or equipment type presented graphically.
The second row contains the description of the receiver or equipment.
N project Number of receivers or equipment in the project, [item].
N existing Number of existing receivers or equipment, [item].
Cost Total cost.
171 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

Remarks Place for remarks on receivers or equipment (after the table has been printed).
6.13.11 Accessories overall table - materials

This list contains the overall table with info on the type and number of the accessories 428 in the
system. To view it, use the table Materials - Accessories table 397 called from menu Results 234
Materials lists 239 Accessories table - materials 243 .
Source symbol
Water source symbol supplying the system branch with the given accessories.
Pipes symbol
Pipe symbol, on which the given accessories has been mounted.
Symbol Symbol of the accessories.
dnom Nominal diameter of the accessories.
N project Number of accessories items in the project.
N existing Number of existing accessories items.
Cost Total cost of the accessories.
Producer Symbol of the producer of the accessories.
Description Description of the accessories.
Remarks Place for remarks on the accessories (after the table has been printed).
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 172

Audytor H2O 1.5
6.13.12 Accessories - materials

This list contains the information on the type and number of the accessories 428 in the system. To
view it, use the table Materials - Accessories 397 called from menu Results 234 Materials lists 239
Accessories - materials 243 .
Accessories list is created separately for each water source and pipe-type in the system. Each
Individual accessories types are presented in several table rows.
Type Accessories type presented graphically.
The second row contains the accessories description.
The following rows contain info on individual accessories diameters in the project:
dnom [mm] Nominal diameter of the accessories.
Cat. no. Catalogue symbol 430 of the accessories.
N project [item] Number of the accessories items of the given nominal diameter in the
project.
N existing [item] Number of existing accessories items of the given nominal diameter.
Cost Total cost.
Remarks Place for remarks (after the table has been printed).
173 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

6.13.13 Producers overall table - materials

This list contains the overall table with info on the producers of the appliances in the system. To
view it, use the table Materials - Producers table 405 called from menu Results 234 Materials lists 239
Producers table - materials 244 .
Symbol Symbol of the producer or dealer.
Description Description of the producer or dealer.
Address Address of the producer or dealer.
Telephone no.
Telephone number of the producer or dealer.
Fax no. Fax number of the producer or dealer.
WWW Internet homepage address of the producer or dealer.
Email E-mail address of the producer or dealer.
Remarks Remarks (after the table has been printed).
6.13.14 Producers - materials

This list contains the information on the producers of the appliances in the system. To view it, use
the table Materials - Producers 404 called from menu Results 234 Materials lists 239 Producers -
materials 245 .
Info on individual producers is presented in several table rows.
In the subsequent table rows, the following information is to be found:
Telephone no.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 174

Audytor H2O 1.5
175 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

Chapter
7
Menu structure
Audytor H2O 1.5
7 Menu structure
Menu structure accepted in the program thematically groups the commands to be executed by the
program. Individual pull-down menus contain commands on the following actions:
File 178 opening and saving data files, printing, formatting and print preview, also closing
the program;
Edit 198 editing operations in tables and pictures, such as cut, paste, text search and
replace, and data entering facilitating commands;
View 206 commands referring to toolbars and windows for entering data into pictures and
tables, and presenting results in the table- and graphic format;
Data 225 entering data and viewing catalogue data;
Calculations 234 performing calculations;
Results 234 viewing, formatting and sorting calculations results, materials lists and access
to the error list 435 ;
Parameters 247 establishing parameters of the program's work;
Window 252 operations on showing and formatting windows layout;
Help 257 help info access, and About... info.
WARNING!!!
As in other Windows applications, the user can modify menu- and toolbars layout on
demand, with the command Customize toolbars 207 , called from menu View 206 . Default
menu structure has been described in this subchapter, after performing modifications, it
may look completely different.
The following subchapters contain detailed description of individual menus and their commands.
177 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
7.1 File
Menu File contains commands for data opening and saving operations, printing and plotting
calculations results, as well as closing the program.
Menu File pulled down
This menu includes following commands:
New data 179 creating new data file;
Open data 179 opening an existing data file;
Save data 180 saving current data 432 file;
Save data as 181 saving current data into the file with the new name;
Save as DXF or DWG file 182 saving current picture as DXF 435 or DWG 435 format file;
Save as EMF or WMF file 183 saving current picture as WMF 456 or EMF 435 format file;
Copy to Windows clipboard 184 copying current picture into the Windows clipboard;
Print format 184 establishing the print layout;
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 178

Audytor H2O 1.5
Print preview 190 page preview before printing;
Print 191 printing data and calculations results;
Plot format 192 establishing the plot layout;
Plot preview 195 page preview before plotting;
Plot 196 plotting pictures of installation diagram and plan view;
Close 197 closing the program;
Recently opened projects 198 list of the recently opened projects.
See also: Menu structure 177 , menu File 178 , menu Edit 198 , menu View 206 , menu Data 225 , menu
Calculations 234 , menu Results 234 , menu Parameters 247 , menu Help 257
7.1.1 New data
Command for creating new data file. As a default, it is given the name noname.h2d. In this file, the
program assumes default values for:
print format 184 ,
plot format 192 ,
catalogue data 230 ,
calculations parameters,
program parameters 247 .
The program is able to service one data file at once, so when the new file is created, the current
data file 432 will be closed. In case of any changes in the current file, the program will display the
message with the saving suggestion, before it is closed.
See also: Menu structure 177 , menu File 178
commands: New data 179 , Open data 179 , Save data 180 , Save data as 181 , Save as DXF or
DWG file 182 , Save as EMF or WMF file 183 , Copy to Windows clipboard 184 , Print format 184 ,
Print preview 190 , Print 191 , Plot format 192 , Plot preview 195 , Plot 196 , Close 197 , Recently
opened projects 198
7.1.2 Open data
This command will open an existing data file which was previously stored on the disc with the
command Save data 180 or Save data as 181 . Simultaneously with the data, the calculations results
142 record file and the detected calculations error list 435 file will be opened.
The program is able to service one data file at once, so when the new file is created, the current
data file 432 will be closed. In case of any changes in the current file, the program will display the
message with the saving suggestion, before it is closed.
This command will also display the dialogue Open data 317 .
The details of the dialogue have been described below:
179 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
Search in - pull-down list
Use the button to open the list with the locations (folder) for the file to be opened.
Buttons
Return to previous location.

Skip to the location up.
Create the new folder 437 .
Change file display.
Files- and folders list
In the dialogue middle part, you find the list of files 436 and folders 437 from the selected location.
Select the appropriate folder, then mouse-double click it to approve the location. Double-clicking the
file will select it (as will the button Open).
File name
Here enter the file name to be opened, or the filter 436 according to which the program will create
the file 436 list of the current folder 437 .
Eg. entering the pr*.wmf filter will display all files whose names start with pr letters, with the .wmf
extension, in the selected location.
File type
The list of available files. Selecting one available file type will narrow the file list to this type only.
Buttons
Open Open selected file.

Cancel Cancel opening procedure.
Help Get help info 439 .
WARNING!!!
Precise dialogue layout will depend on the operation system installed on the computer
you are currently working with.
opened projects 198
7.1.3 Save data
This command will save current data 432 in the file of the current name (shown in the program title
bar 448 ).
If the file is to be stored for the first time, the program will display the dialogue
Save data 357 enabling entering the proper name. Changing the name or location requires selecting
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 180

Audytor H2O 1.5
the command Save data as 181 .
opened projects 198
7.1.4 Save data as
This command will save the current data 432 under the new name and in the new disc location.
To save the file without name- or location modification, call the command Save data 180 .
Selecting the command Save data as will display the dialogue Save data 357 to enter new saving
file parameters.
Save in - pull-down list
Use the button to open the list with the locations (folder) for the file to be saved.
Buttons

In the dialogue middle part, you find the list of files 436 and folders 437 from the selected location. Use
the mouse or keyboard to select the file name to save your data.
WARNING!!!
Previous file version will be then deleted, so the program will require your confirmation.
Just in case, the program will save the last file version in the .~h2d extension file.
Mouse-double click the selected folder name to approve the location. Double-clicking the file name
will save it automatically (as will the button Save).
File name
Here enter the file name to be opened or the filter 436 according to which the program will create the
file 436 list of the current folder 437 .
Save as file type
181 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
Buttons
Save Save file under the selected name.

Cancel Cancel saving procedure.
WARNING!!!
opened projects 198
7.1.5 Save as DXF or DWG
This command will save the current picture on the disc as DXF 435 or DWG 435 format file. Such
files can be then opened by any program recognizing this format (eg. AutoCAD).
Selecting this command will display the dialogue Save as DXF or DWG 356 where you will enter the
file name for the picture.
Individual elements of this dialogue have analogous functions as in the dialogue Save data 357 . In
the field Save as file type you can select between DXF 435 and DWG 435 file types, still if the
complete name with the extension is entered, this extension will decide about the resulting file
format, regardless which format has been selected in the field Save as file type.
WARNING!!!
If the window Data - Pictures 371 is active or no calculations have been performed (no results
available), the picture with calculations data will be saved, otherwise it will be the calculations
results picture.
The created file contains info on the picture layers 444 structure. While using the file in another
program, layers will be then still operational (switched on- and off, ascribed appropriate colors,
styles and line thickness).
While the file is being created, each program layer is made equivalent to two file layers. The first
layer includes lines, and its name is identical to its program name in Audytor H2O, preceded with
the text H20_. The second contains fillings, and its name is preceded with the text F_H20_.
As a default, filling layers are set as "off" in DXF or DWG files. So are those picture layers which
have not been selected as printable.
Use the command Picture layers format 232 called from menu Data 225 and menu Results 234 to
establish which layers are printable (so set as "on" in DXF or DWG files).
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 182

Audytor H2O 1.5
Graphic symbols for most of system components are saved as blocks, and this facilitates their
further edition and modification.
All texts are ascribed with styles of the names analogous to the ones of the layers they are located
in, which will facilitate font type modification.
If eg. underlays in DXF or DWG formats have been inserted into the picture currently being saved,
then when saving the picture as DXF or DWG file, those underlays will be stored in separate files,
and then their references will be available in the resulting file.
opened projects 198
7.1.6 Save as EMF or WMF
This command will save the current picture on the disc as EMF 435 (Enhanced Metafiles) or WMF
456 (Windows Metafiles) format file. Such files can be then opened by any program recognizing this
format. However, due to the high level of complexity of such pictures, not all programs will be able
to open then properly.
Selecting this command will display the dialogue Save as EMF or WMF 356 where you will enter the
file name for the picture.
the field Save as file type you can select between EMF 435 and WMF 456 file types, still if the
WARNING!!!
If the window Data - Pictures 371 is active or no calculations have been performed (no results
available), the picture with calculations data will be saved, otherwise it will be the calculations
results picture.
WARNING!!!
While creating the EMF or WMF format file, the program will save only those picture's
elements which are positioned on the printable layers 444 . Use the command Picture
layers format 232 called from menu Data 225 or menu Results 234 to establish which picture
layers are printable (so also available in EMF or WMF format files).
To preview the EMF or WMF format file picture, optimally use the plot preview window 376 called
from menu File 178 with the command Plot preview 195 .
WARNING!!!
It is recommended to save files as EMF, as it is acceptable by the majority of
contemporary applications. Use WMF format files only when you are certain that the
target program for this picture will not accept EMF format files.
183 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
opened projects 198
7.1.7 Copy to Windows clipboard
Copies the current picture to Windows clipboard 430 as EMF 435 (Enhanced Metafile) format. If any
elements have been selected in the picture, only those will be then copied, otherwise the entire
picture will be copied. You can paste the clipboard picture to any EMF accepting application (eg.
word processor) by selecting the command Paste in the target program.
opened projects 198
7.1.8 Print format
This command will establish the set of calculations results 142 and materials lists 163 , as well as
establish the format in which they will be printed in tables.
After the command has been called, the dialogue Print format 340 will be displayed, where you can
decide on the printer type, page size, paper feeding method, printable calculations results- and
materials lists tables, as well as page layout and font type.
You will find the following tabs in the dialogue:
Printouts Choice of tables to be printed, their formatting and sorting.
Page layout Page size, paper feeding, margins and paper orientation selection.
Fonts Choice of font type- and size for printing.
Individual tabs have been described below:
Tab Printouts
Tab for selection, formatting and sorting tables for printing. It consists of two parts:
Calculations results,
Materials list.
Tab Printouts - Calculations results
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 184

Audytor H2O 1.5
Dialogue Print format - tab Printouts/Calculations results
To print calculations results table, select appropriate option fields, described below:
Results General Printing the table with general calculations results 415 .
Water sources Printing the table with calculations results for water sources 426 .
Heat sources Printing the table with calculations results for heat sources 417 .
Pipes Printing the table with calculations results for pipes 419 .
Receivers and equipment

Printing the table with calculations results for receivers and equipment 422 .
Accessories Printing the table with calculations results for accessories 409 .
Rooms Printing the table with calculations results for rooms 425 .
Cold- and hot water branches

Printing the table with calculations results for cold- and hot water
branches 411 .
Circulation circuits Printing the table with calculations results for water circuits 413 .
Presets Printing the table with initial presets for governing accessories 421 .
185 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
Error list Printing the error list 435 .
In case of the tables with format table contents, the button Format will be located on the right
hand-side of the option field. This will display the dialogue Format... for table formatting.
Button Sort will sort individual tables. After selecting the button corresponding to the
appropriate table, the dialogue Sort... will be displayed, for table sorting 107 according to the
selected filter 452 .
Tab Printouts - Materials list
Dialogue Print format - tab Printouts/Materials list
To print materials list table, select appropriate option fields, described below:
Water sources overall table Printing the overall table with water sources 409 .
Water sources Printing the table with water sources 408 .
Heat sources overall table Printing the overall table with heat sources 399 .
Heat sources Printing the table with heat sources 399 .
Pipes overall table Printing the overall table with pipes 403 .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 186

Audytor H2O 1.5
Pipes Printing the table with pipes 402 .
Insulation overall table Printing the overall table with insulation 401 .
Insulation Printing the table with insulation 400 .
Receivers and equipment overall table

Printing the overall table with receivers and equipment 407 .
Receivers and equipment Printing the table with receivers and equipment 406 .
Materials - Accessories overall table

Printing the overall table with accessories 397 .
Materials - Accessories Printing the table with accessories 397 .
Materials - Producers overall table

Printing the overall table with producers 405 .
Materials - Producers Printing the table with producers 404 .
Tab Page layout
Dialogue Print format - tab Page layout
This tab described below will determine paper size and orientation, paper source and margin
widths for printing calculations results 142 .
187 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
Printer - pull-down list
This list will select 440 the printer for printing calculations results in the table format. Frequently, it is
the Default printer, which means that the printout has been directed to the system default printer.
Paper size - pull-down list
This list will determine paper size fed into the printer.
Paper feeding - pull-down list
This list will determine the paper feeding method for the selected printer.
Margins - group
This will determine page margins.
Top Estimates the distance between the upper page edge and its first line.
Bottom Estimates the distance between the bottom page edge and its last line.
Left Estimates the distance between the left page edge and the beginning of the line.
Right Estimates the distance between the right page edge and the end of the line.
Binding Estimates the distance added to the left margin when printing odd pages, and to
the right one when printing even pages.
Paper orientation - group
This group will determine the paper printout orientation.
Portrait Portrait orientation.

Landscape Landscape orientation.
Printing options - group
This group will determine printing options.
Table frame width Determines line width for printing table frames.
Print headers Switches on printing page headers.
Print footers Switches on printing page footers.
Print page numbers Switches on printing page numbers. Edition field First page number
will determine the number to start page numbering from.
Tab Fonts
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 188

Audytor H2O 1.5
Dialogue Print format - tab Fonts
This tab described below will determine the font type, style and size for printing:
Font - list
Select 440 the font type here. Only those font types are available in the program which are of the
same width.
Font style - list
This list will determine the style of the fonts to be printed.
Size - list
This list will determine the font size in typographic points.
opened projects 198
189 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
7.1.9 Print preview
This command will display the window print preview 376 , which enables viewing the pages to be
printed in the way they will be actually printed, before the command Print 191 (menu File 178 ) has
been executed. It will facilitate correctness assessment for the text layout on the pages, without the
necessity of printing the preliminary version. In case the layout is unacceptable, changes can be
made with the command Print format 184 .
Window Print preview
Entire pages are displayed in the print preview window, their numbers shown in the status bar 452 .
Status bar fragment with the current page number
Use the arrow keyboard buttons ( and ) or the scrollbar 452 to view the subsequent pages.
opened projects 198
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 190

Audytor H2O 1.5
7.1.10 Print
This command will print the table contents with calculations results 142 and materials lists 163 . It
will display the dialogue Print 339 .
Dialogue Print
Printer
You can see the selected printer name here. Change the printer with the button .
Pages range - group
Select the range of pages to be printed here.
All All pages will be printed.

Pages Only pages from the given range From: To: will be printed.
Copies - group
Determine the number and method of printing the copies here.

Number of copies
How many copies will be printed.
Sort copies Print each copy separately (eg. pages 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3, etc.).
Print - group
This group will determine which pages will be printed and proceeds the pages to the printing
process.
All pages from range All pages from the given range will be printed.
Odd pages All odd pages from the given range will be printed.
191 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
Even pages All even pages from the given range will be printed.
Print to file The printing data will be directed into a file, not directly to the
printer. It is usually done in order to print the document later
from the computer where the program has not been installed,
or use a different printer to the one used in the time of creating
the document. After selecting OK button, the dialogue Print to
file 345 will be displayed, where you should enter the name and
location of the file to save the printout.
This button will accept the printing method and close the dialogue.
This button will cancel printing and close the dialogue.
This button will call the system dialogue 452 for establishing printer parameters.
This button will call the help info 439 (Help).
opened projects 198
7.1.11 Plot format
This command will establish the scale for the picture to be plotted, page layout and other plotting
parameters.
After the command has been called, the dialogue Plot format 336 will be displayed, where you can
decide on the plotter type, page size, paper feeding method, scale of the picture to be plotted, as
well as page layout.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 192

Audytor H2O 1.5
Dialogue Plot format
Plotter - pull-down list
This list will select 440 the plotter or printer for plotting the pictures.
This list will determine paper size fed into the plotter.
This list will determine the paper feeding method for the selected plotter.
Margins - group
Top Estimates the top margin.

Bottom Estimates the bottom margin.
Left Estimates the left margin.
Right Estimates the right margin.
Plot - group
This group will determine the picture plotting parameters (options active only when plotting the
193 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
current picture, called with the function Plot picture in the pop-up menu 447 of the window with the
picture):
Entire picture This will plot the complete picture.
Fragment visible in window

This will plot only the picture fragment visible in the active view 442 .
Choose the color selection method from the pull-down list:
In color This will plot the picture in color.
In greyscale
This will plot the picture in greyscale.
In dark greyscale
This will plot the picture in darker shades of greyscale only.
Black&white This will plot the picture as black&white (no greyscale).
Show water flow direction

This option makes marking the water flow in pipes on drawing with
results.
Show insulation This option makes marking the insulation on pipes on drawing with
results.
Show critical branches and circuits

This option makes marking critical branches and circuits on drawing with
results.


Picture scale - group
This group will determine the scale of the picture to be plotted. Choose one of the typical picture
scales from the list, or enter own plotting scale in the edition field (Custom scale). Selecting the
option Fill page from the list will calibrate the picture automatically, so that it fits the page optimally.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 194

Audytor H2O 1.5
List Picture scale
opened projects 198
7.1.12 Plot preview
This command will display the window plot preview 376 , which enables viewing the pictures to be
plotted with pagination, before the command Plot 196 has been executed. It will facilitate correctness
assessment for the picture layout on the pages, without the necessity of printing the preliminary
version.
Window Plot preview
Bottom-left plot preview window tabs will select the picture for preview. Right hand-side tabs will
switch between calculations data picture- and calculations results picture previews.
In case the layout is unacceptable, changes can be made with the command Plot format 192 .
195 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
opened projects 198
7.1.13 Plot
This command will plot pictures on the plotter or printer.
To establish the plotting scale or page layout, select the command Plot format 192 in menu File 178 .
Use the plot preview 195 to watch the picture with pagination.
After selecting the command Plot, the dialogue Plot 334 will be displayed, where plotting parameters
should be determined.
Dialogue Plot
Plotter
This field will show the name of the selected plotter or printer, to be changed with the button
.
Plot - group
This group will select the picture to be plotted and determine whether to plot the picture to a file.
Choose the tab Data or Results:
Data This will plot the picture with data.
Results This will plot the picture with calculations results.
In the pictures with data- or calculations results pull-down list, choose the picture to be plotted.
Plot to file The plotted data will be directed to a file. It is usually done in order to print the
document later from the computer where the program has not been installed,
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 196

Audytor H2O 1.5
or use a different plotter or printer from the one used in the time of creating
the document. After selecting OK button, the dialogue Plot to file 338 will be
displayed, where you should enter the name and location of the file to save
the plotout.
Pages range - group
Select the range of pages to be plotted here.
All All pages will be plotted.

Pages Only pages from the given range From: To: will be plotted.
Copies - group
Determine the number and method of plotting the copies here.

Number of copies
How many copies will be plotted.
Sort copies Plot each copy separately.
This button will accept the selected plotting method and close the dialogue.
This button will cancel plotting and close the dialogue.
This button will call the system dialogue 452 for establishing plotter or printer
parameters.
opened projects 198
7.1.14 Close
This command will terminate the program's operations.
If the current data 432 has been modified, and the option for automatic data save when closing the
program is "off" (see Parameters 247 ), the program will enquire before termination whether to save
the data onto the disc.
opened projects 198
197 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
7.1.15 Recently opened projects

At the end of the File 178 menu, you will find the list of recently opened files. You can use it to open
fast one of the last projects.
Exemplary list of recently opened projects
opened projects 198
7.2 Edit
Menu Edit contains commands for editing tables and pictures, copying, cutting, pasting, searching
and replacing, etc.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 198

Audytor H2O 1.5
Menu Edit pulled down
The following commands are to be found in this menu:
Undo 199 this will undo the last edition operation;
Redo 200 this will redo the last edition operation removed with the command
Undo;
Cut 200 this will cut the highlighted element and store in the clipboard 430 ;
Clipboard 200 this will store highlighted element in the clipboard;
Paste 200 this will paste the clipboard contents;
Delete 201 this will remove the highlighted element without storing in the
clipboard;
Insert row 201 this will insert the new row in the table;
Delete row 201 this will remove the highlighted row from the table;
Search 201 this will search the text in the table;
Replace 203 this will replace the old text with the new one;
Search next 204 this will locate the next occurrence of the searched text;
Next storey 205 this will copy the highlighted picture's fragment onto the next
storey;
Copy left 205 this will copy the highlighted fragment to the left;
Copy right 205 this will copy the highlighted fragment to the right;
Create block 206 this will create the new block basing on the highlighted elements in
the picture.
7.2.1 Undo
This command - if possible - will undo recently executed editing operations in the table or the
picture.
See also: Menu structure 177 , menu Edit 198
commands: Undo 199 , Redo 200 , Cut 200 , Copy 200 , Paste 200 , Delete 201 , Insert row 201 , Delete
row 201 , Search 201 , Replace 203 , Search next 204 , Next storey 205 , Copy left 205 , Copy right 205
, Create block 206
199 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
7.2.2 Redo
This command will redo recently executed editing operations undone with the command Undo 199 .
, Create block 206
7.2.3 Cut
This command will cut the text highlighted in the table, or graphic elements highlighted in the
picture. As a result, they will be removed from the table or the picture, and inserted into the
clipboard 430 . Then these elements can be pasted into different table- or picture locations with the
command Paste 200 .
In case of storing table fragments in the clipboard, its contents can be pasted into another program
(eg. word processor, calculation sheet, etc.).
, Create block 206
7.2.4 Copy
This command will copy the selected table fragment or graphic elements in the picture. As a result,
the highlighted elements will be copied into the clipboard 430 .
Table fragments or graphic elements stored in the clipboard can be pasted into different table- or
picture locations with the command Paste 200 called from menu Edit 198 . In case of storing table
fragments in the clipboard, its contents can be pasted into another program (eg. word processor,
calculation sheet, etc.).
, Create block 206
7.2.5 Paste
This command will paste the table fragment or graphic elements from the clipboard 430 , after
previously storing them there with commands Copy 200 or Cut 200 called from menu Edit 198 .
In case of graphic elements to be pasted into the picture, after executing the command, the mouse
cursor will change into . You should move the pasted objects onto desired places with the
mouse cursor, while holding the left mouse key pressed.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 200

Audytor H2O 1.5
, Create block 206
7.2.6 Delete
This command will remove the table- or picture elements. These elements will not be inserted in
the clipboard 430 , unlike the result of the command Cut 200 .
, Create block 206
7.2.7 Insert row
This command will insert the new row into the table.
, Create block 206
7.2.8 Delete row
This command will delete the current row from the table.
, Create block 206
7.2.9 Search
This command will search the desired text in the table. It will display the dialogue Search 363 .
201 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
Dialogue Search
Search - pull-down list
Enter the text to be searched or select 440 it from the previously entered texts.
Options - group
This group will establish search details.
Match case When searching, the program will consider capital letters. Leaving this field
unmarked means no case distinguishing.
Match whole word

When searching, the program will consider entire words only (text fragment
occurrences are not reported).
Range - group
This group will establish table fragment where the text is to be searched.
Global Search the entire table.
Selected text Search the highlighted table fragment only.
Current column Search in the current table column 433 only.
Direction - group
This group will establish the preferred direction of table search.
Up Search in the table text preceding the current position.
Down Search in the table text following the current position.
Search from - group
This group will establish the preferred search starting point.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 202

Audytor H2O 1.5
Caret position The text will be searched starting form the current caret position.
Table beginning The text will be searched starting form the table beginning, in case when
no Selected text option has been marked in the Range group.
, Create block 206
7.2.10 Replace
This command will search and replace the desired text in the table. It will display the dialogue
Replace 351 .
Dialogue Replace
Enter the text to be searched or select 440 it from the previously entered texts. If this function has
been executed in the table column with the appliances catalogue symbols, on the right hand-side
of Search and Replace with you will notice the buttons calling the pop-up list with catalogue
symbols of selected appliances. This will facilitate selecting the appropriate appliance symbol.
button holds the same function.
Replace with - pull-down list
Enter the text to replace with or select it from the previously entered texts.
Search&Replace options - group
This group will establish search and replace details.
Match case Case-sensitive search.
203 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
Match whole word

When searching, the program will consider entire words only (text
fragment occurrences are not reported).
Ask before replacing Before replacing, the located text will be highlighted, and the program
will display the replacement confirmation message.
Range - group
Direction - group
Search from - group
Cursor position The text will be searched starting form the current caret position.
Table beginning The text will be searched starting form the table beginning, in case
when no Selected text option has been marked in the Range group.
, Create block 206
7.2.11 Search next
This command, depending on the commands executed earlier, continues searching 201 or replacing
203 the table text.
, Create block 206
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 204

Audytor H2O 1.5
7.2.12 Next storey
This command will copy the graphic elements selected in the picture onto the next storey 125 .
It is very useful when creating data for the systems repeatable on subsequent storeys.
When creating next storeys, the program will increase rooms- and system component numbers
with 100 or 1000. This should be taken into account when numbering system components 135 .
When numbering system components and planning the chronology of entering data appropriately,
you can facilitate project work considerably. The parameters for increasing pipe-run- and room
numbers can be established in the dialogue program parameters 346 executed with the command
Parameters 247 .
, Create block 206
7.2.13 Copy left
This command will copy 124 to the left graphic elements highlighted in the picture. It is very useful
when creating data for repeatable system fragments.
When creating next storeys, the program will renumber rooms- and system component symbols.
This should be taken into account when numbering system components 135 .
you can facilitate project work considerably.
, Create block 206
7.2.14 Copy right
This command will copy 124 to the right graphic elements highlighted in the picture. It is very useful
when creating data for repeatable system fragments.
When creating next storeys, the program will renumber rooms- and system component symbols.
This should be taken into account when numbering system components 135 .
you can facilitate project work considerably.
, Create block 206
205 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
7.2.15 Create block
This command will create 68 the new block 437 basing on the graphic elements highlighted in the
picture. The blocks can be then inserted 67 into any location in the picture, in the current- or new
projects.
, Create block 206
7.3 View
Menu View contains commands for establishing the layout of toolbars of the windows for the
graphic entering data in the installation diagram 32 and presentation of results in the graphic form,
as well as data- and calculations results tables. It also contains commands for viewing pictures
(calibration, moving, etc.).
Menu View pulled down
This menu contains the following commands:
Customize toolbars 207 customization of toolbars and commands;
Toolbars 212 toolbars;
Drawing properties 213 establishes drawing properties for the current picture;
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 206

Audytor H2O 1.5
Pictures window layout 217 establishes the layout of the window with pictures;
Zoom + 221 increases scale of the current picture (zooms in the picture);
Zoom - 221 decreases scale of the current picture (zooms out the picture);
Zoom - all 222 establishes scale of the current picture, so that all available
drawing area is visible in the window;
Zoom - picture range 222 establishes scale of the current picture, so that all its fragments
are visible in the window;
Zoom - window 222 selects the picture's fragment to be displayed;
Zoom dynamic 223 smooth picture calibration;
Previous scale 223 retrieves previous picture's scale;
Repaint picture 223 repaints the current picture;
Move picture 223 moves the current picture;
Format table 224 formats the table;
Sort table 224 sorts the table contents according to the selected filter.
7.3.1 Customize toolbars
This command will show the dialogue Customize toolbars 292 customizing the layout of the toolbars
454 and menu.
This dialogue consists of four tabs, listed and described in detail below:
Toolbars;
Commands;
Pop-up menu;
Options.
Tab Toolbars
207 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
Dialogue Customize toolbars - tab Toolbars
Toolbars - list
Here select which toolbars are to be visible, by clicking the empty squares on the left hand-side of
toolbars names, so that they are marked as . This list also contains the toolbar referred to by the
buttons on the right hand-side of the dialogue.
This button will create the new toolbar 454 .
This button will change the name of the highlighted toolbar,however it only
functions for the user toolbars - if the toolbar is default, the button will be
unavailable.
This button removes the highlighted toolbar, however it only functions for the user
toolbars - if the toolbar is default, the button will be unavailable.
This button restores the default layout of the highlighted toolbar.If the toolbar
hasn't been modified, or in case of user toolbars,the button will be unavailable.
Tab Commands
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 208

Audytor H2O 1.5
Dialogue Customize toolbars - tab Commands
Available commands - list
This list contains commands to be positioned in the toolbars. They can be dragged and dropped
onto any selected toolbar.
At the moment, the list contains commands from the category selected in the Categories list.
Categories - list
This list contains available categories of commands.
Command description
Here you will find description of the highlighted command.
Shortcut
Here you can select the keyboard shortcut.
This button will edit the command added by the user.
This button will add the user command.
This button will remove the command added by the user.
Tab Pop-up menu
209 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
This tab will customize pop-up menus 447 .
Dialogue Customize toolbars - tab Pop-up menu
On the tab's left hand-side, you will find the available commands grouped in categories, and on the
right - the selected menu. You can drag and drop the left hand-side commands onto the selected
menu, and the opposite action will remove the command from the menu. The tab's bottom buttons
have the same functions as in the tab Commands.
Tab Options
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 210

Audytor H2O 1.5
Dialogue Customize toolbars - tab Options
Enable fast menu and toolbars customizing
Marking this field will display pull-down symbols (black triangles) in the toolbars andmenu, enabling
fast customizing.
Show hints in toolbars - option field
Marking this field will display hints when the toolbar command is approached with the mouse
cursor.
Show shortcut button in hints - option field
Marking this field will display the keyboard shortcut info in the hint.
Animation menu - list
This list will determine pull-down method for the menu.
Toolbar style - list
This list will determine the toolbar style.
Show in menu as first recently executed commands - option field
Marking this field will initially limit the menu to the recently executed commands only. If necessary,
extend the menu by clicking .
211 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
Show whole menu after a while - option field
Marking this field will automatically extend the menu after a short while.
This button will delete the history of executed commands.
See also: Menu structure 177 , menu View 206
commands: Customize toolbars 207 , Toolbars 212 , Drawing properties 213 , Pictures window
layout 217 , Zoom + 221 , Zoom - 221 , Zoom - All 222 , Zoom - Picture range 222 , Zoom - Window
222 , Zoom dynamic 223 , Previous scale 223 , Repaint picture 223 , Move picture 223 , Format table
224 , Sort table 224
7.3.2 Toolbars
This command will pull-down menu Toolbars for establishing visibility of individual toolbars.
Menu View 206 Toolbars 212 pulled down
To make the selected toolbar visible, mark it with .
Executing the command Customize... will display the dialogue Customize toolbars 292 .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 212

Audytor H2O 1.5
This command will establish drawing properties for the current picture (grid, mouse snap precision,
ruler, etc.), and properties for all pictures. This command will display the dialogue Drawing
properties 309 .
Scale - text field
picture.
213 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
marked.

of the picture.
Show vertical ruler

the picture.
Apply to all views

Drawing aid - group

segments.
Linking aid



© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 214

Audytor H2O 1.5




borders.

while being moved.

being moved.



Undo history
Grid points color

Show grid.
215 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
Thread cursor

Bitmaps painting

mode.



layers 444 .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 216

Audytor H2O 1.5
7.3.4 Pictures window layout
This command will establish the layout for the window with pictures. Executing this command will
pull down the next menu level, where you can choose one of the available window layouts. Different
variants are explained with icons.
Menu View 206 Pictures window layout 217 pulled down
Following variants are available:
Table on the left 218
Table on the right 218
Table at the bottom 219
Picture at the top 220
217 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
7.3.4.1 Table on the left
In this variant of the window layout, the table is located on the left hand-side at the bottom.
See also: Menu structure 177 , menu View 206 Pictures window layout 217
commands: Table on the left 218 , Table on the right 218 , Table at the bottom 219 , Picture at the
top 220
7.3.4.2 Table on the right
In this variant of the window layout, the table is located on the right hand-side at the bottom.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 218

Audytor H2O 1.5
top 220
7.3.4.3 Table at the bottom
In this variant of the window layout, the table is located at the bottom of the window.
219 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
top 220
7.3.4.4 Picture at the top
In this variant of the window layout, the main picture is located at the top of the window.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 220

Audytor H2O 1.5
top 220
7.3.5 Zoom +
This command will increase the scale (zoom in) of the picture active view 442 .
7.3.6 Zoom -
This command will decrease the scale (zoom out) of the picture active view 442 .
221 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
7.3.7 Zoom - all
This command will establish the scale of the picture active view 442 , so that the entire available
drawing area is visible in the window.
7.3.8 Zoom - picture range
This command will establish the scale of the picture active view 442 , so that all already created
picture's elements are visible in the window.
7.3.9 Zoom - window
This command will select the picture's fragment to be displayed. This is done with the pressed left
mouse key: after selecting the command Zoom - window from menu View 206 , the cursor will
change to , then you should point the area to be displayed.
Window selection (left mouse key pressed)
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 222

Audytor H2O 1.5
7.3.10 Zoom dynamic
This command will switch the program into the dynamic picture calibration mode. By moving up-
or down with the mouse you will increase or decrease the picture scale. This also can be done with
the mouse scroll key.
The cursor will then change into .
7.3.11 Previous scale
This command will retrieve the previous scale of the picture.
7.3.12 Repaint picture
While drawing, sometimes some graphical disturbances will be left visible on the screen, after
editing operations have been executed. This command will repaint the picture views and
consequently remove the disturbances.
7.3.13 Move picture
This command will switch the program into the move drawing mode, and enable selection of the
picture's fragment to be currently displayed in the window. This is done with the pressed left mouse
key.
223 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
7.3.14 Format table
This command will determine the format of the current calculations results table to be displayed
and printed. The command will show the dialogue Format 315 customized for the current
calculations results table. In this dialogue, select these option fields which correspond to the
columns (in some tables also rows) which are to be considered in the table.
Exemplary dialogue for establishing the format of the calculations results table
7.3.15 Sort table
This command will sort the table contents according to the selected filter. It will display the
dialogue Sort 366 customized for the current calculations results table. In this dialogue, select the
filter 452 for sorting the table contents.
The sorting function will facilitate entering data, as well as the analysis of the obtained results.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 224

Audytor H2O 1.5
7.4 Data
Menu Data contains commands for entering data 21 on the current project 433 .
Menu Data pulled down
It consists of the following commands:
General 226 entering general data and calculations parameters for the entire
project;
Rooms 226 entering data on rooms with the system components;
Pictures 226 drawing and entering data onto the installation diagram and plan
views;
Edit pictures list 226 editing the list of pictures;
Variables 227 entering variables;
Catalogues 230 viewing catalogues of the appliances available in the program

data base;
Picture layers format 232 formatting picture layers 444 ;
Component label format 233 establishing the layout of labels describing system components
in the calculations data pictures.
225 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
7.4.1 General
This command will display the dialogue Data - General 297 for entering general data on the system
under design, and calculations parameters 429 .
Detailed info on entering general data has been given in the subchapter General data 22 .
See also: Menu structure 177 , menu Data 225
commands: General 226 , Rooms 226 , Pictures 226 , Variables 227 , Catalogues 230 , Component
labels format 233 , Picture layers format 232 , Edit pictures list 226
7.4.2 Rooms
This command will display the dialogue Data - Rooms 308 for entering data on rooms with the
components of the system under design.
Detailed info on entering data on rooms has been given in the subchapter Room data 29 .
7.4.3 Pictures
This command will display the window Data - Pictures 371 for graphic entering data in the
installation diagram 32 , and drawing storey plan views 82 .
Detailed info on drawing the system has been given in the subchapter Installation diagram drawing
and entering data on system components 32 .
7.4.4 Edit pictures list
This command will display the dialogue Pictures list 333 for editing the list of pictures available in the
project. Here you can add, remove, modify order and names of individual pictures.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 226

Audytor H2O 1.5
list.
7.4.5 Variables
This command will define variables used later for entering data.
227 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
Menu Data 225 Variables 227 pulled down
Selecting the command will pull-down the next menu level where you can select the following
options:
Global 228 ,
Dimensions 229 ,
Temperatures 229 ,
Pressures 229 ,
Flows 230 .
Detailed info on variables has been given in the subchapter Entering variables 31 .
7.4.5.1 Global
This command will call the dialogue Variables - Global 370 for editing global data.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 228

Audytor H2O 1.5
Description
See also: Menu structure 177 , menu Data 225 Variables 227
commands: Global 228 , Dimensions 229 , Temperatures 229 , Pressures 229 , Flows 230
7.4.5.2 Dimensions
This command will call the dialogue Variables - Dimensions 370 for editing dimensions data.
7.4.5.3 Temperatures
This command will call the dialogue Variables - Temperatures 370 for editing temperatures data.
7.4.5.4 Pressures
This command will call the dialogue Variables - Pressures 370 for editing pressures data.
229 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
7.4.5.5 Flows
This command will call the dialogue Variables - Flows 370 for editing flows data.
7.4.6 Catalogues
S1
This command will view catalogue data on appliances used in the system.
Menu Data 225 Catalogues 230 pulled down
Selecting the command will pull-down the next menu level where you can select the following
catalogue data categories:
Pipes catalogue 231
Accessories catalogue 231
Receivers- and equipment catalogue 231
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 230

Audytor H2O 1.5
7.4.6.1 Pipes catalogue
Viewing the pipes catalogue.
See also: Menu structure 177 , menu Data 225 Catalogues 230
commands: Pipes catalogue 231 , Insulation catalogue 231 , Accessories catalogue 231 ,
Receivers- and equipment catalogue 231 , Heat sources catalogue 231 , Producers catalogue 231
7.4.6.2 Insulation catalogue
Viewing the insulation catalogue.
7.4.6.3 Accessories catalogue
Viewing the accessories catalogue.
7.4.6.4 Receivers- and equipment catalogue
Viewing the equipment- and draw-off accessories catalogue.
7.4.6.5 Heat sources catalogue
Viewing the heat sources catalogue.
7.4.6.6 Producers catalogue
Viewing the catalogue of the system components producers.
231 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
7.4.7 Picture layers format
This command will display the dialogue Picture layers 324 for formatting and edition of picture layers
444 in the project. Picture layers edition will modify the colors, line thickness and font type and size
for graphic elements positioned on individual layers.
Table

WARNING!!!
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 232

Audytor H2O 1.5
in the dialogue:
Buttons
WARNING!!!
WARNING!!!
Exemplary application of the dialogue Picture labels has been shown in the subchapter Other
graphic elements drawing 72 .
7.4.8 Component label format
This command will display the dialogue Data - Labels format 304 for formatting the layout of system
components in calculations data pictures. Executing this command will establish the system
components information to be included in labels.
Exemplary label formatting has been shown in the subchapter Deciding on pictures layout 78 .
233 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
7.5 Calculations
This command will perform calculations for the current project 433 .
Detailed info on the calculation process has been given in the subchapter Calculations 138 .
7.6 Results
Menu Results contains commands for viewing calculations results 142 , materials lists 163 and error
list 435 for the current project 433 .
Menu Results pulled down
This menu includes following commands:
General 235 displays the window with general calculations results;
Pictures 236 displays the window with calculations results as pictures;
Water sources 236 calculations results table

for water sources 455 ;
Heat sources 236 calculations results table for heat sources 439 ;
Pipes 236 calculations results table for pipes;
Receivers and equipment 237 calculations results table for receivers 449 and equipment
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 234

Audytor H2O 1.5
435 ;
Accessories 237 calculations results table for accessories 428 ;
Rooms 237 calculations results table for rooms;
Branches 238 calculations results table for individual system branches;
Circulation circuits 238 calculations results table for hot water circulation circuits;
Presets 238 calculations results table for initial presets;
Error list 239 list of errors 429 detected while calculating;
Materials lists 239 pull-down menu for selecting the specific set of materials;
Picture layers format 245 enables formatting and edition of layers 444 ;
Component label format 247 enables formatting the layout of system components labels
in the calculations results pictures.
If no calculations 234 have been performed for the current data, or the errors detected while
calculating prevented creation of the calculations results file, the program will display the warning
message at the attempt to execute commands for the calculations results.
Calculations results and materials lists are presented in tables, in the installation diagram and
storey plan views. The contents of the table cells will not be modified. However, the copying 200
function for the selected table fragment to the clipboard 430 is available.
In most cases, the table contents can be sorted according to the selected filter 452 , by executing the
command Sort table 224 from menu View 206 . Most tables can also be formatted with the command
Format table 224 in menu View 206 .
Graphic elements in the installation diagram and plan views calculations results are not modifiable.
However, their appearance can be changed with the command Picture layers format 245 and
Component results label format 247 .
7.6.1 General
This command will display the table Results - General 415 with general calculations results.
Detailed information on this table has been given in the chapter Calculations results 142 ,
subchapter: General calculations results 143 .
Menu structure 177 , menu Results 234
commands: General 235 , Pictures 236 , Water sources 236 , Heat sources 236 , Pipes 236 ,
Receivers and equipment 237 , Accessories 237 , Rooms 237 , Branches 238 , Circulation circuits
238 , Presets 238 , Error list 239 , Materials list 239 , Picture layers format 245 , Results labels
format 247
235 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
7.6.2 Pictures
This command will display the window Results - Pictures 378 with calculations results as pictures.
Detailed information on this window has been given in the chapter Calculations results 142 ,
subchapter: Results as the graphic installation diagram and plan views 145 .
format 247
7.6.3 Water sources
This command will display the table Results - Water sources 426 with water sources parameters.
subchapter: Water sources 147 .
format 247
7.6.4 Heat sources
This command will display the table Results - Heat sources 426 with heat sources parameters.
subchapter: Heat sources 149 .
format 247
7.6.5 Pipes
This command will display the table Results - Pipes 419 with calculations results for distributing- 434
and circulation pipes.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 236

Audytor H2O 1.5
subchapter: Pipes 151 .
format 247
7.6.6 Receivers and equipment
This command will display the table Results - Receivers and equipment 422 with calculations
results for the receivers 449 and equipment 435 in the system.
subchapter: Receivers and equipment 153 .
format 247
7.6.7 Accessories
This command will display the table Results - Accessories 409 with the complete calculations
results set for accessories 428 in the system.
subchapter: Accessories 155 .
format 247
7.6.8 Rooms
This command will display the table Results - Rooms 425 with calculations results for the rooms.
subchapter: Rooms 156 .
237 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
format 247
7.6.9 Branches
This command will display the table Results - Branches 411 with calculations results for distributing
pipes 434 as water supplying branches from water sources 455 to
receivers 449 .
subchapter: Branches 157 .
format 247
7.6.10 Circulation circuits
This command will display the table Results - Circulation circuits 413 with calculations results for hot
water circulation circuits 430 .
subchapter: Circulation circuits 158 .
format 247
7.6.11 Presets
This command will display the table Results - Presets 421 with the preset 439 list for governing
accessories 437 .
subchapter: Presets 160 .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 238

Audytor H2O 1.5
format 247
7.6.12 Error list
This command will display the error list 373 . The window contains the list of all errors 429 and
warning messages generated while calculating 138 . Critical errors 432 warning messages numbers
are given on the red background.
Detailed description of the list of errors has been given in the chapter Calculations 138 , subchapter:
Detecting and removing errors 139 .
format 247
7.6.13 Materials lists
This command will pull-down the menu for selection of materials lists for viewing.
239 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
Menu Results 234 Materials list 239 pulled down
The following lists are available to be displayed:
Water sources table - materials 240 overall table with the list of water sources in the system;
Water sources - materials 241 table with the list of water sources in the system;
Heat sources table - materials 241 overall table with the list of heat sources in the system;
Heat sources - materials 241 table with the list of heat sources in the system;
Pipes table - materials 242 overall table with the list of pipes in the system;
Pipes - materials 242 table with the list of pipes in the system;
Insulation table - materials 242 overall table with the list of pipe insulation in the system;
Insulation - materials 243 table with the list of pipe insulation in the system;
Receivers and equipment table - materials 244

overall table with the list of receivers and equipment in the
system;
Receivers and equipment - materials 244

table with the list of receivers and equipment in the system;
Accessories table - materials 243 overall table with the list of accessories in the system;
Accessories - materials 243 table with the list of accessories in the system;
Producers table - materials 244 overall table with the list of components producers in the
system;
Producers - materials 245 table with the list of components producers in the system;
format 247
7.6.13.1 Water sources table - materials
This command will display the table Materials - Water sources table 409 . The table includes overall
list 441 of water sources in the current project 433 .
Detailed info on the table has been presented in the chapter Calculation results 142 , subchapter:
Water sources table - materials 164 .
See also: Menu structure 177 , menu Results 234 Materials list 239
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 240

Audytor H2O 1.5
commands: Water sources table - Materials 240 , Water sources - Materials 241 , Heat sources
table - Materials 241 , Heat sources - Materials 241 , Pipes table - Materials 242 , Pipes -
Materials 242 , Insulation table - Materials 242 , Insulation - Materials 243 , Accessories table -
Materials 243 , Accessories - Materials 243 , Receivers and equipment table - Materials 244 ,
Receivers and equipment - Materials 244 , Producers table - Materials 244 , Producers -
Materials 245
7.6.13.2 Water sources - materials
This command will display the table Materials - Water sources 408 . The table includes the list of
water sources in the current project 433 .
Water sources - materials 164 .
Materials 245
7.6.13.3 Heat sources table - materials
This command will display the table Materials - Heat sources table 399 . The table includes overall list
441 of heat sources in the current project 433 .
Heat sources table - materials 165 .
Materials 245
7.6.13.4 Heat sources - materials
This command will display the table Materials - Heat sources 399 . The table includes the list of heat
sources in the current project 433 .
Heat sources - materials 166 .
241 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
Materials 245
7.6.13.5 Pipes table - materials
This command will display the table Materials - Pipes table 403 . The table includes overall list 441 of
pipes in the current project 433 .
Pipes table - materials 167 .
Materials 245
7.6.13.6 Pipes - materials
This command will display the table Materials - Pipes 402 . The table includes the list of pipes in the
current project 433 .
Pipes - materials 168 .
Materials 245
7.6.13.7 Insulation table - materials
This command will display the table Materials - Insulation table 401 . The table includes overall list 441
of insulation in the current project 433 .
Insulation table - materials 168 .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 242

Audytor H2O 1.5
Materials 245
7.6.13.8 Insulation - materials
This command will display the table Materials - Insulation 400 . The table includes the list of insulation
in the current project 433 .
Insulation - materials 169 .
Materials 245
7.6.13.9 Accessories table - materials
This command will display the table Materials - Accessories table 397 . The table includes overall list
441 of accessories in the current project 433 .
Accessories table - materials 172 .
Materials 245
7.6.13.10 Accessories - materials
This command will display the table Materials - Accessories 397 . The table includes the list of
accessories in the current project 433 .
Accessories - materials 173 .
Materials 245
243 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
7.6.13.11 Receivers and equipment table - materials
This command will display the table Materials - Receivers and equipment table 407 . The table
includes overall list 441 of receivers and equipment in the current project 433 .
Receivers and equipment table - materials 170 .
Materials 245
7.6.13.12 Receivers and equipment - materials
This command will display the table Materials - Receivers and equipment 406 . The table includes the
list of receivers and equipment in the current project 433 .
Receivers and equipment - materials 171 .
Materials 245
7.6.13.13 Producers table - materials
This command will display the table Materials - Producers table 405 . The table includes overall list
441 of components producers in the current project 433 .
Materials 245
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 244

Audytor H2O 1.5
7.6.13.14 Producers - materials
This command will display the table Materials - Producers 404 . The table includes the list of
components producers in the current project 433 .
Producers - materials 174 .
Materials 245
7.6.14 Picture layers format
This command will display the dialogue Picture layers 324 for formatting and edition of calculations
results picture layers 444 . Edition of picture layers enables modification of colors, line thickness, font
type- and size, as well as graphic elements on individual layers.
Table

245 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
WARNING!!!
in the dialogue:
Buttons
WARNING!!!
WARNING!!!
Exemplary application of the dialogue Picture layers is to be found in the point Other graphic
elements drawing 72 . The example refers to data pictures, still it is also applicable to modifiable
parameters of calculations results layers.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 246

Audytor H2O 1.5
format 247
7.6.15 Results labels format
This command will display the dialogue Results - Labels format 353 for formatting system
components labels in calculations results pictures. Here you can determine which information on
system components will be displayed on labels with calculations results pictures.
Exemplary layer formatting has been presented in the point Deciding on pictures layout 78 . The
example refers to data pictures, still it is also applicable to modifiable components labels in
calculations results pictures.
format 247
7.7 Parameters
This command will display the dialogue Program parameters 346 for establishing parameters on
saving files, table fonts, automatic room numbering on subsequent storeys, etc.
In the dialogue you will find following tabs:
Save Determining automatic data saving, program parameters and windows

layout,
Fonts Selection of font types and sizes for calculations results tables,
Numbering Establishing the system for rooms- and pipes numbering on subsequent
storeys, when copying data onto the next storey automatically 125 .
The tabs have been described in detail below:
Tab Save
247 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
Dialogue Program parameters - tab Save
This tab will determine automatic data saving, program parameters and windows layout.
Automatically save when closing - group
This group will establish the data set to be automatically stored onto the disc when closing the
program 197 .
Save data file Automatically saves the current data 432 file.
Save program parameters Automatically saves the program parameters 448 file.
Save window layout Automatically saves the user defined windows layout.
Compress calculation data files Mark this option if you want the calculation data files to
be compressed when being stored. Compressed files
take significantly less disc space, however their
opening and closing might take more time.
Compress calculation results files Mark this option if you want the calculation results files
to be compressed when being stored.
Data file saving options - group
This group will establish the options for saving data file 433 onto the disc.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 248

Audytor H2O 1.5
Create backup copy When storing the data file, the program will create the backup copy
out of the previous data file (extension .~h2d file).
Save data every ... min Automatic current data file saving in established time intervals.
Save data before calculating

Automatic data file saving before calculations are commenced.
DXF&DWG pictures saving options - group
This group will establish the options for saving DXF 435 and DWG 435 pictures.
Switch off unprintable layers

Marking this option will switch off the layers not meant to be printed,
when storing DXF or DWG pictures.
Switch off component fillings layers

Marking this option will switch off the layers meant for filling the
components, when storing DXF or DWG pictures.
Save inserted DXF&DWG pictures

Saving options for inserted DXF and DWG pictures.
If any DXF or DWG format files (eg. underlays) have been inserted
into the picture currently being stored, when saving as DWG or DXF
format, those files are always stored in separate files, with
appropriate references in the main picture.
Three saving options are available for such inserted pictures:
Always ask When saving the inserted picture, the

program will ask whether to overwrite the
previously created picture.
Never ask The program will always overwrite the

previously created picture of the same
name.
Only when newer or no

The program will save the inserted picture
when it is newer form the previously
created, or when no earlier file of the same
name exists.
Tab Fonts
This tab will enable selection of the table font type and style, for data and calculations results, and
the error list 435 .
249 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
Dialogue Program parameters - tab Fonts
Font - list
Here select 440 the font type. The program will display only these font types which have the letters of
the same width.
Font style - list
Here select printing font style (italics, bold, underline).
Size - field and list
Here you will select the font size, as expressed in typographic points.
Tab Numbering
This tab will determine room numbering on the subsequent storeys, when copying data onto the
next storey automatically 125 .
Next storey room numbers - group
Option fields in this group have been described below:
Increase (...) with 100

This option will increase room numbers with 100 when copying data onto
the next storey.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 250

Audytor H2O 1.5
This option will increase room numbers with 1000 when copying data
onto the next storey.
This renumbering is necessary only when the total number of rooms on

one storey is larger than 100, in other cases it is recommended to
increase room numbers with 100.
Next storey pipe numbers - group

This option will increase pipe numbers with 100 when copying data onto
the next storey.
the next storey.
This renumbering is necessary only when the total number of pipes on

increase pipe numbers with 100.
Dialogue Program parameters - tab Numbering
251 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
7.8 Window
Menu Window contains commands on displaying and arranging open windows positioned in the
program main window 448 .
Menu Window pulled down
This menu includes the following commands:
Tiles 253 arranges windows as tiles;
Cascade 253 arranges windows as a cascade;
Align horizontally 254 arranges windows horizontally (one on top of another);
Align vertically 254 arranges windows vertically (one next to another);
Arrange icons 255 arranges windows minimized to icons;
Restore 255 restores the original size of active window;
Minimize 255 minimizes the active window;
Maximize 255 maximizes the active window;
Close window 256 closes the active window;
Minimize all 256 minimizes all windows;
Close all 257 closes all windows;
Open windows list 257 the program attaches the list of currently opened windows to menu
Windows. Selection of the window from the list will make it active.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 252

Audytor H2O 1.5
7.8.1 Tiles
This command will arrange all opened windows as tiles.
Windows arranged as tiles
See also: Menu structure 177 , menu Window 252
commands: Tiles 253 , Cascade 253 , Align horizontally 254 , Align vertically 254 , Arrange icons 255
, Restore 255 , Minimize 255 , Maximize 255 , Close window 256 , Minimize all 256 , Close all 257 ,
Open windows list 257
7.8.2 Cascade
This command will arrange all opened windows as a cascade.
Windows arranged as a cascade
253 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
7.8.3 Align horizontally
This command will arrange the windows horizontally (one on top of another).
Windows aligned horizontally
7.8.4 Align vertically
This command will arrange the windows vertically (one next to another).
Windows aligned vertically
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 254

Audytor H2O 1.5
7.8.5 Arrange icons
This command will arranges windows minimized to icons.
Arrangement of minimized windows
7.8.6 Restore
This command will restore the original size of the active window.
7.8.7 Minimize
This command will minimize the active window.
Minimized window
7.8.8 Maximize
This command will maximize the active window. The window will take the entire available area of
the main program window 448 .
255 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
Maximized window
In the exemplary picture above, Window 1 has been maximized, so that it takes the entire area of
the main program window.
7.8.9 Close window
This command will close the active window.
7.8.10 Minimize all
This command will minimize all opened windows.
All windows minimized
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 256

Audytor H2O 1.5
7.8.11 Close all
This command will close all currently opened windows.
7.8.12 Open windows list
The program attaches the list of currently opened windows marked as to menu Windows 252 .
Selection of the window from the list will make it active.
The list of currently opened windows attached to menu Windows
7.9 Help
Menu Help contains commands for accessing information about the program.
Menu Help pulled down
257 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
This menu includes the following commands:
Index 258 displays the index of the help system 439 ;
Using help 258 shows info on using the help system;
Internet 258 shows the internet homepage of Audytor programs, and other
programs based on them;
Send mail 258 enters the mail program to send mail to the authors of programs;
About... 259 displays basic information on the program.
7.9.1 Index
This command will display the index of the help system 439 .
commands: Index 258 , Using help 258 , Internet 258 , Send mail 258 , About... 259
7.9.2 Using help
This command will show info on using the help system 439 , together with the default info (available
in Windows system) on how to use help. Language of this part of help depends on the Windows
system language version.
7.9.3 Internet
This command will show the internet homepage of Audytor programs, and other programs based
on them. To view the homepage, it is required to have the internet browser installed.
7.9.4 Send mail
This command will enter the mail program in order to send mail to the authors of programs. It is
required to have the e-mail program installed.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 258

Audytor H2O 1.5
7.9.5 About
This command will display the dialogue with basic information on the program.
7.10 Toolbars
Toolbars contain buttons enabling fast selection of required commands.
To execute the command ascribed to the given button, click it with the left mouse key.
As a default, following toolbars are available in the program:
Drawing 259
Program 260
Data 260
Results 261
Graphics edition 262
Customizing toolbars 262 according to the users preferences is to be found in the relevant point.
7.10.1 Toolbar Drawing
This toolbar contains commands connected with the system picture process.
The toolbar has been described in detail in Entering data 21 chapter, point Drawing functions
toolbar 126 .
See also: Toolbars 259 - overview
term Toolbar 454
toolbars: Picture 259 , Program 260 , Data 260 , Results 261 , Graphics edition 262 , Customizing
toolbars 262 , Pull-down button 448
259 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
7.10.2 Toolbar Program

This toolbar contains commands connected with basic functions of the program.
Toolbar Program
Buttons have the following functions ascribed:
Creating a new data file 21 (new project).

Opening an existing data file.
Saving current data file 180 .
Print format 184 , ie. establishing the set and format of the tables to be printed, page layout
and font size.
Print preview 190 , ie. screen-display of all table pages in the same way they are to be printed.
Table printing 191 .
Plot format 192 , ie. establishing the set and scale of the pictures to be plotted.
Plot preview 195 , ie. screen-display of the paginated picture to be plotted.
Plotting pictures 196 onto the plotter or printer.
Undo last edition operations 199 .
Redo recently undone edition operations 200 .
Cut to clipboard 200 (does not keep the original).
Copy to clipboard 200 (original is kept).
Paste from clipboard 200 .
Delete 201 (original not moved into the clipboard).
Find table text 201 .
Replace old text with new 203 .
Performing calculations 138 .
term Toolbar 454
7.10.3 Toolbar Data

This toolbar contains commands connected with entering data.
Toolbar Data
The buttons have the following functions ascribed:
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 260

Audytor H2O 1.5
Entering general data and calculations parameters 22 for the entire project.
Entering room data 29 .
Drawing and entering data onto installation diagrams and plan views 32 .
term Toolbar 454
7.10.4 Toolbar Results

This toolbar contains commands connected with the presentation of calculations results 142 .
Toolbar Results
Displays the general calculations results table 415 .

Displays the calculations results as pictures window 378 .
Displays the water sources calculations results table 426 .
Displays the heat sources calculations results table 417 .
Displays the pipes calculations results table 419 .
Displays the receivers and equipment calculations results table 422 .
Displays the accessories calculations results table 409 .
Displays the initial presets calculations results table 421 .
Displays the rooms calculations results table 425 .
Displays the individual systems branches calculations results table 411 .
Displays the hot water circulation circuits calculations results table 413 .
Displays the list of errors 373 detected while calculating.
Displays the dialogue Results - Labels format 353 for determining the layout of labels
describing the picture elements with the calculations results.
term Toolbar 454
261 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
7.10.5 Toolbar Graphics edition

This toolbar contains commands connected with the edition of graphic elements in pictures.
Toolbar Graphics edition
Groups highlighted picture's elements. This action has been described in detail in the point
Other graphic elements drawing 72 .
Ungroups highlighted elements.
Picture layers format 232 .
Moves highlighted graphic elements onto another layer 444 .
Cuts the broken line or curve in the cursor selected point.
Glues together fragments of broken lines or curves.
Creates mirror reflection of highlighted elements to the left.
Creates mirror reflection of highlighted elements to the right.
Creates mirror reflection of highlighted elements upwards.
Creates mirror reflection of highlighted elements downwards.
term Toolbar 454
7.10.6 Customizing toolbars

As in other programs, it is possible to modify the toolbar location with the mouse.
Toolbar visibility can be determined in menu View 206 Toolbars 212 , by marking it with .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 262

Audytor H2O 1.5
Menu View 206 Toolbars 212 pulled down
In the program Audytor H2O, users can freely customize toolbars according to their preferences.
To do so, select the command View 206 Toolbars 212 Customize... and you will obtain the
dialogue Customize toolbars 292 .
Toolbars;
Commands;
Pop-up menu;
Options.
Tab Toolbars
263 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
Toolbars - list
unavailable.
Tab Commands
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 264

Audytor H2O 1.5
Categories - list
Command description
Shortcut
Tab Pop-up menu
265 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
Tab Options
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 266

Audytor H2O 1.5
fast customizing.
cursor.
267 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

7 Menu structure
term Toolbar 454
7.11 Pop-up menu

Except of the menu toolbar in the program main window 448 , you can also use the series of pop-up
menus 447 . They are ascribed to tables, picture views, and even individual dialogue elements, and
include commands characteristic for those elements they are ascribed to. Pop-up menus are
displayed, when the right mouse key is clicked over the desired element.
The majority of menu commands also have keyboard shortcuts ascribed, to facilitate their
execution.
Exemplary pop-up menu
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 268

Audytor H2O 1.5
No detailed description of pop-up menu commands has been included in this manual.
To obtain the detailed information on individual pop-up menu commands, in the pulled down
menu approach the desired command with the mouse (do not click), and press help
button. This action will display the help system 439 window with the info you need. Also, short
characteristics of individual commands is displayed in the program status bar 452 .
269 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

Chapter
8
Example
Audytor H2O 1.5
8 Example
In this chapter, one example of designing the system has been described.
It is to be found in the file 436 Example 1.h2d, in folder 437 c:\Audytor4\data:
Example 1 – a multi-family dwelling building system, with central hot water preparation.
Below, the exemplary data entering has been presented, together with calculations performance for
the water system with central hot water preparation.
8.1 Project starting data

Basic data for the project being described has been presented below:
– a multi-family dwelling building system;
– cold water temperature: Tcw = 5°C;
– hot water temperature: Thw = 55°C;
– hot water- and circulation pipes insulated;
– central hot water preparation with the water accumulator;
– pump circulation system with thermostatic valves;
– maximum water hot water pipes cooling on the way from the heat source to the circulation
pipes connection point: 5 K;
– maximum Xp deviation for thermostatic valves: 5K;
– system equipped with apartment watermeters 456 ;
– branched system (T-joint).
8.2 Entering data

Entering data is to be started with creating a new data file, by selecting the command New data 179
from menu File 178 .
The next step is entering general data on the entire system under design, and calculations
parameters. To do so, select the command General 226 from menu Data 225 , and in the displayed
dialogue enter relevant information.
271 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

8 Example
Dialogue Data - General with basic data on the system under design
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 272

Audytor H2O 1.5
Dialogue Data - General with entered calculations parameters
Entering general data and calculations parameters have been described in detail in the point
General data 22 .
If for the given building the heat load has been calculated with the program Audytor HL 447 , then now
you can import the room data, by selecting the command Rooms 226 from menu Data 225 . This will
display the dialogue Data - Rooms 308 .
273 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

8 Example
Here, click the button Open new file, to select the Audytor HL program calculation results file.
Room data can naturally also be entered in the displayed dialogue, or while drawing the installation
diagram. As the system being described is repeatable on the subsequent storeys, in this case it is
optimal to enter room data directly into the picture. Then the functions for copying 71 picture's
fragments and data onto the next storey can be applied.
Entering data on rooms has been described in detail in point Room data 29 .
The following step is drawing the installation diagram and entering additional data on individual
system components. Detailed description of subsequent stages of this process has been included
in point Installation diagram drawing and entering data on system components 32 .
Optimally, start drawing from the floors. To do so, select the tab Construction 132 in the
drawing functions toolbar 434 .
Tab Construction
The newly created floor system has been presented in the picture below.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 274

Audytor H2O 1.5
The floor system
As a default, after entering the floor system into the picture, the reference ordinate 449 (+0.00) is
positioned on the lowest floor (cellar's floor). Here, it has been moved onto the ground floor.
+ 0,00
The re fe re nce ordinate

m ove d one floor up.
Us ual ordinate adjusts its value

to the re fe re nce ordinate.
- 2,60
Reference ordinate on the ground floor
At this stage, we are starting to draw the typical bathroom and kitchen. This process can be
commenced with drawing sanitary equipment and receivers (see Receivers- and equipment
drawing 39 ).
Drawing equipment will be presented on the example of a washbasin.
To draw a washbasin
1 Select the tab Receivers and equipment in the drawing functions toolbar 434 .
2 Click and hold the pull-down button 448 Washbasins .
3 Select command Edit from the pull-down list. This will open the dialogue Receivers- and
275 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

8 Example
equipment set.
4 From the list Available receivers and equipment copy the based washbasin WASHBASIN
BASE onto the list Selected receivers and equipment, and click the OK button. If no plan
views are planned for drawing, you can select the washbasin without any specific dimensions.
5 Again click and hold the button Washbasins . Select the based washbasin form the pull-
down list.
Selecting the washbasin from the pull-down list
6 Move the mouse cursor 440 onto the installation diagram. You will observe the shape of the
selected component being moved together with the cursor.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 276

Audytor H2O 1.5
7 Select the location for the component and click the mouse button. This will insert the
washbasin, as presented in the picture below.
+ 0,00
Based washbasin
Now, analogically, you can draw the water faucet. Note that it is enough to approach the faucet to
the washbasin, and the program will automatically recognize the washbasin-faucet connection
point. This enables obtaining a very precise drawing with very little effort.
+ 0,00
Washbasin with the faucet
In a similar way, you can draw all necessary receivers, sanitary equipment and draw-off points.
While drawing the diagram, it is recommended to leave empty space between individual receivers
and equipment. this will make the picture legible, and ready to place labels 452 for individual
components.
The following step is drawing the pipes system (see Pipes drawing and linking 47 ).
+ 0.00
Installation diagram after drawing the pipes system
Vertical dimensions are maintained in the installation diagram, so the program can recognize them
from the picture, and there is no need to enter them manually. However, the horizontal dimensions
are usually not maintained, and you should enter them into the relevant table. The lengths entered
by designers are shown in black color, the ones recognized by the program from the picture - in
green, and >in angle brackets<. Below you will find the picture of the table for entering pipe data.
277 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

8 Example
Ve rtical pipe.
Le ngth read autom atically from the draw ing.
Horizontal pipe.
Le ngth entered by the des igner.
Pipe data table
In case when with drawing the horizontal pipes you omit entering their length, while calculating, the
program will assume this data basing on the picture. When calculations have been completed, you
will find relevant warning messages in the error list 162 . The program will not warn, though, about
the omitting of those horizontal pipes whose length, as recognized from the picture, does not
exceed 25 cm (it assumes that they have been drawn maintaining the horizontal scale).
After drawing pipes, enter accessories and labels. Symbol "Cal." on pipe labels means that their
dimensions will be selected by the program.
Then enter the room zone 450 onto the diagram, and the program will be able to ascribe individual
system components to their rooms. See Drawing room zones 63 .
1
L ›0,25‹ m
24 °C
DN Cal.
Bathroom
DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal.
L ›0,20‹ m
DN Cal.
L 1,00 m
L 0,44 m
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
L 1,00 m L 1,00 m L 1,20 m

L 1,00 m L 1,00 m L 2,70 m
DN Cal.
L ›0,45‹ m
+ 0,00
DN Cal.
L ›0,25‹ m
Bathroom system scheme
Room symbol and description, together with the calculation internal room temperature are to be
entered into the table Data - Rooms 391 .
Room data table
After completing the bathroom system, continue with the kitchen, and proceed with leading pipes to
the riser, together with cut-off valves and watermeters 456 .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 278

Audytor H2O 1.5
DN Cal.
1 2
L ›3,20‹ m
L ›0,25‹ m
24 °C
DN Cal.
20 °C
DN Cal.
VW WATERMET *.* C
VW WATERMET *.* Z
Bathroom L ›3,00‹ m Kitchen
DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal.
L ›0,20‹ m
L ›0,25‹ m
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
L 1,00 m
L 0,50 m
L 1,50 m
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
L 1,00 m L 1,00 m L 1,20 m L 1,30 m
DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal.
L 0,60 m
DN Cal.
L 1,00 m L 1,00 m L 2,70 m L 2,62 m
DN Cal.
L ›0,45‹ m
+ 0,00
DN Cal.
L 0,60 m
DN Cal.
L ›0,25‹ m
Repeatable storey
In the picture below, you will find the focus on the repeatable riser's fragment (without the
circulation pipe yet). Two asterisks in the watermeter symbol mean the type-set where the relevant
appliance will be selected from.
VW WATERMET *.* C
VW WATERMET *.* Z
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
Repeatable storey's fragment
As this exemplary system is to a large extent repeatable, the schemes for subsequent rooms can
be obtained by copying commands. This has been described in detail in point Copying picture
fragments 71 .
To copy the diagram's fragment
1 Highlight the picture's fragment to be copied.
2 Select the tab Copying and blocks .
3 Click the tool Copy right .
279 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

8 Example
DN Cal. DN Cal.
1 L ›3,20‹ m
2 3 L ›3,20‹ m
4
L ›0,25‹ m
L ›0,25‹ m
24 °C
DN Cal.
20 °C 24 °C
DN Cal.
DN Cal. DN Cal.
20 °C
VW WATERMET *.* C
VW WATERMET *.* C
VW WATERMET *.* Z
VW WATERMET *.* Z
Bathroom L ›3,00‹ m Kitchen Bathroom L ›3,00‹ m WC
DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal.
L ›0,20‹ m
L ›0,25‹ m
L ›0,20‹ m
L ›0,25‹ m
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
L 1,00 m
L 0,50 m
L 1,50 m
L 1,00 m
L 0,50 m
L 1,50 m
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
L 1,00 m L 1,00 m L 1,20 m L 1,30 m L 1,00 m L 1,00 m L 1,20 m L 1,30 m
DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal.
L 0,60 m
L 0,60 m
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
L 1,00 m L 1,00 m L 2,70 m L 2,62 m L 1,00 m L 1,00 m L 2,70 m L 2,62 m
DN Cal. DN Cal.
L ›0,45‹ m L ›0,45‹ m
+ 0,00
DN Cal. DN Cal.
L 0,60 m L 0,60 m
DN Cal. DN Cal.
L ›0,25‹ m L ›0,25‹ m
Ground floor system's fragment after performing the command Copy right
The copying functions will renumber rooms and pipe-runs (if they have been numbered in the first
place). Here, the new rooms have been numbered as 3 and 4.
As separate toilets have been created in the second riser, the system scheme is to be relevantly
modified.
Added toilet
DN Cal. 4 DN Cal.
1 L ›3,20‹ m
2 3 5
L ›3,20‹ m
L ›0,25‹ m
24 °C 20 °C
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
20 °C 24 °C DN Cal.
20 °C
WC
VW WATERMET *.* C
VW WATERMET *.* C
VW WATERMET *.* Z
VW WATERMET *.* Z
Bathroom L ›3,00‹ m Kitchen Bathroom L ›3,00‹ m Kitchen
DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal.
L ›0,20‹ m
L ›0,25‹ m
L ›0,20‹ m
L ›0,25‹ m
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
L ›0,25‹ m
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
L 1,00 m
L 0,50 m
L 1,50 m
L 1,50 m
L 1,00 m
L 1,00 m
L 1,50 m
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
L 1,00 m L 1,00 m L 1,20 m L 1,30 m L 1,00 m L 1,20 m L 1,30 m
DN Cal.
L 1,00 m
DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal.
L 0,60 m
L 0,60 m
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
L 1,00 m L 1,00 m L 2,70 m L 2,62 m L 2,70 m
DN Cal.
L ›0,45‹ m
+ 0,00
DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal.

L 1,00 m L 1,00 m L 2,70 m L 2,00 m L 0,60 m L 2,62 m
DN Cal.
L 0,60 m
DN Cal.
L ›0,25‹ m
Ground floor system's fragment after adding the toilet
The third riser can be created with the command Mirror reflection right
DN Cal. 4 DN Cal. DN Cal. 4

1 2 3 5 5 3
L ›3,20‹ m L ›3,20‹ m L ›3,20‹ m
L ›0,25‹ m
24 °C 20 °C 20 °C
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
20 °C 24 °C DN Cal.
20 °C 20 °C DN Cal.
24 °C
WC WC
VW WATERMET *.* C
VW WATERMET *.* C
VW WATERMET *.* C
VW WATERMET *.* Z
VW WATERMET *.* Z
VW WATERMET *.* Z
Bathroom L ›3,00‹ m Kitchen Bathroom L ›3,00‹ m Kitchen Kitchen L ›3,00‹ m Bathroom

DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal.
L ›0,20‹ m
L ›0,25‹ m
L ›0,20‹ m
L ›0,25‹ m
L ›0,25‹ m
L ›0,20‹ m
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal. DN Cal.
L ›0,25‹ m
L ›0,25‹ m
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
L 1,00 m
L 0,50 m
L 1,50 m
L 1,50 m
L 1,00 m
L 1,00 m
L 1,50 m
L 1,50 m
L 1,00 m
L 1,00 m
L 1,50 m
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
L 1,00 m L 1,00 m L 1,20 m L 1,30 m L 1,00 m L 1,20 m L 1,30 m L 1,30 m L 1,20 m L 1,00 m
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
L 1,00 m L 1,00 m
L 0,60 m
L 0,60 m
L 0,60 m
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
L 1,00 m L 1,00 m L 2,70 m L 2,62 m L 2,70 m L 2,70 m

DN Cal.
L ›0,45‹ m
+ 0,00
DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal.
L 1,00 m L 1,00 m L 2,70 m L 2,00 m L 0,60 m L 2,62 m L 2,62 m L 0,60 m L 2,00 m L 2,70 m L 1,00 m L 1,00 m
DN Cal.
L 0,60 m
DN Cal.
L ›0,25‹ m
Ground floor system's fragment after performing the command Mirror reflection right
WARNING!!!
Copying commands will renumber picture's elements automatically, but the mirror
reflection commands will not renumber the elements! You will need to number them
manually.
In this example, in the last riser, the room numbers should be changed into 6, 7 and 8.
To draw the subsequent storeys, the tool Next storey will be used.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 280

Audytor H2O 1.5
101 L ›3,20‹ m
102 103 105 108 106
L ›3,20‹ m L ›3,20‹ m
L ›0,25‹ m
24 °C 20 °C 20 °C
DN Cal.
20 °C 24 °C 20 °C 20 °C 24 °C
WC WC
VW WATERMET *.* C
VW WATERMET *.* C
VW WATERMET *.* C
VW WATERMET *.* Z
VW WATERMET *.* Z
VW WATERMET *.* Z
L ›0,20‹ m
L ›0,25‹ m
L ›0,20‹ m
L ›0,25‹ m
L ›0,25‹ m
L ›0,20‹ m
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal. DN Cal.
L ›0,25‹ m
L ›0,25‹ m
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
L 1,00 m
L 0,50 m
L 1,50 m
L 1,50 m
L 1,00 m
L 1,00 m
L 1,50 m
L 1,50 m
L 1,00 m
L 1,00 m
L 1,50 m
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
L 1,00 m L 1,00 m
L 0,60 m
L 0,60 m
L 0,60 m
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
L 1,00 m L 1,00 m L 2,70 m L 2,62 m L 2,70 m L 2,70 m
DN Cal.
L ›0,45‹ m
+ 3,00
DN Cal.
1 L 0,60 m 2 3 5 8 6
L ›3,00‹ m L ›3,00‹ m L ›3,00‹ m
L ›0,25‹ m
DN Cal.
24 °C 20 °C 20 °C
DN Cal.
20 °C 24 °C 20 °C 20 °C 24 °C
L ›0,25‹ m DN Cal. DN Cal. DN Cal.
WC WC
VW WATERMET *.* C
VW WATERMET *.* C
VW WATERMET *.* C
VW WATERMET *.* Z
VW WATERMET *.* Z
VW WATERMET *.* Z
L ›0,20‹ m
L ›0,25‹ m
L ›0,20‹ m
L ›0,25‹ m
L ›0,25‹ m
L ›0,20‹ m
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal. DN Cal.
L ›0,25‹ m
L ›0,25‹ m
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
L 1,00 m
L 0,50 m
L 1,50 m
L 1,50 m
L 1,00 m
L 1,00 m
L 1,50 m
L 1,50 m
L 1,00 m
L 1,00 m
L 1,50 m
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
L 1,00 m L 1,00 m
L 0,60 m
L 0,60 m
L 0,60 m
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
L 1,00 m L 1,00 m L 2,70 m L 2,62 m L 2,70 m L 2,70 m
DN Cal.
L ›0,45‹ m
+ 0,00
DN Cal.
L 0,60 m
DN Cal.
L ›0,25‹ m
System's fragment after performing the command Next storey
Next storey rooms have been numbered as 101, 102, etc. Installation diagram component numbers
on subsequent storeys can be increased with 100 or 1000. This can be determined with the
command Parameters 247 from the program's main menu.
By re-applying the command Next storey, you can create following storeys. The picture obtained
in such a way needs to be relevantly modified, though. Among others, you will need to remove
unnecessary last storey pipes.
DN Cal.
L ›3,20‹ m
DN Cal. Re m ove
L ›3,00‹ m
thes e
pipes .
VW WATERMET *.* C
VW WATERMET *.* Z
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
L 0,60 m
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
L 0,60 m
Removing unnecessary last storey pipes
Then, complete the picture with lacking components such as circulation pipes, automatic de-airing
valves, thermostatic valves, cellar pipes, water source, heat source, main watermeter, anti-
contamination valve, etc.
VW WATERMET *.* C
VW WATERMET *.* Z
DN Cal.
DN Cal.
L 0,60 m
DN Cal.
Circulation
pipe
DN Cal.
L 0,60 m
Riser's top with added circulation pipe
Also remember to add horizontal distributing pipes lengths, and draw room zones including cellars.
It is important to draw additional bends and elbows which are not visible in the diagram.
281 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

8 Example
be nds and elbow s

w hich are not visible
He at accum ulator
in the diagram
DN Cal. DN Cal.
DN Cal.
L ›1,35‹ m L 1,00 m
L ›0,50‹ m
DN Cal.
L ›1,55‹ m BA
F76F
DN Cal. DN Cal.
L 0,50 m
BA 294 WATERMET MZ**
DN Cal. DN Cal.
Installation diagram's fragment with added distributing pipes, heat accumulator, additional appliances and invisible
bends
WARNING!!!
Invisible bends are not printed as default. Still, if you need them to be included in
printouts, change the parameter "printing" of the layer "Fittings". This has been
described in detail in point Deciding on pictures layout 78 .
Additionally, complete the picture with layout elements such as the table and frame, which can be
created with the tools from the Graphics tab. Drawing graphic elements has been described
in detail in point Other graphic elements drawing 72 .
8.3 Calculations and removing errors

When installation diagram drawing has been completed, attempt to perform calculations. To do so,
select from the main menu the command Calculations 234 , or press button. If all data has been
correctly entered, the program will perform full calculations.
Frequently however, with the first approach, full calculations will not be completed, as no full
system info has been properly entered. In this case, you will find the info on lacking or incorrectly
entered data in the error list 435 .
Exemplary error list with messages informing on the incorrectly entered data
Correct all errors and re-perform calculations. To facilitate error location, double-click the relevant
message in the list. The program will automatically display the fragment of the diagram and open
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 282

Audytor H2O 1.5
the necessary table highlighting the probable field to be changed or completed.
Calculation process has been described in detail in the chapter Calculations 138 .
8.4 Calculations results

Calculations results can be viewed both in the table- and graphic form: as the installation diagram
and storey plan views, with the commands from menu Results 234 . Both the table- and pictures
layout can be freely modified. The contents of all tables can be printed (command Print 191 in
menu File 178 ), and pictures of the system can be also plotted (command Plot 196 in menu File 178
).
Detailed info on results has been presented in the chapter Calculations results 142 . Below you will
find the exemplary table with calculations results for pipes, and the diagram's fragment with
Exemplary table with calculations results for pipes
283 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

8 Example
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 284

Chapter
9
Annexes
9 Annexes
9 Annexes
To the manual the following annexes have been attached:
Dialogues 286 This annex includes the description of all dialogues 433 in the program.
Windows 371 This annex includes the description of all windows in the program.
Tables 379 This annex includes the description of all tables in the program.
Definitions and terms 428 This annex includes the description of all definitions and termsin the
program user's manual.
9.1 Dialogues
This annex includes the description of all dialogues 433 in the program.
9.1.1 Accessories catalogue

This dialogue will select the catalogue symbol for the accessories 428 in the system. It can also be
used for viewing the catalogue data base on accessories.
Dialogue Accessories catalogue
Individual dialogue fields have been described in detail below:
Accessories symbols - list
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 286

Audytor H2O 1.5
The list of accessories catalogue symbols, to select the appropriate one from with a mouse or
keyboard.

Here you will find the description of the accessories catalogue symbol currently being highlighted in
the list Symbols.

This field includes the producer symbol for the given accessories type. Button Info will cal the
dialogue with the accessories producer- or dealer info.

The list of producers symbols, to select the appropriate one from with a mouse or keyboard. This
action will limit the accessories symbols list only to those which have been manufactured by the
given producer.

The list of appliances types (here accessories types), to select the appropriate one from with a
mouse or keyboard. This action will limit the accessories symbols list only to those of the relevant
type.
Parameters - button
This button will switch the dialogue into the mode of displaying detailed parameters of the
components highlighted in the list Accessories symbols.
Select - button
This button will select the accessories of the catalogue symbol highlighted in the list Symbols.
9.1.2 Accessories set

This dialogue will select the accessories set ascribed to one of the pull-down buttons 448 in the
drawing functions toolbar 126 (tab Accessories ).
Individual dialogue elements have been described in detail below:
Available accessories - list
Catalogue symbols list, to select the required accessories symbol from with a mouse or keyboard.
In this field you will find displayed the description of the element currently highlighted in the list.
This field contains the producer symbol for the currently highlighted component. Button Info will
call the dialogue with the info on the producer or dealer.
287 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Selected accessories - list
Catalogue symbols list selected for the set.
Producers symbols list, to select the required symbol from with a mouse or keyboard. The choice
of the specific producer will narrow the components symbols list only to those supplied by the
selected producer.
Appliances types list, to select the required accessories symbol from with a mouse or keyboard.
The choice of the specific type will narrow the list.
Clipboard - button
This button will copy previously selected accessories to the selected components list.
Delete - button
The button will remove highlighted symbols from the selected accessories list.
Parameters - button
The button will display the dialogue with detailed parameters of the currently being highlighted
component.
See also: Using pull-down buttons 44 , Drawing functions toolbar 126
menu Data 225 , command Catalogues 230
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 288

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.1.3 Block creation

This dialogue will select the category to ascribe the block 437 currently being created. It is
accessible with the command Create block 206 in menu Edit 198 .
Dialogue Block creation
In the list select the appropriate category.
See also: Own blocks creation 68
menu Edit 198 , command Create block 206
9.1.4 Blocks
This dialogue will determine the block 437 to be entered into the picture, it will also save blocks as
files, open blocks from files and move blocks between groups. It is accessible with the buttons
Blocks set 1..10 in the drawing functions toolbar 434 (tab Copying and blocks 134 ).
289 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Dialogue Blocks
9.1.5 Calculations
This dialogue will inform about calculations proceedings.
Dialogue Calculations
Here you will find displayed the current calculation stage and estimated advancement. Button
will abort calculations.
See also: Calculations 138
9.1.6 Catalogue data - receivers- and equipment set

This dialogue will select receivers 449 or equipment 435 , and ascribe them to the pull-down button 448
.
To call the dialogue
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 290

Audytor H2O 1.5
1 Move the mouse cursor over the pull-down button next to the table edition field.
2 Press and hold the left mouse key until the list pulls down.
3 Select Edit command from the list.
Available receivers and equipment - list
Catalogue symbols list, where you can select the appropriate receiver- or equipment symbol, using
the keyboard or mouse.
This field displays description of the item currently highlighted in the list.

The field contains the producer symbol for the currently highlighted item. The button Info calls
the dialogue with the info on the producer or dealer.
Selected receivers and equipment - list
Catalogue symbols list for items selected for the set.
291 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Producers symbols list, where you can select the appropriate symbol using the keyboard or
mouse. The choice of the specific producer will narrow the items symbols list resulting in those
only which are manufactured by the selected producer.
Appliances types list, where you can select the appropriate washbasin type (eg. based washbasin,
double washbasin). The choice of the specific type will narrow the list.
Washbasin types
Copy - button
This button will copy the chosen washbasin (or washbasins) into the selected receivers and
equipment list.
Delete - button
This button will remove the chosen items from the selected receivers and equipment list.
Overview - button
This button will display the dialogue with the detailed characteristics of the currently highlighted
item.
See also: Using pull-down buttons 44 , Pull-down button 448
9.1.7 Customize toolbars

This dialogue will customize the layout of toolbars and menus. You can use it to create new
toolbars, add frequently executed commands to the existing toolbars, etc.
Toolbars;
Commands;
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 292

Audytor H2O 1.5
Pop-up menu;
Options.
Tab Toolbars
Toolbars - list
unavailable.
293 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Tab Commands
Categories - list
Command description
Shortcut
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 294

Audytor H2O 1.5
Tab Pop-up menu
Tab Options
295 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
fast customizing.
cursor.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 296

Audytor H2O 1.5
See also: commands: Customize toolbars 207 , Toolbars 212
9.1.8 Data - General

This dialogue will enter design data for the entire system, and calculations parameters 429 . It is
accessible with the command General 226 in menu Data 225 .
There are following tabs in the dialogue:
Data entering general data on the whole project,
Calculation parameters
parameters of computations for the system.
Help info is available on all dialogue cells (button ).
Dialogue tabs have been described below:
Tab Data
Use it to enter data on the whole project.
297 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Dialogue Data - General tab Data
General info on the project
This part of the dialogue is used for entering basic data on the project.
Project name: Short description of the project.
Project location: Where the building with the system under design is located.
Designer: Info on designer.
Tcw [°C] Calculation cold water temperature.
Thw [°C] Calculation hot water temperature.
Thw mix [°C] Calculation hot water temperature beyond the mixing valves, for hot
domestic water.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 298

Audytor H2O 1.5
System pipe types - table
Table General data - Pipes 396 is to be found in the middle part of the dialogue, it is used to select
pipes for the system under design. Detailed info on how to enter table data can be found in the
point Entering table data 105 .
Pipe symbols
System diameters - table
Bottom part of the dialogue holds the table General data - Diameters 395 with detailed info on
available pipe diameters for the pipe selected in the table General data - Pipes (see above).
system pipes.
Rmax [Pa/m]
VmaxCir [m/s]
299 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
RmaxCir [Pa/m]
WARNING!!!
Tab Calculation parameters
This tab is meant for estimating calculation parameters for the system design. By doing that, it is
possible to influence to some extent the computation process. When creating new data, the
program assumes default values of the calculation parameters.
Dialogue Data - General tab Calculations parameters
Hot water and circulation - group
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 300

Audytor H2O 1.5
Estimate calculation flows beyond the heater after DIN - selection field
When selected, this option has the following consequences: when selecting the hot water pipes
beyond the heaters, calculation flows resulting from the sum of standard outflows from the
receivers 449 are not used for calculations, but the maximum standard outflow among the
receivers, supplied from this heater.
Estimate circulation water flux according to the thermal method - selection field
When selected, this option has the following consequences: selection of water flux in the state of
circulation (no hot water draw) is done in the way that each hot water pipes - circulation pipes
connection point (these points should be located possibly close to the farthest receivers, eg. at
the ends of the risers or branches) should be reached by the water of the same temperature,
lower than heat source temperature eg. by 5 K. Default status of this option is on.
Maximum hot water cooling [K] - edition field

Maximum hot water cooling in hot water pipes on the way between the heat source and the
circulation pipes - hot water pipes in the circulation state connection point (no hot water draw).
This quantity is used in calculations of the circulation water flux according to the thermal
method. The program selects water flux in the circulation state so that the temperature in
circulation pipes - hot water pipes connection points is lower than the hot water temperature in
the source by the exact assumed value.
It is recommended to assume cooling value of 5K.
Maximum hot water exchange number [1/h]

Maximum hot water exchange number in circulation circuits, above which the program provides
info on too large water amount in the circulation circuits. The advised value is 4 exch./h.
When estimating the number of exchanges, the program considers the capacity of hot water
pipes within the circulation zone, and the circulation pipes. The value of this field is only used for
error diagnosis, and by no means influences the selection of circulation water fluxes.
3 liters criterion check method

Following current regulations, in case when the circulation system occurs within the hot water
system then the hot water pipes capacity out of the circulation zone should not exceed the
volume of 3 liters. The regulations however do not state clearly whether the value of 3 liters
refers to all pipes in the branch or only the pipes supplying the hot water to the farthest receiver.
Hence, the program enables selecting optionally the variant of pipe capacity calculations.
Two variants of 3-liter criterion check are available:
The variants of 3 liters criterion check

Sum up all branch pipes.
In this variant, the program adds up the capacity of all pipes in the branch out of the
circulation zone.
Sum up pipes up to the farthest receiver.

In this variant, the program adds up the capacity of pipes leading up to the farthest receiver in
the branch out of the circulation zone.
Bold lines in the pictures below highlight hot water pipes considered when calculating capacities
in individual variants.
301 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Sum up all branch pipe s.
+ 0,00
Sum up pipes up to the farthe st receive r.
Pipes taken into account in the variants of 3 liters criterion check
Pipes - group
Do not select diameters for pipes withdrawn from production - selection field
Highlighting this field will mean that the program will not select the diameters for the pipes no
longer produced.
Do not select diameters for pipes available on special order only - selection field
Highlighting this field will mean that the program will not select the diameters for the pipes
Do not select diameters for pipes not recommended by the producer - selection field
Highlighting this field will mean that the program will not select the diameters for the pipes which
Pipe insulation - group
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 302

Audytor H2O 1.5
Do not select insulation for pipes withdrawn from production - selection field
Highlighting this field will mean that the program will not select the insulation for the pipes no
longer produced.
Do not select insulation for pipes available on special order only - selection field
Highlighting this field will mean that the program will not select the insulation for the pipes
Do not select insulation for pipes not recommended by the producer - selection field
Highlighting this field will mean that the program will not select the insulation for the pipes which
Accessories - group
Do not select accessories withdrawn from production - selection field

Highlighting this field will mean that the program will not select the accessories no longer
produced.
Do not select accessories available on special order only - selection field

Highlighting this field will mean that the program will not select the accessories available on
special orders.
Do not select accessories presets not recommended by the producer - selection field
Highlighting this field will mean that the program will not select the accessories presets which
Maximum Xp deviation for thermostatic valves [K] - edition field

Maximum governing deviation Xp 457 used when selecting thermostatic valves on the circulation
pipes. In case of some thermostatic valves (without the additional initial preset), the appropriate
value of the kv flow coefficient of the valve, necessary for the correct regulation of the circulation
system, is obtained by selecting the valve for the assumed deviation Xp.
The advised value is Xp = 5K. Larger deviations can be assumed only in case of the exceeding
thermostatic resistance by the deviation Xp = 5K.
The number of hydrants considered in the calculations - edition field

Estimates the number of the fire hydrants considered in the calculations of individual cold water
branches. If for instance in the system branch (riser) there are 8 hydrants, and value 2 has been
entered into this field, then - when selecting the diameters - two simultaneously active most
distant hydrants will be considered. In case of the lack of the fire hydrants in the system, it is
recommended to enter value 1 in this field, and refrain from drawing any hydrants.
Detect overlapping pipes - selection field

Selecting this option will cause detection of overlapping pipes while checking the correctness of
the system picture. This option will considerable prolong the drawing check process!
Create full fittings list - selection field

Selecting this option will cause that while calculating the program will create the full fittings list
(joints, T-joints, etc.) necessary for the system construction.
This function is only available in the selected versions of the program. Fittings lists are created
only for the selected pipe types available in some versions.
WARNING!!!
When lacking expertise in design, it is not recommended to alter the default calculation
303 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
parameters. Incorrect values can lead to obtaining improper results of calculations.
See also: Entering data 21 , General data 22
menu Data 225 General 226
9.1.9 Data - Labels format

This dialogue will establish the layout of the system components labels 452 in calculations data
pictures.
Label type
se lection tabs
Preview of the
edited label
Label
styles
list
De scription of the
Available
elem ents
list
Buttons for
Ite m line
param e te rs
Label styles - list
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 304

Audytor H2O 1.5

Preview - picture
Item format - group
insulation symbols.
thickness.
305 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
the line.
text's width.
Insert point
Insert m ode cursor

into previe w panel

© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 306

Audytor H2O 1.5
You can analogically establish label layouts for the calculations results pictures.
See also: Entering data 21 , Deciding on pictures layout 78
menu Data 225 Component label format 233
menu Results 234 Results labels format 247
307 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
9.1.10 Data - Rooms

This dialogue will enter data for rooms with the system components. It is accessible with the
command Rooms 226 in menu Data 225 .
Table
Here enter data on all rooms where the system's components are positioned (pipes, accessories,
receivers and equipment). Each table line contains data on one room only. Help info is available on
every table cell.
The following data is to be entered into individual table columns:
Symbol Room number (symbol).
ti, [°C] Calculation air temperature inside a room.
Zone Symbol of the building zone 429 where the room is positioned. Zones inform about the
room functions. It is therefore possible to execute calculations for the hot- and cold
water supplying system for multi-functional buildings, eg. an apartment- and office
building. Maximum 30 different zones can be defined for one building.
To enter data on room zones, use the dialogue Data - General 297 called with General
226 command from Data 225 menu.
Description
Room description.
Remarks
Place for room remarks.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 308

Audytor H2O 1.5
Calculations results import from the program Audytor HL - group
This group contains info on the imported heat loses calculations results file, and on buttons for
importing and updating the results.
Open new file Selecting this button opens the dialogue Open HL results 318 for choosing
the file with the heat loses calculations results.
Update The button for updating heat loses calculations results imported from the
program Audytor HL. Use it when in the program Audytor HL 447 changes
have been made, and it is necessary to update (reload) heat loses
Heat loses calculations results obtained from the program Audytor HL 447 can be moved directly to
the room data table. To do so, select the button Open new file and, using the displayed dialogue
Open HL results 318 , choose the appropriate heat loses calculations results file.
When designing hot- and cold water systems, the actual heat loses values are not vital, however
room numbering and descriptions, together with info on calculation temperatures will be utilized.
Room data can also be entered while drawing the installation diagram, in the table part of the
See also: Entering data 21 , Room data 29
menu Data 225 Rooms 226

This dialogue will establish drawing properties of the picture active view 442 (grid, mouse snap
precision, ruler, etc.). The dialogue is called with the command Drawing properties 213 in menu
View 206 .
309 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Scale - text field
picture.
marked.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 310

Audytor H2O 1.5

of the picture.
Show vertical ruler

the picture.
Apply to all views

Drawing aid - group

segments.
Linking aid






311 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes


borders.

while being moved.

being moved.



Undo history
Grid points color

Show grid.
Thread cursor

© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 312

Audytor H2O 1.5
Bitmaps painting

mode.



layers 444 .
See also: menu View 206 , commands: Drawing properties 213 , Deciding on pictures layout 78 , Drawing
graphic elements: basics of creating and editing 110 , Installation diagram drawing and entering
data on system components 32 , Drawing storeys plan views 82 , Entering underlays into the
project 89
313 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
9.1.12 Floors systems creation

This dialogue will facilitate Floors- and ordinates drawing 36 .
Dialogue Floor system creation
Floors number How many floors there are in the system.
Floors length How long they are (in meters).
Storey height How high the storey is, measured within the floor axes.
Floor thickness How thick the typical floors are.
Enter ordinates Option field, deciding whether to position floor ordinates or not.
Bottom part table will establish individually how thick the floors- and how high the storeys are.
The columns have the following meaning:
Storey Storey number always counted from the bottom (starting from 1).
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 314

Audytor H2O 1.5
H storey Storey height estimated according to the storey inside diameter.
T floor Floor thickness above the given storey.
When pasting the complete floor system, establish the small picture view scale 445 (eg. 10%), so
that the whole space for the floors to be inserted is available.
You can select the floor system preview scale with the Picture calibrating button 442 .
Highlighting the field Auto calibration will cause the program to select the floor system preview
scale automatically, so that all floors are visible.
You can freely modify each of the floors after you have entered them.
9.1.13 Formatting
This dialogue will determine the elements (usually columns) displayed in the table. It is accessible
with the command View 206 Format table 224 .
Exemplary dialogue for formatting table contents
Here select these table elements which you wish to be displayed.
WARNING!!!
The exact dialogue layout depends on the currently active table.
See also: menu View 206 , commands: Format table 224 , Sort table 224
9.1.14 Heat sources catalogue

This dialogue will select the catalogue symbol for the heat source 439 in the system. It can also be
used for viewing the catalogue data base on heat sources.
Individual elements of this dialogue are analogous as in the dialogue Accessories catalogue 286 .
315 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
9.1.15 Heat sources set

This dialogue will select the heat sources set to be ascribed to one of the pull-down buttons 448 in
the drawing functions toolbar 126 (tab Heat sources ).
Individual elements of this dialogue are analogous as in the dialogue Accessories set 287 .
See also: menu Data 225 , command Catalogues 230
9.1.16 Icon selection

This dialogue will select the icon to signify the command button defined by the user during
customizing toolbars 262 .
Dialogue Icon selection
Individual buttons have the following functions:
Delete Removes the icon added by the user.
Open Adds new BMP 429 -files stored icons.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 316

Audytor H2O 1.5
Select Icon selection.
Cancel Cancels the operation.
Help Calls the help system 439 .
See also: menu View 206 , command Customize toolbars 207
9.1.17 Insulation catalogue

This dialogue will select the catalogue symbol for the insulation in the system. It can also be used
for viewing the catalogue data base on insulation.
9.1.18 Insulation set

This dialogue will select the insulation set for the system.
9.1.19 Open blocks

This dialogue will open block 437 definitions file.
Individual elements of this dialogue are analogous as in the dialogue Open data 317 .
See also: dialogue Blocks 289
9.1.20 Open data

This dialogue will open a calculations data file. It is accessible with the command Open data 179 in
menu File 178 .
Search in - pull-down list
Use the button to open the list with the locations (folder) for the file to be opened.
Buttons

317 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
In the dialogue middle part, you find the list of files 436 and folders 437 from the selected location.
Select the appropriate folder, then mouse-double click it to approve the location. Double-clicking the
file will select it (as will the button Open).
File name
Here enter the file name to be opened, or the filter 436 according to which the program will create
the file 436 list of the current folder 437 .
File type
Buttons
Open Open selected file.

Cancel Cancel opening procedure.
WARNING!!!
See also: Menu structure 177
menu File 178
commands: New data 179 , Open data 179 , Save data 180 , Save data as 181
9.1.21 Open HL results

This dialogue will open the file with the results of the program Audytor HL 447 .
See also: Room data 29
9.1.22 Open icons

This dialogue will open icon 439 files 436 which then can be used for marking command buttons
defined by users while customizing toolbars 262 . The dialogue is called when customizing toolbars,
when it is necessary to select the icon for the new command or tab in the drawing functions
toolbar.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 318

Audytor H2O 1.5
Dialogue Open icons
Folder
In this field, the dialogue top part will select the folder 437 for icon files.
Resolution
Here you will find the resolution of the selected icon in pixels 446 (eg. 16x16).
Preview
Preview of the selected icon.
File list
The list of icon files in the selected folder.
Number of columns
319 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Number of columns in the file list.
Element size
Size of elements in the file list.
Show file name - option field
Marking this field will display file names next to icons.
Show file extension - option field
Marking this field will display extensions 436 next to file names.
Small font - option field
Marking this field will display file names in small font.
This button will open the selected icon.
This button will cancel operation being performed.
This button will call help system 439 .
See also: menu View 206 , command Customize toolbars 207
9.1.23 Open labels

This dialogue will open a system components labels 452 definitions file.
See also: dialogues: Data - Label format 304 , Results - label format 353
9.1.24 Open picture

This dialogue will open the picture from a file 90 .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 320

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.1.25 Picture correction

This dialogue will perform necessary picture correction 100 . Individual dialogue field have been
described in detail below:
Dialogue Picture correction
Commands
This dialogue part will edit the picture correction program.
Toolbar
Here you will find tools for drawing operations.
Button Add command will include new commands in the list (of the picture
correction program 445 ). Command Select - pull-down list.
Button Delete will remove commands from the list (of the picture correction
program).
Button Execute will perform commands (if they have not been executed
automatically).
321 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Button Up will move commands up the list.
Button Down will move commands down the list.
Pull-down button Zoom will determine the desired zoom for the picture sample, so
as to be able to decide, how big the picture's fragment must be to assess the
results of selected commands
properly. See picture calibration button 442 .
Available commands
Available commands
In the picture correction program, the following commands are available:
Negative Modifies picture colors, so as to obtain the "negative" effect.
Black&white (random) Changes the picture's format into the "black&white". Other
colors are simulated with a mosaic made of randomly
scattered points. This technic will give satisfying results for
photographs, however it is not recommended for technical
drawings.
Black&white (raster) Changes the picture's format into the "black&white". Other
colors are simulated with a mosaic made of evenly arranged
points. Effects will resemble journal photographs. This technic
will give satisfying results for photographs, however it is not
recommended for technical drawings.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 322

Audytor H2O 1.5
Black&white (threshold) Changes the picture's format into the "black&white" using the
given threshold criterion. Pixels lighter than threshold value are
classified as white, while darker ones – as black. This technic
is recommended for technical drawings.
Greyscale Changes the picture's format into the "greyscale".
Vertical flip Reflects the picture vertically.
Mirror Reflects the picture horizontally.
Rotation Rotates the picture by the given angle. Rotations by angles

larger than the multitude of 90 degrees may however lose
quality, so it is recommended in the first place to scan the
original properly, so that the correction necessity is reduced to
minimum.
Brightness Modifies brightness. Enter value in range –255 to +255.

Positive values will increase brightness, negative ones –
decrease it. Zero is the neutral value, it will not modify
brightness whatsoever.
Contrast Modifies contrast. Enter value in range 0 To 65000. 100 value

is neutral, it will not modify contrast whatsoever. Value
exceeding 100 will increase contrast, those below 100 –
decrease it.
Enhance Enhances dark areas (eg. in poor quality pictures).
Dilate Dilates dark areas.
Blur Blurs edges.
WARNING !!!
To accept commands Brightness, Contrast, Enhance,

Dilate and Blur, pictures must be "greyscale" or
„color". These commands will not function for
"black&white" pictures.
Hence, it is optimal to scan pictures in "greyscale",

proceed with necessary corrections, and only then
convert the picture into "black&white" format with the
command Black&white (threshold).
Decrease Bpp Decreases bits per pixel ratio, which will also decrease
available color number and memory consumption. (This
command is to be used by advanced users only).
Increase Bpp Increases bits per pixel ratio, which will also increase available
color number and memory consumption. (This command is to
be used by advanced users only).
Resolution Modifies resolution. (This command is to be used by advanced
323 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
users only).
Picture sample
Three versions of the fragment of the picture under correction are displayed to enable on-line
control of the results of executed commands and the final effect. The first one is the original picture
before correction, the second - is the picture after completing all commands up to the current one,
and the last - final effect after performing all commands, including the current one. This solution
shall optimize the picture correction process.
Picture preview – tab
In this tab, you will find the picture under correction. Here you can select the sample picture to
assess results of the commands to be performed.
Parameters – tab
Parameters of all three sample pictures are displayed here, enabling among others control of
memory consumption by the correction process.
9.1.26 Picture layers

This dialogue will edit picture layers.
Table
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 324

Audytor H2O 1.5
WARNING!!!
in the dialogue:
Buttons
WARNING!!!
WARNING!!!
See also: terms: Picture layers 444 , Current layer 432 , Default picture layers 433 , User layers 455
325 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
chapter Other graphic elements drawing 72
9.1.27 Picture levelling, calibrating, cropping

This dialogue will level, calibrate, crop and rotate the picture 94 .
Dialogue Levelling, calibrating, cropping
Toolbar
Here you will find tools for picture edition.
Button Cancel will abort execution of the command (useful with time-consuming
commands).
Button switches on- or off the grid 439 .
Pull-down button Zoom will select the required zoom for the picture's preview.
Tool Zoom+ will enhance (zoom in) the picture currently being watched.
Tool Zoom- will reduce (zoom out) the picture currently being watched.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 326

Audytor H2O 1.5
Tool Zoom – range will select the picture scale, so that the entire picture is visible
in the window.
Tool Zoom – window will highlight the part of the picture to be visible.
After clicking Zoom – dynamic, the user will be able to choose the required
preview scale dynamically, by moving the mouse with the pressed key.
Tool Move picture will move the picture in the window and select the part of the
picture to be visible.
Tool Repaint picture will repaint the picture in the window.
Tool Level will level the picture. Highlight the segment to be leveled, and then use
the button
"Execute command: ...".
Tool Plumb will align the picture horizontally. Highlight the segment to be plumbed,
and then use the button "Execute command: ...".
WARNING !!!
Tools Level and Plumb can prove very useful if no precise picture scan is
possible. However, every rotation by the angle not being a multitude of
90 degrees will decrease the picture's quality. Hence, it is recommended
in the first place to carefully position the original in the scanner, and to
apply the tools above only when definitely necessary.
Tool Calibrate horizontally will change the picture's scale according to its
horizontal dimension. Highlight the horizontal segment of the known length, enter
its length and use the button "Execute command: ...".
Tool Calibrate vertically will change the picture's scale according to its vertical
dimension. Highlight the vertical segment of the known length, enter its length and
use the button "Execute command: ...".
Tool Calibrate DXF or DWG picture will change the scale of DXF or DWG
pictures.
Tool Crop will cut off the unnecessary margins. Highlight the target fragment and
use the button
Tool Mirror vertically will create the vertical mirror reflection.
Tool Mirror horizontally will create the horizontal mirror reflection.
327 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Tool Rotate will rotate the picture by any given angle. Enter the rotation angle and
use the button
WARNING !!!
Every rotation by the angle not being a multitude of 90 degrees will

decrease the picture's quality. Hence, it is recommended in the first place
to carefully position the original in the scanner, and to apply the rotation
only when definitely necessary.
Tool Rotate left will rotate the picture by 90 degrees anticlockwise.
Tool Rotate right will rotate the picture by 90 degrees clockwise.
9.1.28 Picture plot preview

This dialogue will display the plot preview. It is accessible with the command Plot picture from the
picture's pop-up menu 447 .
Dialogue Picture plot preview
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 328

Audytor H2O 1.5
At the dialogue top you will find several buttons for formatting and viewing the plot preview.
See also: menu File 178 , commands: Print format 184 , Print preview 190 , Print 191
9.1.29 Picture properties

This dialogue enables among others checking basic information on the picture and its edition.
Preview window
In this window, you will find the displayed picture.
Buttons
Below the picture's preview window, you will find the following buttons:
Opens the picture from a file 436 .
Scans (or re-scans) the picture.
Saves the picture into a file.
329 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Updates the picture, i.e. re-opens it from a file (useful if the picture
in the file has been modified).
Levels, calibrates and crops 94 the picture.
Corrects 100 the scanned or inserted picture.
Edits individual layer parameters for DXF 435 and DWG 435 format
pictures.
Picture info
In the bottom left dialogue's part, you will find basic info on the picture:
Creation date&time Contains info on when the picture was created (if available).
Picture type Contains info on the picture format 437 .
Opened from file File name of the picture's origin (info unavailable for scanned
pictures).
Paint with filling – option field
Marking this file will make the picture's filling not translucent.
Color representation – pull-down list
Selects the color representation 430 scheme.
Available color representation schemes
Default Picture will be displayed according to the general parameters

selected in the dialogue Drawing properties 309 .
Color Picture will be displayed in color (if applicable).
Greyscale Picture will be displayed in greyscale (colors changed into

shades of grey).
Dark greyscale Picture will be displayed in greyscale, with darker shades of

grey (useful with some printer types).
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 330

Audytor H2O 1.5
Black&white Picture will be displayed in black and white only (in connection
with the selected option Paint with filling – useful with some
printer types).
Monochromatic Picture will be displayed in one color only, to be freely selected

in this field. The backgrounds for the components will not be
painted.
Monochromatic all Picture will be displayed in one color only, to be freely selected
in this field. The backgrounds for the components will be
painted.
Bitmap painting – pull-down list
Selects the bitmap painting 428 scheme.
Available bitmap painting schemes
Default Picture will be displayed according to the general parameters

selected in the dialogue Drawing properties 309 .
Default (fast) Bitmap is painted the fastest, but without any quality
improvement methods.
With thickening Picture components are thickened (useful especially with small
zoom in).
With smoothing Picture components are smoothened. With small zoom in, the
quality is then greatly improved, it is however the slowest
painting method, it will also not significantly influence the
printing quality.
WARNING!!!
Selecting this option will slow down the picture
painting process significantly.
331 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
9.1.30 Picture type selection

This dialogue will select the type of the new picture inserted into the project. It is accessible in the
dialogue Picture list 333 with the button Add.
Dialogue Picture type selection
See also: menu Data 225 , command Edit pictures list 226
9.1.31 Picture units

Pictures in AutoCAD related programs are created in some abstract units, such as eg. meters or
centimeters. That is why when inserting such a picture 90 into the Audytor H2O program, you
should enter units assumed for this picture. You can do it with the dialogue Picture units, which is
displayed while inserting DXF 435 or DWG 435 format pictures into the program.
Dialogue Picture units
Select the appropriate unit from the pull-down list.
To facilitate this operation, the program will display the original dimensions in the picture, for the
highlighted unit.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 332

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.1.32 Pictures list

This dialogue will edit the list of pictures in the project.
list.
See also: Drawing storeys plan views 82 , Installation diagram drawing 32
333 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
9.1.33 Pipes catalogue

This dialogue will select the catalogue symbol for pipes in the system. It can also be used for
viewing the catalogue data base on pipes.
9.1.34 Pipes set

This dialogue will select the pipes set for the system.
9.1.35 Plot
This dialogue will establish parameters of calculations results 142 plotting in form of the installation
diagram. The dialogue is accessible with the command Plot 196 .
Dialogue Plot
Plotter
This field will show the name of the selected plotter or printer, to be changed with the button
.
Plot - group
This group will select the picture to be plotted and determine whether to plot the picture to a file.
Choose the tab Data or Results:
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 334

Audytor H2O 1.5
Data This will plot the picture with data.
Results This will plot the picture with calculations results.
In the pictures with data- or calculations results pull-down list, choose the picture to be plotted.
Plot to file The plotted data will be directed to a file. It is usually done in order to print the
document later from the computer where the program has not been installed,
or use a different plotter or printer from the one used in the time of creating
the document. After selecting OK button, the dialogue Plot to file 338 will be
displayed, where you should enter the name and location of the file to save
the plotout.
Pages range - group
Select the range of pages to be plotted here.
All All pages will be plotted.

Pages Only pages from the given range From: To: will be plotted.
Copies - group
Determine the number and method of plotting the copies here.

Number of copies
How many copies will be plotted.
Sort copies Plot each copy separately.
This button will accept the selected plotting method and close the dialogue.
This button will cancel plotting and close the dialogue.
This button will call the system dialogue 452 for establishing plotter or printer
parameters.
See also: commands: Plot 196 , Plot format 192 , Plot preview 195
335 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
9.1.36 Plot format

This dialogue will establish the format for pictures to be plotted. It is accessible with the command
Plot format 192 (menu File 178 ).
Dialogue Plot format
Plotter - pull-down list
This list will select 440 the plotter or printer for plotting the pictures.
This list will determine paper size fed into the plotter.
This list will determine the paper feeding method for the selected plotter.
Margins - group
Top Estimates the top margin.

Bottom Estimates the bottom margin.
Left Estimates the left margin.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 336

Audytor H2O 1.5
Right Estimates the right margin.
Plot - group
This group will determine the picture plotting parameters (options active only when plotting the
current picture, called with the function Plot picture in the pop-up menu 447 of the window with the
picture):
Entire picture This will plot the complete picture.

Choose the color selection method from the pull-down list:
In color This will plot the picture in color.
In greyscale
This will plot the picture in greyscale.
In dark greyscale
This will plot the picture in darker shades of greyscale only.
Black&white This will plot the picture as black&white (no greyscale).
Show water flow direction

This option makes marking the water flow in pipes on drawing with
results.
Show insulation This option makes marking the insulation on pipes on drawing with
results.
Show critical branches and circuits

This option makes marking critical branches and circuits on drawing with
results.


Picture scale - group
This group will determine the scale of the picture to be plotted. Choose one of the typical picture
scales from the list, or enter own plotting scale in the edition field (Custom scale). Selecting the
option Fill page from the list will calibrate the picture automatically, so that it fits the page optimally.
337 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
List Picture scale
See also: commands: Plot 196 , Plot preview 195 , Plot format 192
9.1.37 Plot to file

This dialogue will establish the file 436 for plotted data. The dialogue will be displayed in case of
marking the field To file in the dialogue Plot 334 .
Individual elements of this dialogue are analogous as in the dialogue Save data 357 .
See also: command File 178 Plot 196 , commands: Plot format 192 , Plot preview 195
9.1.38 Plotting
This dialogue informs on the plotting status.
Dialogue Plotting
The button Cancel plotting will abort the plotting process when necessary.
See also: menu File 178 , commands: Plot format 192 , Plot preview 195 , Plot 196
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 338

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.1.39 Print
This dialogue will establish data printing parameters, calculations results 142 and materials lists 163
in the table form. The dialogue is accessible with the command Print 191 in menu File 178 .
Dialogue Print
Printer
You can see the selected printer name here. Change the printer with the button .
Pages range - group
Select the range of pages to be printed here.
All All pages will be printed.

Pages Only pages from the given range From: To: will be printed.
Copies - group
Determine the number and method of printing the copies here.

Number of copies
How many copies will be printed.
Sort copies Print each copy separately (eg. pages 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3, etc.).
Print - group
This group will determine which pages will be printed and proceeds the pages to the printing
process.
All pages from range All pages from the given range will be printed.
Odd pages All odd pages from the given range will be printed.
Even pages All even pages from the given range will be printed.
339 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Print to file The printing data will be directed into a file, not directly to the
printer. It is usually done in order to print the document later
from the computer where the program has not been installed,
or use a different printer to the one used in the time of creating
the document. After selecting OK button, the dialogue Print to
file 345 will be displayed, where you should enter the name and
location of the file to save the printout.
This button will accept the printing method and close the dialogue.
This button will cancel printing and close the dialogue.
This button will call the system dialogue 452 for establishing printer parameters.
commands: Print format 184 , Print preview 190
9.1.40 Print format

This dialogue will establish the format for printing table calculations results 142 . It is accessible with
the command Print format 184 (menu File 178 ).
You will find the following tabs in the dialogue:
Printouts Choice of tables to be printed, their formatting and sorting.
Page layout Page size, paper feeding, margins and paper orientation selection.
Fonts Choice of font type- and size for printing.
Individual tabs have been described below:
Tab Printouts
Tab for selection, formatting and sorting tables for printing. It consists of two parts:
Calculations results,
Materials list.
Tab Printouts - Calculations results
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 340

Audytor H2O 1.5
Dialogue Print format - tab Printouts/Calculations results
To print calculations results table, select appropriate option fields, described below:
Results General Printing the table with general calculations results 415 .
Water sources Printing the table with calculations results for water sources 426 .
Heat sources Printing the table with calculations results for heat sources 417 .
Pipes Printing the table with calculations results for pipes 419 .
Receivers and equipment

Printing the table with calculations results for receivers and equipment 422 .
Accessories Printing the table with calculations results for accessories 409 .
Rooms Printing the table with calculations results for rooms 425 .
Cold- and hot water branches

Printing the table with calculations results for cold- and hot water
branches 411 .
Circulation circuits Printing the table with calculations results for water circuits 413 .
Presets Printing the table with initial presets for governing accessories 421 .
341 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Error list Printing the error list 435 .
In case of the tables with format table contents, the button Format will be located on the right
hand-side of the option field. This will display the dialogue Format... for table formatting.
Button Sort will sort individual tables. After selecting the button corresponding to the
appropriate table, the dialogue Sort... will be displayed, for table sorting 107 according to the
selected filter 452 .
Tab Printouts - Materials list
Dialogue Print format - tab Printouts/Materials list
To print materials list table, select appropriate option fields, described below:
Water sources overall table Printing the overall table with water sources 409 .
Water sources Printing the table with water sources 408 .
Heat sources overall table Printing the overall table with heat sources 399 .
Heat sources Printing the table with heat sources 399 .
Pipes overall table Printing the overall table with pipes 403 .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 342

Audytor H2O 1.5
Pipes Printing the table with pipes 402 .
Insulation overall table Printing the overall table with insulation 401 .
Insulation Printing the table with insulation 400 .
Receivers and equipment overall table

Printing the overall table with receivers and equipment 407 .
Receivers and equipment Printing the table with receivers and equipment 406 .
Materials - Accessories overall table

Printing the overall table with accessories 397 .
Materials - Accessories Printing the table with accessories 397 .
Materials - Producers overall table

Printing the overall table with producers 405 .
Materials - Producers Printing the table with producers 404 .
Tab Page layout
Dialogue Print format - tab Page layout
This tab described below will determine paper size and orientation, paper source and margin
widths for printing calculations results 142 .
343 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Printer - pull-down list
This list will select 440 the printer for printing calculations results in the table format. Frequently, it is
the Default printer, which means that the printout has been directed to the system default printer.
This list will determine paper size fed into the printer.
This list will determine the paper feeding method for the selected printer.
Margins - group
Top Estimates the distance between the upper page edge and its first line.
Bottom Estimates the distance between the bottom page edge and its last line.
Left Estimates the distance between the left page edge and the beginning of the line.
Right Estimates the distance between the right page edge and the end of the line.
Binding Estimates the distance added to the left margin when printing odd pages, and to
the right one when printing even pages.

Printing options - group
This group will determine printing options.
Table frame width Determines line width for printing table frames.
Print headers Switches on printing page headers.
Print footers Switches on printing page footers.
Print page numbers Switches on printing page numbers. Edition field First page number
will determine the number to start page numbering from.
Tab Fonts
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 344

Audytor H2O 1.5
Dialogue Print format - tab Fonts
This tab described below will determine the font type, style and size for printing:
Font - list
Select 440 the font type here. Only those font types are available in the program which are of the
same width.
Font style - list
This list will determine the style of the fonts to be printed.
Size - list
This list will determine the font size in typographic points.
See also: commands: Print 191 , Print preview 190 , Print format 184
9.1.41 Print to file

This dialogue will establish the file 436 where the printout is to be directed. This dialogue will be
displayed when the field To file in the dialogue Print 339 is marked.
Individual dialogue elements are analogical as in the dialogue Save data 357 .
See also: commands: File 178 Print 191 , Print format 184 , Print preview 190
345 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
9.1.42 Printing
This dialogue informs on the printing status.
Dialogue Printing
The button Cancel printing will abort the printing process when necessary.
commands: Print format 184 , Print preview 190 , Print 191
9.1.43 Producers catalogue

This dialogue will view the data base on the system components producers.
9.1.44 Program parameters

This dialogue will establish program parameters 448 . The dialogue is accessible from the main
menu with the command Parameters 247 . Select the appropriate dialogue tab 434 with a mouse or
keyboard.
In the dialogue you will find following tabs:
Save Determining automatic data saving, program parameters and windows

layout,
Fonts Selection of font types and sizes for calculations results tables,
Numbering Establishing the system for rooms- and pipes numbering on subsequent
storeys, when copying data onto the next storey automatically 125 .
The tabs have been described in detail below:
Tab Save
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 346

Audytor H2O 1.5
Dialogue Program parameters - tab Save
This tab will determine automatic data saving, program parameters and windows layout.
Automatically save when closing - group
This group will establish the data set to be automatically stored onto the disc when closing the
program 197 .
Save data file Automatically saves the current data 432 file.
Save program parameters Automatically saves the program parameters 448 file.
Save window layout Automatically saves the user defined windows layout.
Compress calculation data files Mark this option if you want the calculation data files to
be compressed when being stored. Compressed files
take significantly less disc space, however their
opening and closing might take more time.
Compress calculation results files Mark this option if you want the calculation results files
to be compressed when being stored.
Data file saving options - group
This group will establish the options for saving data file 433 onto the disc.
347 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Create backup copy When storing the data file, the program will create the backup copy
out of the previous data file (extension .~h2d file).
Save data every ... min Automatic current data file saving in established time intervals.
Save data before calculating

Automatic data file saving before calculations are commenced.
DXF&DWG pictures saving options - group
This group will establish the options for saving DXF 435 and DWG 435 pictures.
Switch off unprintable layers

Marking this option will switch off the layers not meant to be printed,
when storing DXF or DWG pictures.
Switch off component fillings layers

Marking this option will switch off the layers meant for filling the
components, when storing DXF or DWG pictures.
Save inserted DXF&DWG pictures

Saving options for inserted DXF and DWG pictures.
If any DXF or DWG format files (eg. underlays) have been inserted
into the picture currently being stored, when saving as DWG or DXF
format, those files are always stored in separate files, with
appropriate references in the main picture.
Three saving options are available for such inserted pictures:
Always ask When saving the inserted picture, the

program will ask whether to overwrite the
previously created picture.
Never ask The program will always overwrite the

previously created picture of the same
name.
Only when newer or no

The program will save the inserted picture
when it is newer form the previously
created, or when no earlier file of the same
name exists.
Tab Fonts
This tab will enable selection of the table font type and style, for data and calculations results, and
the error list 435 .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 348

Audytor H2O 1.5
Dialogue Program parameters - tab Fonts
Font - list
Here select 440 the font type. The program will display only these font types which have the letters of
the same width.
Font style - list
Here select printing font style (italics, bold, underline).
Size - field and list
Here you will select the font size, as expressed in typographic points.
Tab Numbering
This tab will determine room numbering on the subsequent storeys, when copying data onto the
next storey automatically 125 .
Next storey room numbers - group

This option will increase room numbers with 100 when copying data onto
the next storey.
349 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
This option will increase room numbers with 1000 when copying data
onto the next storey.
This renumbering is necessary only when the total number of rooms on

increase room numbers with 100.
Next storey pipe numbers - group

the next storey.
the next storey.
This renumbering is necessary only when the total number of pipes on

increase pipe numbers with 100.
Dialogue Program parameters - tab Numbering
See also: command Parameters 247 , term Calculations parameters 429
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 350

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.1.45 Receivers- and equipment catalogue

This dialogue will select the catalogue symbol for a receiver 449 or equipment 435 in the system. It
can also be used for viewing the catalogue data base on receivers and equipment.
9.1.46 Receivers- and equipment set

This dialogue will select the receivers- and equipment set to be ascribed to one of the pull-down
buttons 448 in the drawing functions toolbar 126 (tab Receivers and equipment ).
9.1.47 Replace
This dialogue will establish table text search- and replace parameters, together with the searching
method- and range. The dialogue is called from menu Edit 198 with the command Replace 203 .
Dialogue Replace
Enter the text to be searched or select 440 it from the previously entered texts. If this function has
been executed in the table column with the appliances catalogue symbols, on the right hand-side
of Search and Replace with you will notice the buttons calling the pop-up list with catalogue
symbols of selected appliances. This will facilitate selecting the appropriate appliance symbol.
button holds the same function.
Replace with - pull-down list
351 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Enter the text to replace with or select it from the previously entered texts.
Search&Replace options - group
This group will establish search and replace details.
Match case Case-sensitive search.
Match whole word

When searching, the program will consider entire words only (text
fragment occurrences are not reported).
Ask before replacing Before replacing, the located text will be highlighted, and the program
will display the replacement confirmation message.
Range - group
Direction - group
Search from - group
Cursor position The text will be searched starting form the current caret position.
Table beginning The text will be searched starting form the table beginning, in case
when no Selected text option has been marked in the Range group.
See also: commands: Replace 203 , Search 201
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 352

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.1.48 Results - Labels format

This dialogue will establish the layout for system components labels 452 in calculations results
pictures.
Label type
se lection tabs
Preview of the
edited label
Label
styles
list
De scription of the
Available
elem ents
list
Buttons for
Ite m line
param e te rs
Label styles - list
353 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Preview - picture
Item format - group
insulation symbols.
thickness.
the line.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 354

Audytor H2O 1.5
text's width.
Insert point
Insert m ode cursor

into previe w panel

355 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
You can identically establish the labels layout in calculations data pictures.
See also: menu Results 234 Results labels format 247 , menu Data 225 Component label format 233
9.1.49 Save as DXF or DWG

This dialogue will save a picture as a DXF 435 or DWG 435 file into the selected disc space, with the
given name. The picture saved in this way can be then opened with any DXF or DWG-format
recognizing program (eg. AutoCAD).
It is accessible in menu File 178 with the command Save as DXF or DWG 182 .
the field Save as file type you can select between DXF 435 and DWG 435 file types, still if the
WARNING!!!
See also: commands: Save data 180 , Save as DXF or DWG 182 , Save as EMF or WMF 183
9.1.50 Save as EMF or WMF

This dialogue will save the current picture onto the disc as the EMF 435 -format 437 file (Enhanced
Metafile) or WMF 456 -file
(Windows Metafile). It is accessible in menu File 178 with the command Save as EMF or WMF 183 .
the field Save as file type you can select between EMF 435 and WMF 456 file types, still if the
WARNING!!!
See also: commands: Save data 181 , Save as EMF or WMF 183 , Save as DXF or DWG 182
9.1.51 Save blocks

This dialogue will save blocks 437 definitions into a file.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 356

Audytor H2O 1.5
See also: dialogue Blocks 289
9.1.52 Save data

This dialogue will save data files into the selected disc space, with the given name. The dialogue is
called from menu File 178 with the command Save data as 181 . Saved data can be re-opened with
the command Open data 179 .
Save in - pull-down list
Use the button to open the list with the locations (folder) for the file to be saved.
Buttons

In the dialogue middle part, you find the list of files 436 and folders 437 from the selected location. Use
the mouse or keyboard to select the file name to save your data.
WARNING!!!
Previous file version will be then deleted, so the program will require your confirmation.
Just in case, the program will save the last file version in the .~h2d extension file.
Mouse-double click the selected folder name to approve the location. Double-clicking the file name
will save it automatically (as will the button Save).
File name
Here enter the file name to be opened or the filter 436 according to which the program will create the
file 436 list of the current folder 437 .
Save as file type
Buttons
Save Save file under the selected name.

Cancel Cancel saving procedure.
WARNING!!!
357 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
See also: commands: New data 179 , Open data 179 , Save data 180 , Save data as 181
9.1.53 Save labels

This dialogue will save system components labels 452 definitions onto the disc.
See also: dialogues: Data - Labels format 304 , Results - Labels format 353
9.1.54 Save picture

This dialogue will save the picture into a file.
See also: dialogue Picture properties 329
9.1.55 Scanning
This dialogue will scan pictures 90 .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 358

Audytor H2O 1.5
Dialogue Scanning
Scanner - pull-down list
Here select the required scanner from those installed in the system.
Show default scanner interface - option field
Marking this field will use the scanner default interface 433 (the same as when scanning with other
programs). Otherwise, the program's own interface will be applied.
WARNING!!!
This program's interface has been designed especially for scanning technical drawings,
so as to maximally facilitate the scanning process for the user. However, not all scanner
drivers fulfill the TWAIN specification in 100%, so the performance of the interface may
depend on the scanner and its driver. In case any problems occur, use the default
scanner interface. Then you will need to move manually the selected resolution value to
the scanner's interface.
Save preview - option field
359 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Marking this field will display the previously scanned preview when next running the program. This
field will be invisible when the default interface is used.
Resolution selection
This section will select the optimal scanning resolution automatically. Advanced users may
however select resolution on their own.
Original scale Select the original scale from the pull-down list (optionally enter
value). Pull the list down with F1- or button.
Original quality From the list, select the description matching closely that of the
original to be scanned.
Printout scale Select the predicted scale of the program's final printout.
Required printout quality Select the required quality of the program's final printout.
Good quality is recommended for most purposes, as the

"optimal" one. It will ensure good results with reasonable memory
consumption.
Very good quality will improve the printout's quality even more,
but significantly increase memory consumption as well.
Average and Poor quality should be used only when economical

memory management is more important than the printout's
quality.
In some cases, the required printing quality will not be realized.

The user is then informed with a relevant warning message.
This button will select the "optimal" resolution, basing on the

information above. In case the field Show default scanner
interface is marked, you will need to transfer manually the
required resolution value to the scanner's interface.
Resolution Here you will notice the selected resolution value. Advanced
users can select this value at their own experience.
In case the field Show default scanner interface is marked, the
field Resolution will change name into Recommended
resolution.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 360

Audytor H2O 1.5
Color depth - pull-down list
Here select the color depth 430 .
WARNING!!!
For technical drawings "greyscale" scanning is recommended, as it ensures successful

later conversion into "black&white". This solution will give better results than
immediate "black&white" scanning, especially with originals of poor quality.
The final picture format to be inserted into the program should be however
"black&white", as usually taking even 8 times less memory than "greyscale" pictures,
and 24 times less than "RGB" pictures.
In case the field Show default scanner interface is marked, the field Color depth will change
name into Recommended color depth. This means the necessity of own color depth selection in
default scanner interface 433 .
Brightness - edition field
This field will correct the brightness level. Available values range from -1000 to +1000. Zero means
no brightness correction, whereas positive values will increase- and negative ones - decrease the
brightness level.
Contrast - edition field
Available values range from -1000 to +1000. Zero means no contrast correction, whereas positive
values will increase- and negative ones - decrease the contrast level.
WARNING!!!
The Brightness and Contrast parameters interpretation has been given above
according to TWAIN specification 455 . As not all scanner drivers fulfill this specification in
100%, precise interpretation of above parameters may depend on the scanner and its
driver.
Brightness and contrast correction can also be performed after the picture has been
scanned, with the dialogue Picture processing 321 , so usually it is the zero value which is
to be entered into Brightness and Contrast fields.
Size
Here you will find displayed the predicted memory size necessary for storing the scanned picture.
Memory consumption depends on how big the picture is (highlighted scanning area 451 ), resolution
451 and color depth 430 .
An advanced user can find this info useful when self-selecting color depth and resolution.
Toolbar
Here you will find tools for scan preview- and scanned picture's edition.
361 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Tool Cropping will enable selection of the scanning area 451 .
Pull-down button Zoom will select the required zoom for the picture's preview.
Tool Zoom+ will enhance (zoom in) the picture currently being watched.
Tool Zoom- will reduce (zoom out) the picture currently being watched.
Tool Zoom – range will select the picture scale, so that the entire picture is visible
in the window.
Tool Zoom – window will highlight the part of the picture to be visible.
After clicking Zoom – dynamic, the user will be able to choose the required
preview scale dynamically, by moving the mouse with the pressed key.
Tool Move picture will move the picture in the window and select the part of the
picture to be visible.
Tool Repaint picture will repaint the picture in the window.
This button calls the dialogue Level, calibrate, crop 326 , for basic picture edition.
This button calls the dialogue Picture processing 321 , for advanced picture edition
100 , among others precise conversion into "black&white" picture format.
Tabs
These tabs will switch the graphic window between two modes: Scan preview and Scanned
picture.
Scan preview Displays the preview where you can highlight scanning area 451 . This
function is unavailable when using the scanner default interface 433 .
Scanned picture Displays the scanned picture, for controlling the scanning correctness
and proper picture edition.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 362

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.1.56 Search
This dialogue will establish the table text to be searched, together with the searching method- and
range. It is accessible in menu Edit 198 with the command Search 201 .
Dialogue Search
Enter the text to be searched or select 440 it from the previously entered texts.
Options - group
This group will establish search details.
Match case When searching, the program will consider capital letters. Leaving this field
unmarked means no case distinguishing.
Match whole word

When searching, the program will consider entire words only (text fragment
occurrences are not reported).
Range - group
Direction - group
363 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Search from - group
Caret position The text will be searched starting form the current caret position.
Table beginning The text will be searched starting form the table beginning, in case when
no Selected text option has been marked in the Range group.
See also: commands: Search 201 , Replace 203
9.1.57 Sets catalogue

This dialogue will select the catalogue symbol for the connecting set of the receiver 449 or heat
source 439 to the pipes system. It can also be used for viewing the catalogue data base on sets.
This dialogue is only available in program versions equipped with the fittings list creation
module.
Dialogue Sets catalogue
Individual dialogue fields have been described in detail below:
At the dialogue's top, there are buttons for selecting sets categories. Some sets are independent
from pipe systems (button Sets catalogue), some are strictly related to pipe types (button Pipes-
related sets catalogue).
The latter are only displayed when pipes are already connected to the receiver or heat source.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 364

Audytor H2O 1.5
Sets symbols - list

The list of sets catalogue symbols, to select the appropriate one from with a mouse or keyboard.

Here you will find the description of the sets catalogue symbol currently being highlighted in the list
Symbols.

This field includes the producer symbol for the given set type. Button Info will cal the dialogue
with the set producer- or dealer info.

The list of producers symbols, to select the appropriate one from with a mouse or keyboard. This
action will limit the sets symbols list only to those which have been manufactured by the given
producer.
Parameters - button
This button will switch the dialogue into the mode of displaying detailed parameters of the
components highlighted in the list Sets symbols.
Select - button
This button will select the set for the catalogue symbol highlighted in the list Symbols.
9.1.58 Show page

This dialogue will select the page to be displayed in the print preview 190 . It is accessible with the
command Show page from the table print preview pop-up menu 447 .
Dialogue Go to page
365 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
9.1.59 Sorting
This dialogue will select the filter to sort the table, it is called with the command View 206 Sort table
224 .
The dialogue consists of one group only:
Sorting filter - group
This group contains all column names in the active table. Here you can select the filter 452 to sort
the active table.
WARNING!!!
Detailed appearance of this dialogue will depend on which table is currently
active.
See also: menu View 206 , command Sort table 224
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 366

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.1.60 System component parameters

This dialogue will display technical parameters of a system component. Its layout depends on the
component type.
Exemplary dialogue with pipes parameters
367 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
9.1.61 Table print preview

This dialogue will display the table print preview. It is accessible with the command Print table from
the table's pop-up menu 447 .
Dialogue Table print preview
At the dialogue's top, you will find several buttons for formatting and viewing the table print preview.
9.1.62 Text
This dialogue will enter texts.
Dialogue Text
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 368

Audytor H2O 1.5
At the dialogue's top, you will find the bar with the following tools:
Button for opening the text from a text file 436 .
Button for saving the text into a text file of the given name.
Button for undoing recently executed command.
Button cuts the highlighted text fragment (which is available in the clipboard 430 ).
Button copies the highlighted text fragment into the clipboard.
Button pastes the clipboard-stored text into the caret's current position.
Button deletes the highlighted text fragment (which is not available in the clipboard).
The subsequent buttons enable inserting special symbols into the text under edition.
See also: menu View 206 , command Sort table 224
9.1.63 Undo/Redo
This dialogue will undo or redo the desired number of editing operations in pictures or tables. It is
accessible by clicking the arrow button in the command Undo 199 or Redo 200 .
Dialogue Undo
Dialogue elements have been described in detail below:
Commands list
369 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
The list of edition commands to be undone or redone. Here you can determine to what extent you
would like to repeat or cancel the commands.
Undo limit - edition field
Info on maximum number of steps to be undone or redone while drawing.
Clear - button
This button will clear the list of commands, which will disable undoing or redoing recently executed
commands. The command releases the memory ascribed for the necessity of performing Undo/
Redo commands.
Undo/Redo - button
Executes Undo or Redo commands for the elements highlighted in the list.
, Create block 206
9.1.64 Variables
This dialogue will define variables to be later applied when entering data, in order to facilitate this
process. Several variable categories have been defined in the program. Dialogues for the variables
list edition in individual categories are called from menu Data 225 with the commands from menu
Variables 227 .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 370

Audytor H2O 1.5
Description
See also: Entering data 21 , Entering variables 31
menu Data 225 Variables 227
9.2 Windows
This appendix contains the program windows description.
9.2.1 Data - Pictures

In this window, you can draw the system installation diagram 32 and plan views 82 , as well as enter
table data 105 on individual system components (accessories, equipment, pipes, rooms, etc.).
Display the window with the command Pictures 226 from menu Data 225 .
Draw ing functions

toolbar
Scale selection
Table part

371 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
– The drawing part 453 for creating the installation diagram, with two independently calibrated
445 views of the diagram drawing.
– The table part 453 for entering data on the system components highlighted in pictures.
The drawing- and table part are dynamically linked with each other. Highlighting the system
component in the picture will automatically display the table on this component, and highlight the
row with the component data. Analogically, the table element currently under edition is automatically
shown and highlighted in the picture active view 442 .
This solution will enable individual edition of many simultaneously highlighted elements, with no
danger of error regarding recognition which element is currently being edited.
The following table tabs are to be found in the table part:
Data - Water sources 393 ,
Data - Heat sources 382 ,
Data - Pipes 385 ,
Data - Receivers and equipment 387 ,
Data - Accessories 380 ,
Data - Rooms 391 ,
Data - Remote pipes linking 391 ,
Data - Texts 392 ,
Data - Graphics 381 ,
together with the tab with the list of errors 435 detected while calculating.
Pictures views properties, such as scale, displaying the grid and rulers, mouse snap precision or
components highlighting parameters, can be established with the command Drawing properties 213
called from menu View 206 , or the pop-up menu 447 .
See also: menu Data 225 Pictures 226 , Installation diagram drawing and entering data on system
components 32 , Entering table data 105
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 372

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.2.2 Edit block

Edit block window takes the entire working area of the main program window 448 . While editing
blocks, the program will enter the specific working mode.
The program in the block edition mode
In the block edition mode, it is possible to freely modify blocks appearances, using the commands
from the drawing functions toolbar 434 , and edit system components data in the table part 453 . In the
fields Symbol and Description enter the short symbol and detailed block description.
Press the Close button to finish the block's edition. This will save the modified block and re-enter
the program in the regular functioning mode.
WARNING!!!
In the block edition mode, the functions of file operations, calculations, entering data
and calculations overview are unavailable.
See also: Own blocks creation 68
9.2.3 Error list

When calculating, the program will store the series of warning messages into the error list. The
messages can contain warnings on improper operating conditions of individual system
components (eg. too low pipe water velocity), or info on detecting critical errors prohibiting
completion of calculations.
373 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Window Error list shows warning messages saved while calculating. View the list using the
keyboard or the mouse.
possible to design the system without any error messages. Still it is recommended to minimize the
number of serious errors, and assess their influence on the system functioning.
Thanks to the error location 435 tool, the error list window will facilitate error detection and
establishing the error cause 139 .
Error list can be opened with the command Error list 239 called from menu Results 234 , or located in
the table part 453 of the window Data - Pictures 371 .
See also: command Calculations 234 , menu Results 234
command Error list 239 , Detecting and removing errors 139
9.2.4 Main program window

In the main program window, you will find menus, toolbars and other windows. Dialogues
displayed while working with the program will not be however shown inside the main program
window, and may be located out of it as well.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 374

Audytor H2O 1.5
Program title bar Menu Toolbar

Program
Draw ing functions

toolbar
Rulers Tw o independently
scalable draw ing v ies
Scrollbar
Draw ing properties

Picture list buttons
edition
Table
Status bar
Tabs w ith draw ing
Main program window

Program title bar 448 contains the program's name, and optionally the name of the current data file
433 and active window.
As a default, below the program title bar, you will find the main program menu 177 and toolbars 454 .
The example toolbar has been shown below.
The bottom part of the program's window is taken by the status bar 452 showing info and directions
on the current program status.
Exemplary layout of the status bar
The remaining part of the program's window area can be taken by windows on data 21 ,
375 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
calculations results 142 and materials list 163 . In case of windows with pictures, their layout can be
arranged with the command View 206 Pictures window layout 217 .
9.2.5 Plot preview

Plot preview will display the image of pictures to be plotted with pagination, before executing the
Plot 196 command. This will determine whether the pictures page layout is appropriate, without the
necessity of performing preliminary printouts.
The window is called with the command Plot preview 195 (menu File 178 ).
Window Plot preview
Bottom-left plot preview window tabs will select the picture for preview. Right hand-side tabs will
switch between calculations data picture- and calculations results picture previews.
In case the layout is unacceptable, changes can be made with the command Plot format 192 .
See also: commands: Plot 196 , Plot preview 195 , Plot format 192
9.2.6 Print preview

Print preview will display the image of the pages to be printed, before executing the Print 191
command (menu File 178 ). This will determine whether the text page layout is appropriate without
the necessity of performing preliminary printouts. In case the text layout does not come up to
expectations, you can modify the layout with the command Print format 184 .
The window is called with the command Print preview 190 (menu File 178 ).
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 376

Audytor H2O 1.5
Window Print preview
Entire pages are displayed in the print preview window, their numbers shown in the status bar 452 .
Status bar fragment with the current page number
Use the arrow keyboard buttons ( and ) or the scrollbar 452 to view the subsequent pages.
See also: commands: Print 191 , Print preview 190 , Print format 184
377 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
9.2.7 Results - Pictures

This window will display calculations results in the graphic- and table forms. It is accessible with
the command Pictures 236 in menu Results 234 .
– The drawing part 453 for the graphic presentation of results as the installation diagram and
plan views, with two independently calibrated 445 picture views.
– The table part 453 for the table presentation of results.
The drawing- and table parts are dynamically linked with each other. Highlighting the system
component in the picture will automatically display the table on this component, and highlight the
row with the component calculations results. Analogically, the table element currently being viewed
is automatically shown and highlighted in the picture active view 442 .
This solution will facilitate viewing calculations results, enable individual edition of many
simultaneously highlighted elements with no danger of error regarding recognition which element is
currently being viewed.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 378

Audytor H2O 1.5
The following table tabs are to be found in the table part:
Results – General 415 ,
together with the tab with the list of errors 435 detected while calculating.
Pictures views properties, such as scale, displaying the grid and rulers or components highlighting
parameters, can be established with the command Drawing properties 213 called from menu View
206 or the pop-up menu 447 .
WARNING!!!
No modifications are possible in the table- as well as graphic part. To modify individual
picture elements location, change necessary parameters in the window Data - Pictures
371 , and then re-calculate.
See also: menu Results 234 , command Pictures 236
9.3 Tables
This appendix contains the program tables description.
379 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
9.3.1 Data - Accessories

This table will enter data on accessories currently selected 115 in the installation diagram drawing.
The table is to be found in the table part 453 of the window Data - Pictures 371 . The drawing process
for accessories has been described in detail in the point Fittings- and accessories drawing 61 .
Each table row contains data on one piece of accessories 428 . Each table cell is associated with
help info 439 .
Table part of the window Data - Pictures 371 with the table for entering data on accessories
Type Info on the accessories type.
Symbol Accessories catalogue symbol 430 . When selecting the symbol, use the help info
439 (button ) in form of the accessories catalogue 231 , or using the button
select the requires accessories symbol from the list. The list contains only the
accessories previously selected, but the catalogue enables choosing any
accessories available in the program catalogue. If the necessity of the accessories
type modification occurs, eg. from the regular cut-off valve into the ball valve, use
info as help only, not the list.
the accessories symbols available in the project.
dnom Imposed accessories nominal diameter, [mm]. The program will select the
diameters automatically, and in this case leave the field empty, or enter 0 value
meaning the automatic diameter selection. If you need to impose the specific
diameter, enter its value here. Use help info 439 when selecting the accessories
diameters in form of lists (called by the button ) with available diameter values.
Status Info on whether the accessories is already existing (black color) or newly designed
(green color).
Remarks Place for remarks on accessories.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 380

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.3.2 Data - Graphics

This table will edit the layout of graphic elements selected 115 in pictures. The table is to be found in
the table part 453 of the window Data - Pictures 371 . The drawing process for graphic elements has
been described in detail in the point Other graphic elements drawing 72 .
Each table row contains data on one graphic element. Each table cell is associated with help info
439 .
Table part of the window Data - Pictures 371 with the table for edition of graphic elements
Type Graphic element type. A read-only field.
Line style The style of the line for drawing the graphic element.
WARNING!!!
Due to the Windows system limitation, line style other than solid is only
applicable for the thickness 0 or 1.
Line thickness
The thickness of the line for drawing the graphic element.
Line color The color of the line for drawing the graphic element.
Filling color
The color of the filling for the graphic element.
Fill Info on whether the graphic element is to be color-filled.

on the cell right hand-side will display the dialogue Picture layers 324 which enables
modification of the layers available in the picture and moving the element being
WARNING!!!
Prop. Element properties. This field is only active for the DWG 435 , DXF 435 , TIFF 454 , JPG
381 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
439 etc. pictures. Pressing the button on the cell right hand-side will display the
dialogue Picture properties 329 which enables modification of the currently edited
picture appearance, loading 90 or scanning 90 the new picture, calibrating, levelling
90 and correcting 100 the existing picture.
WARNING!!!
Mouse double-click the picture edge 443 to obtain the dialogue Picture
properties 329 fast.
WARNING!!!
In the columns "Line style", "Line thickness", "Line color" and "Filling color" it is
possible to select the option "As layer ". This means that the layer properties will be
automatically ascribed to the graphic element being entered onto this layer. This step
will considerably facilitate the drawing process in case of the significant number of
elements to be drawn.
9.3.3 Data - Heat sources

This table will enter data on heat sources 439 currently selected 115 in the installation diagram
drawing. The drawing process for water sources has been described in detail in the point Heat
sources drawing 57 .
The table is to be found in the table part 453 of the window Data - Pictures 371 . Each table row
contains data on one water source. Each table cell is associated with help info 439 .
Table part of the window Data - Pictures 371 with the table for entering data on heat sources
Type Graphic info on the heat source type. A read-only field.
Riser Riser number (symbol) 450 for the given heat source. The riser number info need
not be entered, as the program will graphically read the connections for the pipe-
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 382

Audytor H2O 1.5
runs and other system components. Still, the lack of the numbers considerably
hinders the calculations results displayed in the table form.
Item no. Number (symbol) 446 of the heat source within the riser. As the previous column,
this one also may remain empty.
Symbol Catalogue symbol 430 of the heat source. Button calls the relevant catalogue.
A freely chosen symbol can be entered in case of an Other heat source.
Other heat sources
Thw Hot water temperature on leaving the heat source, [°C]. Leave the field empty if you
want the program to assume the default value entered in the general data.
Current Info on whether the heat source is the current water heater. It is relevant if in the
general data 22 (tab Calculations parameters) the option Estimating calculation
flows beyond the heater according to DIN is selected.
Pmax Maximum allowed water pressure before the heat source, [m]. This field may
remain empty.
Qsmin Minimum sum of standard hot water outflows from the receivers supplied from the
actual sum is lower. This field may remain empty.
Qsmax Maximum sum of standard hot water outflows from the receivers supplied from the
actual value is exceeded. This field may remain empty.
Resist HW Heat source hydraulic resistance for the hot water flow. Enter the resistance value
as Kv 437 [m 3/h], dP [m] or Zeta 440 . The values should be entered as KV=2.0 or
DP=2.5m, or ZT=5. Select the resistance estimation method from the pull-down
list.
The hydraulic resistance estimation method
Resist Cir Heat source hydraulic resistance, for the given circulation water flow. Enter the
resistance value as Kv [m 3/h], dP [m] or Zeta. The values should be entered as
KV=2.0, DP=2.5m or ZT=5.
Pcir Hot water circulation pump disposable pressure, [m]. Leave the field empty if you
383 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
want the program to automatically calculate its value.
Connecting set
The set symbol for connecting the heat source and the pipes. Button calls the
set catalogue 364 .
the sets available in the project.
dnom cw Data on the type and diameter of the ending for the cold water. Button calls the
list enabling the selection of the appropriate ending. Select the ending type in the
left-hand side part, and then the diameter on the right.
creation in General data 22 .
dnom hw Data on the type and diameter of the ending for the hot water
dnom cir Data on the type and diameter of the ending for the circulation return water.
Room Room symbol 450 . Enter the room symbol for the heat source if the source is not
positioned in the room zone 450 in the picture, or it is located in the different room
than in the picture.
Status Info on whether the heat source is already existing (black color) or newly designed
(green color).
Remarks Place for remarks on heat sources.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 384

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.3.4 Data - Pipes

This table will enter data on pipes currently selected 115 in the installation diagram drawing. The
table is to be found in the table part 453 of the window Data - Pictures 371 . The drawing process for
pipes has been described in detail in the point Pipes drawing and linking 47 .
Entire pipe system is divided into pipe-runs 446 . Each table row contains data on one pipe-run. Each
table cell is associated with help info 439 .
Table part of the window Data - Pictures 371 with the table for entering data on pipes
Type Info on pipe type. CW - cold water, HW - hot water, CIR - circulation. A read-only
field.
Pipes Surrogate pipe type symbol 446 (A, B, C, D...) for the pipe-run. Pipe types under the
surrogate symbols are established by calling the dialogue Data - General 297 with
the command Data 225 General 226 .
Riser Riser number (symbol) 450 for the pipe-run. The riser number info need not be
entered, as the program will graphically read the connections for the pipe-runs and
other system components. Still, the lack of the numbers considerably hinders the
calculations results displayed in the table form.
Item no. Pipe-run number (symbol) within 446 the riser. As before, this column may remain
empty.
dnom Pipe-run nominal diameter, [mm]. Leave this field empty or enter 0 if you want the
program to select the pipe-run diameter automatically. The diameter can be
entered only after completing the pipe types in the column Type. Use help info 439
385 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
in form of the list of available diameters when entering the diameter.
Insulation Pipe insulating material symbol. Enter '-' if the pipe is uninsulated.
Instead of the insulating material symbol, you can enter the insulation efficiency in
percent, eg.: 0% if the pipe is uninsulated, or 95% if the pipe is insulated almost
perfectly. The insulation efficiency for the pipes in unheated rooms should not
amount to less than 75 %.
Leave this field empty if you want the program to select the default pipe insulating
material automatically. Default materials info is entered in general data 22 . Button
calls the isolation catalogue.
Thins Insulating material thickness, [mm]. Leave this field empty if you want the program
to select the pipe insulating material thickness automatically.
L Pipe-run length, [m]. As the program retains the vertical scale in the installation
diagram, in case of the vertical pipe-runs this cell may remain empty (the program
will automatically establish its length and display it as: >2.50<). For the horizontal
pipe-runs, if they have been drawn scale-less in the installation diagram (frequently
it is impossible to draw the diagram retaining the horizontal scale), enter their
length here. If you forget about entering the pipe lengths when drawing the
horizontal pipes, while calculating, the program will assume the length of these
pipes basing on the picture. When the calculations have been completed, you will
find the relevant warning messages in the error list 162 . The program will not warn
against the lack of the horizontal pipes length whose length, as read from the
picture, does not exceed 25 cm (it is assumed that they have been drawn retaining
the horizontal scale).
Room Room symbol 450 for the pipe-run. Thanks to applying the concept of the room
zones 450 in the installation diagram, the program will automatically recognize
where the pipes are positioned, and consequently, usually you may leave this field
empty. Still, it sometimes happens that the room zones cannot be drawn in the
way allowing automatic ascribing of the pipes to the rooms, or you wish that the
pipe-run leads through other rooms than the picture shows. Then enter the
relevant room number in the field Room.
WARNING !!!
The function of automatic ascribing the pipe-runs to the room zones

assigns the pipe-run to the room in the zone where its center is located. If
the pipe-run leads through several rooms, the program requires to have
the pipe-run divided into segments laid in subsequent rooms.
Branch Branch type. If the real pipe branch is different from the one drawn, enter the
symbol of the relevant branch. With the typical riser- and receiver 449 departure, the
program will recognize the branch type automatically, and then the field may
remain empty. Still, if the branch scheme in the picture does not fully agree with
the actual pipe connection, enforce the branch type here. The following options are
available:
TPAS - T-joint passage,
TBRA - T-joint branch,
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 386

Audytor H2O 1.5
XPAS - X-joint passage,
XBRA - X-joint branch,
TBRANCH - type "T" branch.
E/B The fitting assumed for changing pipe direction in the picture. Select the fitting
type: BEND - bends, ELB - elbows. The program will automatically recognize the
pipe-runs direction changes, and will select bends here as default. If the elbows
are to be entered instead of the bends, enter the symbol ELB here. In other cases,
this field may remain empty.
WARNING!!!
The bends or elbows invisible in the installation diagram need to be
entered additionally into the picture, by selecting the relevant fittings from
the tab Pipes in the drawing functions toolbar 434 .
Status Info on whether the pipe-run is already existing (black color) or newly designed
(green color).
Remarks Place for the possible remarks on the pipe-run.
Or start The pipe-run starting point ordinate, [m]. A read-only field.
Or end The pipe-run end point ordinate, [m]. A read-only field.
9.3.5 Data - Receivers and equipment

This table will enter data on receivers 449 and equipment 435 currently selected 115 in the installation
diagram drawing. The table is to be found in the table part 453 of the window Data - Pictures 371 . The
drawing process for receivers and equipment has been described in detail in the point Receivers-
and equipment drawing 39 .
Each table row contains data on one appliance (receiver or equipment). Each table cell is
associated with help info 439 .
387 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Table part of the window Data - Pictures 371 with the table to enter data on receivers and equipment
The following info is to be found in the individual table columns:
Type Info on the appliance type (receiver 449 or equipment 435 ). A read-only field.
Riser Riser number (symbol) 450 where the appliance being entered belongs (receiver or
equipment). This info need not be entered, as the program is able to read
graphically connections between pipe-runs and other system components, still the
lack of this data significantly hinders reading the calculations results displayed in
the table form.
Item no. Enter the number (symbol) of the appliance (receiver or equipment) within the
riser. This column can also remain empty.
Symbol Catalogue symbol 430 of the appliance (receiver or equipment). Button calls the
catalogue.
modify the symbols in the project.
Qscw Standard cold water flux entering the appliance (receiver or equipment), [l/s].
Pmincw Minimum cold water pressure before the appliance (receiver or equipment), [m].
Pmaxcw Maximum permissible cold water pressure before the appliance (receiver or
Qshw Standard hot water flux entering the appliance (receiver or equipment), [l/s].
Pminhw Minimum hot water pressure before the appliance (receiver or equipment), [m].
Pmaxhw Maximum permissible hot water pressure before the appliance (receiver or
Cal.Qs Info on the way that the standard water outflow Qs should be taken into account
when estimating the sum of the standard water outflows from the appliances
connected to the system branches. Button will call the list of the possible
calculation variants.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 388

Audytor H2O 1.5
The following variants are described below:
Consider with the simultaneity coefficient.

Default option for typical receivers. Standard outflows from subsequent
receivers connected to the system branch are added, and calculation flows
are estimated basing on relevant formulas considering simultaneity
coefficients.
Do not consider.
This option will disregard the receiver in the system branch. Standard
outflows from subsequent receivers in this option are not added, and
calculation flows are estimated basing on relevant formulas considering
simultaneity coefficients, not accounting for these receivers. This variant can
be applied eg. in case of the second wash-basin in the bathroom.
Consider without the simultaneity coefficient.

The option of the parallel functioning of several receivers. Standard outflows
from subsequent receivers in this option are not added, and calculation flows
are estimated basing on relevant formulas assuming the simultaneous action
of these receivers, without applying any simultaneity coefficients. This variant
can be applied eg. in case of the swimming pool bathrooms, where large
probability of simultaneous action of all receivers (showers) exist.
No receivers branch of Qs >= 0.5 dm3/s

earlier) not including receivers of the standard outflow Qs >= 0.5 dm 3/s.
Branch with receivers of Qs >= 0.5 dm3/s

earlier) including at least one receiver of the standard outflow Qn >= 0.5 dm 3/
s.
The last two options are available only in case of "other receivers" and enable
connecting the entire branches of the systems calculated earlier.
Connecting set
The symbol of the connecting set for linking the receiver and pipes. Button
calls the sets catalogue 364 .
modify sets symbols in the project.
when the program version allows to create the full fittings list.
ds cw Data on the ending type and its diameter in case of cold water. Button calls the
389 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
list for establishing the ending details. Select the type on the left hand-side,
highlight the diameter on the right.
ds hw Data on the ending type and its diameter in case of hot water.
Room Room symbol 450 for the appliance (receiver or equipment). If the room is outside
the room zone 450 in the picture, or the appliance is located in other room, enter the
appropriate room symbol for the appliance. Leave the field empty if the appliance is
positioned correctly in the appropriate room zone (the program will automatically
ascribe the appliance to its room zone).
Status Info on whether the appliance (receiver or equipment) is of the existing type (black
color) or newly designed (green color).
Remarks Place for remarks on the appliance (receiver or equipment).
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 390

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.3.6 Data - Remote pipes linking

This table will enter data on remote pipes linking 450 currently selected 115 in the installation diagram
drawing. The table is to be found in the table part 453 of the window Data - Pictures 371 . The process
of remote pipes linking has been described in detail in the point Pipes drawing and linking 47 .
Each table row contains data on one link. Each table cell is associated with help info 439 .
Table part of the window Data - Pictures 371 with the table for entering data on remote pipe linking
In individual table columns the following information should be entered:
Type Info on the connection type. A read-only field.
Symbol Connection symbol (arbitrary character string, eg. A).
Pict. name Name of the picture where the remote system part pipes are positioned (according
to the distance from the water source). The empty field means connecting the
pipes form the current picture.
Remarks Place for the remarks on the connection.
9.3.7 Data - Rooms

This table will enter data on rooms currently selected 115 in the installation diagram drawing. The
table is to be found in the table part 453 of the window Data - Pictures 371 . The drawing process for
room zones 450 has been described in detail in the point Room zones drawing 63 .
Each table row contains data on one room. Each table cell is associated with help info 439 .
391 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Table part of the window Data - Pictures 371 with the table for entering data on rooms
Symbol Room number (symbol) 450 .
ti Room calculation internal temperature, [°C].
Zone Building zone 429 symbol for the room. Zones inform about room functions. It is
therefore possible to execute calculations for the hot- and cold water supplying
system for multi-functional buildings, eg. an apartment- and office building.
Maximum 30 different zones can be defined for one building.
To enter data on room zones, use the dialogue Data - General 297 called with
General 226 command from Data 225 menu.
Remarks Place for remarks on rooms.
9.3.8 Data - Texts

This table will enter and edit picture text layout. The table is to be found in the table part 453 of the
The drawing process for texts has been described in detail in the point Other graphic elements
drawing 72 .
Each table row contains data on one text. Each table cell is associated with help info 439 .
Table part of the window Data - Pictures 371 with the table for text edition
Type Type of the text element. A read-only field.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 392

Audytor H2O 1.5
Texts Texts positioned in the picture. Pressing the button on the cell's right hand-side
will display the dialogue Text 368 with which you can enter several-lines-long texts,
load the text from a file, enter special characters, etc.
Mouse double-clicking the picture text will call the dialogue Text 368 fast.
Justify Text justification method (to the left, center, right).
Font Font type.
Style Font style (italic, bold, etc.).
Size Font size.
Color Text color.

on the cell's right hand-side will display the dialogue Picture layers 324 which
enables modification of the layers available in the pciture and moving the text being
WARNING!!!
WARNING!!!
In the columns "Font", "Style", "Size" and "Color" it is possible to select the option "As
layer ". This means that the layer properties will be automatically ascribed to the text
element being entered onto this layer. This step will considerably facilitate the drawing
process in case of the significant number of elements to be drawn.
9.3.9 Data - Water sources

This table will enter data on water sources 455 currently selected 115 in the installation diagram
drawing. The drawing process for water sources has been described in detail in the point Water
sources drawing 55 .
The table is to be found in the table part 453 of the window Data - Pictures 371 . Each table row
contains data on one water source. Each table cell is associated with help info 439 .
393 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Table part of the window Data - Pictures 371 with the table for entering data on water sources
Type Info on the water source type.
Riser Riser number (symbol) 450 for the given water source. The riser number info
need not be entered, as the program will graphically read the connections for
the pipe-runs and other system components. Still, the lack of these numbers
considerably hinders the calculations results displayed in the table form.
P-run Water source number within the riser 446 . As the previous column, this one
also may remain empty.
Building type Type of the building where the system supplied from the selected water
source is positioned. Leave the field empty if you want the program to
assume the default building type entered in the general data 22 .
Tcw Cold water temperature on leaving the water source, [°C]. Leave the field
general data.
Pcw Cold water disposable pressure, [m]. Leave the field empty if you want the
Thw Hot water temperature on leaving the water source, [°C]. Leave the field
general data.
Phw Hot water disposable pressure, [m]. Leave the field empty if you want the
Pcir Hot water circulation pump disposable pressure, [m]. Leave the field empty if
you want the program to calculate this value
automatically.
Room Room symbol 450 . Enter the room symbol for the water source if the source
is not positioned in the room zone 450 in the picture, or it is located in the
different room than in the picture.
Status Info on whether the water source is already existing (black color) or newly
Remarks Place for remarks on the water source.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 394

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.3.10 General data - Diameters

This table contains detailed info on available diameter of the pipe selected in the table General data
- Pipes 396 .
Both tables are to be found in the dialogue Data - General 297 .
Each table cell is associated with help info 439 .
system pipes.
Rmax [Pa/m]
VmaxCir [m/s]
RmaxCir [Pa/m]
395 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
WARNING!!!
9.3.11 General data - Pipes

The table will select pipe types for the system under design. This table is the part of the dialogue
Data - General 297 .
Each table cell is associated with help info 439 .
Pipe symbols
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 396

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.3.12 Materials - Accessories

This table contains the list of accessories 428 in the system. It can be displayed with the command
Results 234 Materials lists 239 Accessories - materials 243 .
Accessories list is created separately for each water source and pipe-type in the system. Each
Individual accessories types are presented in several table rows.
Type Accessories type presented graphically.
The second row contains the accessories description.
The following rows contain info on individual accessories diameters in the project:
dnom [mm] Nominal diameter of the accessories.
Cat. no. Catalogue symbol 430 of the accessories.
N project [item] Number of the accessories items of the given nominal diameter in the
project.
N existing [item] Number of existing accessories items of the given nominal diameter.
Cost Total cost.
Remarks Place for remarks (after the table has been printed).
9.3.13 Materials - Accessories table

This table contains the overall list 441 of accessories 428 in the system, presented in the simple table
form. It can be displayed with the command Results 234 Materials lists 239 Accessories table -
materials 243 .
397 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Source symbol
Water source symbol supplying the system branch with the given accessories.
Pipes symbol
Pipe symbol, on which the given accessories has been mounted.
Symbol Symbol of the accessories.
dnom Nominal diameter of the accessories.
N project Number of accessories items in the project.
N existing Number of existing accessories items.
Cost Total cost of the accessories.
Description Description of the accessories.
Remarks Place for remarks on the accessories (after the table has been printed).
The table contents can be sorted according to the selected filter 452 , as well as established the
parameters 224 .
The contents of results table cells cannot be modified. The function of clipboard 430 copying 200 the
highlighted table fragment is however available.
tables: Results - General 415 , Results - Water sources 426 , Results - Heat sources 417 ,
Results - Pipes 419 , Results - Receivers and equipment 422 , Results - Accessories 409 ,
Results - Rooms 425 , Results - Branches 411 , Results - Circulation circuits 413 , Results -
Presets 421 , Materials - Water sources table 409 , Materials - Water sources 408 , Materials -
Heat sources table 399 , Materials - Heat sources 399 , Materials - Pipes table 403 , Materials -
Pipes 402 , Materials - Insulation table 401 , Materials - Insulation 400 , Materials - Accessories
table 397 , Materials - Accessories 397 , Materials - Receivers and equipment 407 , Materials -
Receivers and equipment 406 , Materials - Producers table 405 , Materials - Producers 404
Table navigation 106 , Sorting table contents 107
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 398

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.3.14 Materials - Heat sources

This table contains the list of heat sources 439 in the system. It can be displayed with the command
Results 234 Materials lists 239 Heat sources - materials 241 .
Heat sources list is created individually for each water source.
Individual heat sources are presented in several table rows.
Type Heat source type presented graphically.
Symbol Heat source symbol.
Producer Heat source producer symbol.
The second row contains the heat source description.
N project Number of heat sources in the project, [item].
N existing Number of existing heat sources, [item].
Cost Total cost.
9.3.15 Materials - Heat sources table

This table contains the overall list 441 of heat sources 439 in the system, presented in the simple
table form. It can be displayed with the command Results 234 Materials lists 239 Heat sources
table - materials 241 .
Source symbol
399 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Water source symbol supplying the system branch with the given heat source.
Type Graphic info on the type of the heat source.
Symbol Symbol of the heat source.
N project Number of heat sources in the project.
N existing Number of existing heat sources.
Cost Total cost.
Producer Symbol of the producer of the heat source.
Description Description of the heat source.
parameters 224 .
9.3.16 Materials - Insulation

This table contains the list of insulation on the pipes in the system. It can be displayed with the
command Results 234 Materials lists 239 Insulation - materials 242 .
Insulation list is created separately for each water source and pipe-type in the system. Each
Individual insulation types are presented in several table rows.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 400

Audytor H2O 1.5
Type Insulation type presented graphically.
Symbol Catalogue symbol 430 of the insulation.
Producer Symbol of the producer of the insulation.
The second row contains the insulation description.
The following rows contain info on individual insulation diameters in the project:
9.3.17 Materials - Insulation table

This table contains the overall list 441 of insulation on the pipes in the system, presented in the
simple table form. It can be displayed with the command Results 234 Materials lists 239 Insulation
Source symbol
Water source symbol supplying the system branch with the insulation.
Pipes symbol
Pipes symbol, on which the insulation has been mounted.
401 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Type Graphic info on the type of insulation.
Symbol Catalogue symbol of the insulation.
parameters 224 .
9.3.18 Materials - Pipes

This table contains the list of pipes in the system. It can be displayed with the command Results 234
Materials lists 239 Pipes - materials 242 .
Pipes list starts with the row with the info on the symbol of the water source supplying the system
branch with the given pipes.
Individual pipe types are presented in several table rows.
Type Pipe type presented graphically.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 402

Audytor H2O 1.5
Symbol Catalogue symbol 430 of the pipes.
The second row contains the pipe descriptions.
The following rows contain info on individual pipe diameters in the project:
dnom [mm] Nominal diameter of the pipe.
Cat. no. Catalogue number of the pipe.
L project [m]
Length of the pipes with the given diameter in the project.
L existing [m]
Length of the existing pipes with the given diameter.
Cost Total cost.
9.3.19 Materials - Pipes table

This table contains the overall list 441 of pipes in the system, presented in the simple table form. It
can be displayed with the command Results 234 Materials lists 239 Pipes table - materials 242 .
Source symbol
Water source symbol supplying the system branch with the given pipes.
Type Graphic info on the type of the pipes.
Symbol Pipe symbol.
dnom Nominal diameter of the pipes.
Cat. no. Catalogue number of the pipes.
403 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
L project Length of the pipes in the project.
L existing Length of the existing pipes.
Cost Total cost.
W project Weight of the pipes in the project.
W existing Weight of the existing pipes.
V project Volume of the pipes in the project.
V existing Volume of the existing pipes.
Description Description of the pipes.
parameters 224 .
9.3.20 Materials - Producers

This table contains the list of producers of appliances available in the system. It can be displayed
with the command Results 234 Materials lists 239 Producers - materials 245 .
Info on individual producers is presented in several table rows.
In the subsequent table rows, the following information is to be found:
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 404

Audytor H2O 1.5
Telephone no.
9.3.21 Materials - Producers table

This table contains the overall list 441 of producers of appliances available in the system, presented
in the simple table form. It can be displayed with the command Results 234 Materials lists 239
Telephone no.
Remarks Remarks (after the table has been printed).
parameters 224 .
405 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
9.3.22 Materials - Receivers and equipment

This table contains the list of receivers 449 and equipment 435 in the system. It can be displayed with
the command Results 234 Materials lists 239 Receivers and equipment - materials 244 .
Receivers- and equipment list is created separately for each water source.
Individual receivers- and equipment types are presented in several table rows.
Type Receiver- or equipment type presented graphically.
The second row contains the description of the receiver or equipment.
N project Number of receivers or equipment in the project, [item].
N existing Number of existing receivers or equipment, [item].
Cost Total cost.
Remarks Place for remarks on receivers or equipment (after the table has been printed).
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 406

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.3.23 Materials - Receivers and equipment table

This table contains the overall list 441 of receivers 449 and equipment 435 in the system, presented in
the simple table form. It can be displayed with the command Results 234 Materials lists 239
Receivers and equipment table - materials 244 .
Source symbol
Water source symbol supplying the system branch with the given receiver or
equipment.
Symbol Symbol of the receiver or equipment.
N project Number of appliances in the project.
N existing Number of existing appliances.
Cost Total cost.
Description Description of the receiver or equipment.
Remarks Place for remarks on the receiver or equipment (after the table has been printed).
parameters 224 .
407 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
9.3.24 Materials - Water sources

This table contains the list of water sources 455 in the system. It can be displayed with the
command Results 234 Materials lists 239 Water sources - materials 241 .
Individual water sources are presented in several table rows.
Type Water source type presented graphically.
Producer Water source producer symbol.
The second row contains the water source description.
N project Number of water sources in the project, [item].
N existing Number of existing water sources, [item].
Cost Total cost.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 408

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.3.25 Materials - Water sources table

This table contains the overall list 441 of water sources 455 in the system, presented in the simple
table form. It can be displayed with the command Results 234 Materials lists 239 Water sources
Type Info on the type of the water source.
Symbol Symbol of the water source.
N project Number of water sources in the project, [items].
N existing Number of existing water sources, [items].
Cost Total cost.
Producer Symbol of the producer of the water source.
Description Description of the water source.
parameters 224 .
9.3.26 Results - Accessories

This table contains the full list of accessories 428 in the system. The table is called from menu
Results 234 with the command Accessories 237 . The table is also to be found in the table part 453 of
the window Results - Pictures 378 .
409 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
SEach table cell refers to one piece of accessories.
Source symbol
Water source 455 symbol supplying the system branch with the given accessories.
Riser Riser number (symbol) 450 for the pipe-run with the accessories.
Pipe-run Pipe-run number (symbol) 446 within the riser with the accessories.
Riser/Pipe-run
Two-part pipe-run number (symbol) with the given accessories.
Riser Riser number (symbol) for the pipe-run.

Room Room number (symbol) 450 with the accessories.
Preset Selected initial preset for the governing accessories.
Q Calculation cold- or hot water flux through the accessories, [l/s].
[m].
Status Info on whether the accessories already exists (black color) or is newly designed
(green color).
parameters 224 .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 410

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.3.27 Results - Branches

This table contains calculations results 142 for pipes, presented as branches leading from water
sources 455 to receivers 449 . It can be displayed with the command Branches 238 called from menu
Results 234 . The table is also to be found in the table part 453 of the window Results - Pictures 378 .
Info on the branch is displayed in the following way:
In the first row you will find the riser number and info on the receiver supplied from the given
branch.
P Water pressure before the receiver, for the given calculation water flux in the
system, [m].
dP Total pressure drop (including linear- and local resistance) in the branch, for the
given calculation water flux, [m].
dH Height difference between the water connection point to the receiver and the water
source outflow point, [m].
Pover Overpressure exceeding the required minimum pressure before the receiver
(dPover = P - Pmin) in the branch, for the given calculation water flux, [m].
Lb The length of the distributing pipes 434 creating the branch, [m].
If the branch is not the first displayed in the table, and in the table format no option Show entire
branches has been marked, then in the next table row you will find total hydraulic resistance of the
common pipe-runs, meaning those belonging to the current branch, but already presented with the
previous branches.
The following rows contain information on individual branch elements, such as water sources, heat
sources, pipes, receivers, etc.
Calculations results table for branches
411 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Type Graphic info on the type of element (water sources, heat sources, pipes, receivers,
etc.).
Riser/Pipe-run

Qs Total standard water outflows from the draw-off accessories, supplied from the
given pipe-run, [l/s].
R Unitary linear pressure losses, for the given calculation flow, [Pa/m].
given calculation flow, [m].
parameters 224 .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 412

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.3.28 Results - Circulation circuits

This table contains calculations results 142 for circulation circuits 430 . It can be displayed with the
command Circulation circuits 238 called from menu Results 234 . The table is also to be found in the
table part 453 of the window Results - Pictures 378 .
Info on individual circuits is displayed in the following way:
In the first row you will find the riser number and info on the circulation pipe-run in the given circuit.
dPact Active pressure 428 in the circuit, [Pa].
dPgr Gravitation pressure 438 considered in the circuit, [Pa].
dP Total pressure drop (including linear- and local resistance) in the circuit, for the
given circulation water flux, [m].
Pover Overpressure in the circuit, for the given circulation flux, [m].
Lc The length of the distributing pipes 434 creating the circuit, [m].
dT Pipe-run water cooling on the distance from the heat source to the circulation pipe
connection point to the hot water pipe, [K].
Calculations results table for circulation circuits
circuits has been marked, then in the next table row you will find total hydraulic resistance of the
common supplying pipe-runs, meaning those belonging to the current circuit, but already presented
with the previous circuits.
The following rows contain information on new pipe-runs in the circuit.
413 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Type Graphic info on the type of the circuit element.
Riser/Pipe-run

Insulation efficiency 445 for the pipe-run, [%]
flow, [°C].
circuits has been marked, then in the next table row you will find the total hydraulic resistance of
the common pipe-runs.
parameters 224 .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 414

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.3.29 Results - General

The table will view basic calculations results for the entire system under design. This table is called
from menu Results 234 with the command General 235 . The table is also to be found in the table part
453 of the window Results - Pictures 378 .
The table is generated by the program as the result of the calculations 138 process, and the user will
not be directly permitted to modify its contents. It is however possible to copy its fragments into the
clipboard 430 in order to move them to another program (eg. spreadsheet or word processor).
Table Results - General
In individual table columns you will find the following information:
Project name Project name.
Project location Project location.
Designer Info on designer.
Calculations date Date and time of the calculations.
Data file Name of file with calculations data.
Info on pipe types Catalogue symbols 430 ascribed to pipe surrogate symbols 446 .
Water sources info
415 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Source symbol Water source symbol.
Source type Water source type.
Building type Building type supplied from the water source.
Remarks Remarks on the the water source.
Water temperatures, [°C]

Cold (hot) water temperatures on leaving the water source, or circulation
water temperature returning to the water source, [°C].
Disposable pressure, [m]

Required minimum cold (hot) water disposable pressure, or the required
minimum disposable pressure for the hot water circulation pump, [m].
Hydrostatic pressure, [m]

Cold (hot) water hydrostatic pressure, [m].
Standard outflows sum, [l/s]

Standard sum of water outflows from the appliances connected to the
cold (hot) water branches supplied from the water source, [l/s].
Calculation flow, [l/s]

Calculation water flux entering the cold (hot) water branch supplied from
the water source, or the calculation circulation water flux returning to the
Circulation exchanges, [1/h]

Number of water exchanges in the hot- and circulation water pipes within
the circulation zone, [1/h].
Critical receiver Number of the critical receiver 432 supplied from the cold (hot) water
branch connected to the water source, or number of the first circulation
pipe-run of the critical system circuit.
WARNING!!!
The critical receiver for the cold water branch can be the cold- or hot water receiver,
or the heat source.
Pressure before critical receiver, [m]

Water pressure before the critical receiver connected to the cold (hot)
water branch supplied from the water source, [m].
Critical branch length, [m]

The total of pipe lengths counted from the water source to the critical
receiver supplied from the cold (hot) water branch, or the total length of
the pipe-runs in the critical circulation circuit, [m].
Branch resistance up to critical receiver, [m]

Cold (hot) water flow resistance from the water source up to the critical
receiver in the cold (hot) water branch supplied from the water source, or
the hydraulic resistance of the critical circulation circuit, [m].
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 416

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.3.30 Results - Heat sources

This table contains calculations results 142 for heat sources 439 . It can be displayed with the
command Heat sources 236 called from menu Results 234 . The table is also to be found in the table
part 453 of the window Results - Pictures 378 .
Table with heat sources work parameters
Source symbol
Water source 455 symbol supplying the system branch with the heat source.
Type Graphic info on the heat source type.
Riser/Pipe-run
Riser- and heat source number (symbol) within the riser.
Room Room symbol for the heat source.
Symbol Heat source symbol
Cat. no. Heat source catalogue number.
dPw Flow resistance from the water source to the heat source, [m].
Pw Water pressure before the heat source, [m].
Pmax Maximum allowed water pressure before the heat source, [m].
417 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Thw Hot water temperature on leaving the heat source, [°C]
Qs Total standard water outflow from the appliances connected to the hot water
branch supplied from the heat source, [l/s].
Qsmin Minimum total standard hot water outflow from the receivers supplied from the heat
source, [l/s].
Qsmax Maximum total standard hot water outflow from the receivers supplied from the
heat source, [l/s].
Kv hw Kv coefficient 437 for the hot water flow through the heat source, [m 3/h].
dP hw Hot water flow hydraulic resistance through the heat source, [m].
qcir Calculation circulation water flux on entering the heat source, [l/s].
Ne cir Number of water exchanges in the circulation circuits connected to the source, [1/
h]. When establishing the number of exchanges, the program will consider hot
water pipes capacity for the pipes positioned in the circulation zone, and the
circulation pipes capacity.
Kv cir Kv coefficient, for the given circulation water flow through the heat source, [m 3/h].
dP cir. Hydraulic resistance, for the given circulation water flow through the heat source,
[m].
Pcir Minimum required disposable pressure for the hot water circulation pump, [m].
Cir cr. First circulation pipe-run of the critical circulation circuit.
(green color).
Remarks Remarks on the heat source.
parameters 224 .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 418

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.3.31 Results - Pipes

This table contains info on distributing pipes 434 . This table is called from menu Results 234 with the
command Pipes 236 . The table is also to be found in the table part 453 of the window Results -
Pictures 378 .
When entering data, the pipe system has been divided into pipe-runs 446 . Each row contains info on
one pipe-run.
Results table with calculations results for pipes
Source symbol
Water source 455 symbol supplying the system branch with the pipe-run.
Type Info on the pipe type: CW - cold water, HW - hot water, CIR - circulation.
Riser/Pipe-run
Riser Riser number (symbol) 450 for the pipe-run.

Pipe-run Pipe-run number (symbol) 446 within the riser.
Pipes Surrogate pipes type symbol 446 (A, B, C, D, etc.) for the pipe-run. Pipe catalogue
symbols 430 corresponding to surrogate symbols are given in the general
calculations results 415 table.
Pipes symbol
Pipes catalogue symbol for the pipe-run.
Room Room symbol 450 for the pipe-run.
419 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Catalogue number
Pipes catalogue number for the pipe-run.
Diins Internal insulation diameter, [mm].
Ins. Di x Th Insulation internal diameter and thickness, [mm].
Insulation cat. no.

Insulation catalogue number.
Insulation efficiency 445 for the pipe-run.
N Number of receivers supplied from the pipe-run, considered in calculations.

Results in this column are only shown when in General data 22 calculation method
according to SNIP 2.04.01-85 standard has been selected.
NP NP coefficient. Results in this column are only shown when in General data 22
Alpha Alpha coefficient. Results in this column are only shown when in General data 22
R Unitary linear pressure losses 455 , for the given calculation flow, [Pa/m].
given calculation flow, [Pa].
flow, [deg. C].
(green color).
Remarks Remarks on the pipe-run.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 420

Audytor H2O 1.5
Or start Ordinate for the beginning of the pipe-run, [m].
Or end Ordinate for the end of the pipe-run, [m].
parameters 224 .
9.3.32 Results - Presets

This table contains the list of presets 439 for governing accessories 437 mounted on distributing
pipes 434 . It can be displayed with the command Presets 238 called from menu Results 234 . The table
is also to be found in the table part 453 of the window Results - Pictures 378 .
Each table cell refers to one governing element.
Source symbol
Water source symbol supplying the system branch with the given governing
element.
Riser Riser number (symbol) 450 for the pipe-run with the governing element.
Item no. Pipe-run number (symbol) 446 within the riser with the governing element.
Riser/Pipe-run

Room Room number (symbol) 450 with the governing accessories .
Symbol Catalogue symbol 430 of the type of the accessories.
421 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Preset Selected preset 439 of the governing accessories.
Q Calculation hot- or cold water flux through the accessories, [l/s].
[m].
Status Info on whether the the accessories already exists (black color) or is newly
parameters 224 .
9.3.33 Results - Receivers and equipment

This table contains calculations results 142 of receivers 449 and equipment 435 . It can be displayed
with the command Receivers and equipment 237 called from menu Results 234 . The table is also to
be found in the table part 453 of the window Results - Pictures 378 .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 422

Audytor H2O 1.5
Calculations results table for receivers and equipment
Each table cell refers to one receiver or piece of equipment.
Source symbol
Water source symbol supplying the system branch with the receiver or equipment.
Zone Building zone symbol with the receiver or equipment.
Riser Riser number (symbol) 450 for the entered appliance (receiver or equipment).
Item no. Number (symbol) of the appliance (receiver or equipment) within the riser.
Riser/Pipe-run
Riser number (symbol) 450 and the number of the receiver or equipment within the
riser.
Room Room number (symbol) 450 with the receiver or equipment.
Qscw Standard cold water flux on entering the receiver, [l/s].
Pcw Cold water pressure before the receiver, [m].
Pmincw Minimum allowed cold water pressure before the receiver, [m].
Pocw Maximum cold water pressure before the receiver, [m]. The pressure is assessed
Pmaxcw Maximum allowed cold water pressure before the receiver, [m].
423 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
dPcw Cold water flow resistance from the water source to the receiver, [m].
dHcw Height difference between the cold water connection point to the receiver and the
Lcw Branch length supplying cold water from the water source to the receiver, [m].
Qshw Standard hot water flux on entering the receiver, [l/s].
Phw Hot water pressure before the receiver, [m].
Pminhw Minimum allowed hot water pressure before the receiver, [m].
Pohw Maximum hot water pressure before the receiver, [m]. The pressure is assessed
Pmaxhw Maximum allowed hot water pressure before the receiver, [m].
dPhw Hot water flow resistance from the water source to the receiver, [m].
dHhw Height difference between the hot water connection point to the receiver and the
Lhw Branch length supplying hot water from the water source to the receiver, [m].
WARNING!!!
In case when hot water is suppled from the cold water source and it is
heated on its way in the heat source, the cold water pipes length from the
water source to the heat source will also be taken into consideration.
Cal.Qs Info on whether the standard outflow Qs from the receiver has been taken into
account when assessing the total standard outflows.
Status Info on whether the receiver or equipment already exists (black color) or is newly
Remarks Remarks on the receiver or equipment.
parameters 224 .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 424

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.3.34 Results - Rooms

This table contains calculations results 142 for rooms with the system under design. This table is
called from menu Results 234 with the command Rooms 237 . The table is also to be found in the
Rooms parameters table
Symbol Room symbol 450 .
ti Calculation room air internal temperature, [°C].
Zone Building zone 429 symbol with the room.
Remarks Remarks on the room.
parameters 224 .
425 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
9.3.35 Results - Water sources

This table contains calculations results 142 for water sources 455 . It can be displayed with the
command Water sources 236 called from menu Results 234 . The table is also to be found in the
Table with water sources work parameters
Type Graphic info on the water source type.
Riser Riser number (symbol) 450 for the given water source.
Item no. Source number within the riser 446 .
Riser/Pipe-run Riser- and water source number within the riser.
Room Room symbol for the water source.
Building type Building type for the systems supplied from the water source.
Tcw Cold water temperature on leaving the source, [°C].
Qscw Total standard water outflow from the appliances connected to the cold water
Qcw Calculation water flux on leaving the cold water branch supplied from the
Pcw Required minimum cold water disposable pressure, [m].
Phcw Cold water hydrostatic pressure, [m].
CW cr. The number of the cold water critical receiver.
Pcw cr. Water pressure before the critical receiver connected to the cold water
branch supplied from the water source, [m].
Lcw cr. Total pipe length from the water source to the the critical receiver supplied
from the cold water branch, [m].
dPcw cr. Cold water flow resistance from the water source to the the critical receiver in
the cold water branch supplied from the water source, [m].
Thw Hot water temperature on leaving the source, [°C].
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 426

Audytor H2O 1.5
Qshw Total standard water outflow from the appliances connected to the hot water
Qhw Calculation water flux on leaving the hot water branch supplied from the water
source, [l/s].
Phw Required minimum hot water disposable pressure, [m].
Phhw Cold water hydrostatic pressure, [m].
HW cr. The number of the hot water critical receiver.
Phw cr. Water pressure before the critical receiver connected to the hot water branch
supplied from the water source, [m].
Lhw cr. Total pipe length from the water source to the the critical receiver supplied
from the hot water branch, [m].
dPhw cr. Hot water flow resistance from the water source to the the critical receiver in
the hot water branch supplied from the water source, [m].
qcir Calculation circulation water flux on entering the water source, [l/s].
Pcir Minimum required disposable pressure for the hot water circulation pump,
[m].
Ne cir. Number of water exchanges in the circulation circuits connected to the

source, [1/h]. When establishing the number of exchanges, the program will
consider hot water pipes capacity for the pipes positioned in the circulation
zone, and the circulation pipes capacity.
Cir cr. Number of the first circulation pipe-run in the critical circulation circuit.
Lcir cr. Total pipe-runs length in the critical circulation circuit, [m].
Status Info on whether the water source already exists (black color)or is newly
Remarks Remarks on the water source.
parameters 224 .
427 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
9.4 Definitions and terms

This appendix contains the list of definitions and terms to be found in the program user's manual.
9.4.1 Accessories
Branches, fittings, valves, manifolds, governors, control-measuring devices, etc., installed on
pipes.
9.4.2 Accessories type-set

Accessories type-set is the list of accessories 428 elements with common features. The program
will select the relevant accessories type from this list. The selection process will start from the
accessories of the highest Kv flow coefficient 437 (smallest hydraulic resistance). If the
overpressure should be choked, the accessories will be selected from the list ensuring the
appropriate additional pressure drop.
9.4.3 Active pressure

Pressure difference enabling the water flow in individual circulation circuits 430 . In the circuit, the
active pressure include the pressure generated by the circulation pump and gravitation pressure 438
.
9.4.4 Bitmap
A bitmap is a picture consisting of point (pixel 446 )-mosaic on the screen and paper. This method of
picture representation is called raster graphics 449 .
See also: Scanning pictures 90 , Pixel 446 , Raster graphics 449 , Graphic formats 437
9.4.5 Bitmaps painting

Two methods for bitmaps painting 428 are available:
Default (fast) A bitmap is pained the fastest, but without any quality
improvement methods.
With thickening Picture components are thickened (useful especially with small
zoom in).
With smoothing Picture components are smoothened. With small zoom in, the
quality is then greatly improved, it is however the slowest
painting method.
See also: dialogues: Drawing properties 309 , Picture properties 329 , Color representation 430
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 428

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.4.6 BMP (Windows Bitmap)

Basic raster graphics Microsoft Windows format. Its advantage is compatibility with many
programs, the disadvantage – significant file sizes. Even though the format specification assumes
RLE-type compression 443 , the majority of common programs will not utilize it, and consequently
the files of this format are large volume files.
See also: Graphic formats 437 , Raster graphics 449 , Vector graphics 455 , Picture compression 443
9.4.7 Building zone
In the program, buildings can be divided into zones of different destinations. It is therefore possible
to perform hot- and cold water supplying system calculations for the building consisting of many
zones, eg. apartment- and office parts. Up to 30 different zones can be defined in one project.
Entering data on building zones will proceed with the dialogue Data - General 297 , called with the
command General 226 from menu Data 225 .
9.4.8 Calculations error

Calculation errors are among others messages of incomplete data, improper data structure and
warning messages in case when successful completing the system design is not possible. Some
errors are critical 432 . While calculating, the program creates the error list 435 .
9.4.9 Calculations errors file

A file created while calculating 138 , with information on detected errors 429 . Error files are of the
same name as calculations data files 433 , and with .h2e extension.
See also: File 436 , File extensions 436 , Data file 433 , Calculations results file 429 , Calculations results
errors file 429
9.4.10 Calculations parameters

The set of parameters influencing the process of calculations in the program. These parameters
are established in the dialogue General data 297 (tab Calculations parameters), called from menu
Data 225 with the command General 226 .
9.4.11 Calculations results file

A file created while calculating 138 , with stored results. It is of the same name as data files 433 , and
with .h2r extension.
errors file 429
9.4.12 Catalogue
See Folder 437 .
429 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
9.4.13 Catalogue data base

The program uses the catalogue data base with construction, heat- and hydraulic parameters of
pipes and accessories.
The contents of the catalogue data base cannot be updated of modified by the user. To view this
data base, use commands called from menu Data 225 Catalogues 230 .
9.4.14 Catalogue symbol

The program has been equipped with the catalogue data base 430 with info on pipes, insulation,
draw-off points and accessories 428 in the system. Individual data base elements have been
signified with catalogue symbols.
9.4.15 Circulation circuit

A circuit consists of: a heat source 439 , distributing pipes 434 and circulation pipes.
A circulation circuit enables water circulation in hot water pipes, consequently prohibiting excessive
water cooling down, in case of no consumption. This will reduce hot water expectancy time.
9.4.16 Clipboard
A clipboard is applied to move data between different components of the same program, or
between different programs. Eg. a picture can be moved fromCorelDRAW to the program Audytor
H2O. The clipboard can accept numbers, texts or pictures.
When inserting clipboard contents into the data table, the correctness control of data being inserted
will be performed. In case of error detection, inserting will be aborted.
Two clipboard types are available in the program. One can be used for storing texts copied from
tables or dialogue text fields, whereas the other is meant for storing copied picture fragments.
See also: Entering pictures from the clipboard 93
menu Edit 198 , commands: Cut 200 , Clipboard 200 , Paste 200
9.4.17 Color depth

Color depth defines maximum color number available in the picture. The more colors are available,
the larger is the picture's volume.
For "black&white" pictures, only 2 colors are available - each pixel 446 can be either black or white,
so this format will require only 1 memory bit per pixel (bpp). Remaining formats offer wider range of
colors, and consequently require more memory.
See also: Scanning pictures 90 , Scanning resolution 451
9.4.18 Color representation

Color representation is the method of displaying and printing colors in pictures.
Following methods of color representation are available:
Color Picture will be displayed in color (if applicable).
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 430

Audytor H2O 1.5
Greyscale Picture will be displayed in greyscale (colors changed into

shades of grey).
Dark greyscale Picture will be displayed in greyscale, with darker shades of

grey (useful with some printer types).
Black&white Picture will be displayed in black and white only (in connection
with the selected option Paint with filling – useful with some
printer types).
Monochromatic Edges of picture components will be displayed in one color

only, to be freely selected in this field.
Monochromatic all Edges and fillings of picture components will be displayed in

one color only, to be freely selected in this field.
See also: dialogues: Drawing properties 309 , Picture properties 329 , Bitmaps painting 428
9.4.19 Components data edition mode

Drawing edition mode enabling selecting elements 115 (with no possibility of moving, deleting or
dimensions modification) in the drawing part of the window 453 , as well as edition of data on the
selected picture elements in the table part of the window 453 . This solution enables entering data
with no danger of accidental modification of the position of the components currently being drawn.
9.4.20 Compression methods

The subject of compression has been described here only informatively. In the program
Audytor H2O, compression is performed automatically and the user will not have to
decide about it.
The most common compression methods have been presented below:
RLE
This method bases on searching for repeatable bytes. Eg. "0, 0, 0, 0, 0" will be stored as "five
nulls". It can be successfully applied to art-line-type pictures with 8-bit color palette.
LZW
This method will search for repeatable byte sequences and create their special description.
Enables compression of pictures with 24-bit color palette. The method is applied in TIFF 454 and
GIF 437 formats.
JPEG
This method has been created especially for photographic images. It will search for the
mathematical description of the color dispersion. With appropriately selected compression level,
the method will give significant memory consumption savings with no visible quality loss.
See also: Graphic formats 437 , Picture compression 443
431 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
9.4.21 Critical error

When the data critical error has been detected, the program will abort the calculations process
and will not store the results file 429 .
Critical errors in calculations results displayed in the error list are marked with red squares.
Critical error example
9.4.22 Critical receiver

Critical receiver 449 is the one of the most difficult water supply (due to flow resistance, elevation or
required pressure before the receiver). It decides about the water source 455 required disposable
pressure. You will wind info on critical receivers for individual water sources in the tables Results -
General 415 and Results - Water sources 426 . Additionally, in the picture, pipes supplying water from
the heat source to critical receivers will be highlighted with the blue- or pink background.
Highlighted hot water pipes supplying water to the critical receiver
9.4.23 Current data

The file with the data currently opened in the program.
9.4.24 Current layer
A current layer is the selected layer where elements from the tab Graphics will be entered.
The current layer will be selected with the pull-down list in the tab Graphics.
Current layer selection
See also: terms: Picture layers 444 , Current layer 432 , Default picture layers 433 , User layers 455 chapter
Other graphic elements drawing 72
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 432

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.4.25 Current project

The project based on the data file currently being used in the program.
9.4.26 Current table cell

The table cell with the caret.
9.4.27 Current table column

The column with the table cell currently under edition.
9.4.28 Current table row

The row with the table cell currently under edition.
9.4.29 Data file

A file with stored project data, of .h2d extension.
errors file 429
9.4.30 Default picture layers

Pictures in Audytor H2O program contain the series of layers 444 (0, Floors, Hot water pipes, Cold
water pipes, etc.) All picture components, except for those from the tab Graphics , are fixed
to their default layers 433 . Graphics tab elements can be positioned in the default layer
marked with "0" symbol, or any user created layer 455 .
See also: terms: Picture layers 444 , Current layer 432 , User layers 455
9.4.31 Default scanner interface

A scanner interface is the window where the user can establish scanner parameters, such as
resolution, color depth, scanning area, etc.
A default scanner interface is provided with the scanner and does not change its layout, regardless
on the program it is executed in.
See also: Scanning pictures 90
9.4.32 Dialogue
A dialogue is a typical user-computer communication method in the form of the temporary
displayed window. After entering data (selecting options) has been completed, the OK button is to
be pressed in the dialogue, in order to confirm the selection made. The Cancel button will close the
dialogue without entering any data.
Most dialogues are modal, meaning that before they are closed, no other program functions can be
executed, though switching to other currently running programs is possible.
See also: System dialogue 452
433 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
9.4.33 Dialogue tab selection
Tab dialogue example
To select a dialogue tab
Move the mouse cursor 440 over the required tab and double-click the left mouse key
Using button, enter the tabs, and then using arrow buttons highlight the
required tab. It is also possible to select the tab using the keyboard shortcuts +
appropriate underlined letter.
9.4.34 Distributing pipes

Pipes connecting water sources 455 with receivers 449 .
9.4.35 Drawing functions toolbar

Drawing functions toolbar (Toolbar Drawing) consists of the buttons executing commands for
installation diagram drawing and entering data on system components 32 .
As a default, it is displayed at the top of the main program window. It includes several regular- or
pull-down buttons 448 facilitating access to the components being drawn in the diagram and storey
views, as well as access to drawing functions. The tabs below the buttons enable category
selection for the components being drawn.
This toolbar has been described in detail in the chapter Entering data 21 in the point Drawing
functions toolbar 126 .
term Toolbar 454
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 434

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.4.36 Drawing mode

Drawing edition mode enabling drawing, moving and deleting in the drawing part of the window 453 ,
as well as edition of data on the selected picture elements in the table part of the window 453 .
9.4.37 Draw-off accessories

Faucets, taps, hydrants, etc. In the program, the term receiver 449 is applied here.
9.4.38 Draw-off points

See receiver 449 .
9.4.39 DWG
Standard AutoCAD program format, frequently used for computer-created technical drawings.
9.4.40 DXF
Common vector format for technical drawings. Because of its wide compatibility, it is often applied
to move technical drawings between programs.
9.4.41 EMF
Enhanced WMF 456 format containing more detailed picture description, recommended when
inserting vector pictures from other applications into the program.
9.4.42 Equipment
Washbasins, bathtubs, toilets, bidets, etc.
9.4.43 Error list

While performing calculations, the program will store the series of warning messages into the error
list. These messages may contain warnings about improper operation conditions of some system
components, as well as detection of critical errors. You can learn more about error list here 373 .
9.4.44 Error location

The error list 373 window has been equipped with the error location function which will display the
installation diagram window and the relevant table, simultaneously highlighting the cell ascribed to
the searched error.
To execute the error location function
Use arrow buttons to select one of the error messages, and then press button.
Move the mouse cursor 440 onto the error message, and then double-click it with the left
435 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
mouse key.
9.4.45 File
A file is the collection of data on the disc. To select the required file on the disc, enter its name with
the proper extension 436 and the folder 437 this file is located in. A file can contain eg. a picture, text
or program data.
errors file 429
9.4.46 File extensions

A file extension is this part of a file name which follows after a dot, and signifies the category to
which this file belongs.
Program Audytor H2O uses the following file extensions:
.h2d Data file extension.
.~h2d Previous version of the data file.
.h2e Error list 435 file extension.
.h2r Calculations results file extension.
.blo Block definitions file extension.
.lab Components labels definitions file extension.
The remaining file extensions are typical for the operating system.
errors file 429
9.4.47 Filter
A scheme for searching files on a disc. The same characters can be used in filters as in file
names, and additionally ? and * characters.
A question mark ? signifies any character, while an asterisk * marks the beginning of a free
character chain in the file name or -extension.
Examples:
*.* All files.

*.txt All files with .txt extension.
a*.* All files starting with a letter.
See also: File 436 , Folder 437 , File extensions 436
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 436

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.4.48 Fittings
Fittings are elbows, bends, S-bends, by-passes, compensators, reductions, etc.
9.4.49 Flow coefficient Kv

This coefficient describes accessories 428 capacity, it is relative to the waterflow in
m 3/h caused by the pressure difference of 100 000 Pa (1 bar).
9.4.50 Flowmeter (watermeter)

A device to measure water amount supplied to the selected system fragment.
9.4.51 Folder
Disc data is stored as files 436 which are saved in the folder structure.
Folders are also often referred to as catalogues.
9.4.52 GIF (Graphics Interchange Format)

Raster graphics format supporting 16 and 256 color-palettes. LZW-type compression 443 is applied.
It is the standard Internet line-art-type pictures format.
9.4.53 Governing accessories

Initial preset valves, domestic hot water thermostatic valves, flow governors, choking orifices, etc.
9.4.54 Graphic blocks

Graphic blocks are fragments of the picture saved with the purpose of being used in subsequent
projects.
The program is equipped with the block set containing typical system fragments.
Graphic blocks can be inserted 67 into any position in the picture. It is also possible to define own
blocks 68 consisting of freely selected picture fragments.
Using ready blocks will facilitate the process of drawing the installation diagram.
9.4.55 Graphic formats

The most common graphic formats have been described below:
WMF 456 (Windows Metafile)
Basic vector graphics Microsoft Windows format. The specifics of this format can described as the
"manual" for the computer on how to draw the stored picture. Its advantages are compatibility with
many programs and small file volume.
EMF 435 (Enhanced Metafile)
Enhanced WMF format.
437 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
BMP 429 (Windows Bitmap)
Basic raster graphics Microsoft Windows format. Its advantage is compatibility with many
programs, the disadvantage – significant file sizes. Even though the format specification assumes
RLE-type compression 443 , the majority of common programs will not utilize it.
TIFF 454 (Tagged Image File Format)
Very common raster graphics format. Its advantage is compatibility with many programs and
operation systems. LZW-type compression 443 possible. The files of this format often have the ".tif"
extension.
JPG 439 (JPEG File Interchange Format)
Best photo image format. Applied lossy compression will assure the proper photographic quality
with insignificant file volumes. It is the standard Internet photo image format.
GIF 437 (Graphics Interchange Format)
Raster graphics format supporting 16 and 256 color-palettes. LZW-type compression 443 is applied.
It is the standard Internet line-art-type pictures format.
DWG 435
Basic AutoCAD program format, frequently used for computer-created technical drawings.
DXF 435
Common vector format for technical drawings. Because of its wide compatibility, it is often applied
to move technical drawings between programs.
See also: Scanning pictures 90 , Raster graphics 449 , Vector graphics 455 , Picture compression 443
9.4.56 Gravitation pressure

Additional active pressure caused by the water density difference in hot water distributing pipes 434
In the program, gravitation pressure is computed with the account for water cooling in all hot water-
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 438

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.4.57 Grid
The graphic window can feature the grid facilitating establishing ordinates of picture elements.
Dialogue Drawing properties 309 will enable the user to set the grid resolution.
Grid
9.4.58 Heat source

Device for hot water preparation, frequently boiler, heat accumulator or heat exchanger.
9.4.59 Help info table cells

For each table cell help info is available. Its layout depends on the specification of the value being
entered: it can be a dialogue with the short description of this value, as well as a catalogue or list to
select the appropriate value from. You can learn more about help info here 106 .
9.4.60 Help system

Help system is the flexibly constructed program's manual facilitating location of the necessary
information on program features and components. You can learn more about help system here 19 .
9.4.61 Icon
An icon is a small picture which can be applied to mark command buttons, defined by users while
customizing toolbars 262 .
9.4.62 Initial preset

Some valves in the system are equipped with a function of gradual or dynamic control of the flow
coefficient Kv 437 . The control will be performed by establishing a specific value on the valve, so
called initial preset. The program will perform calculations for required initial presets of control
valves mounted on circulation pipes. In case of thermostatic valves in hot water circulation circuits,
the program will also calculate temperature initial presents on the valves.
9.4.63 JPG (JPEG File Interchange Format)

Best picture format. Applied lossy compression 443 will assure the proper photographic quality with
insignificant file volumes. It is the standard Internet picture format. The files 436 in this format have
got JPG or JPEG extension 436 .
439 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
9.4.64 Kv
See Flow coefficient Kv 437 .
9.4.65 List element selection
To select a list element
Move the mouse cursor 440 over the list element to be selected and double-click the left
mouse key.
Using button, enter the list, and then using arrow keys highlight the element to
be selected from the list, and press button.
9.4.66 Local resistance coefficient

Used to estimate pressure losses generated by local resistance.
W2
Z [ Pa ]
2
where:
Z - pressure losses generated by local resistance, [Pa];

- local resistance coefficients total;
W - waterflow velocity, [m/s];
- water density, [kg/m 3].
9.4.67 Main program folder

Disc folder 437 with stored program files, to be selected during the program installation.
9.4.68 Mouse cursor
Mouse cursor is the graphic indicator (eg. arrow , hourglass ) reflecting the mouse movements
on the screen.
See also: Thread cursor 454
9.4.69 Optical and interpolated resolution

In case of many scanners available in shops, the maximum scanning resolution exceeds their
optical resolution.
Optical resolution is the true resolution of the scanning process. Higher resolutions are
interpolated. When selecting the latter, you will obtain the mosaic consisting of the required
number of pixels, still the scanning process will proceed with the significantly lower optical
resolution, and the "lacking" pixels are interpolated (as intermediate colors). Such process will
naturally not produce the larger amount of visible details, but only "blurring" the image, and it will
increase the necessary memory volume.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 440

Audytor H2O 1.5
Interpolation example
The interpolation example has been shown in the picture above. The picture obtained is blurred, but
it does not show the large number of details. Interpolation can be sometimes justified for photo
images, it is however not the recommended for technical drawings.
It is therefore recommended that the scanning resolution does not exceed the scanner
optical resolution (which is usually to be found in the scanner manual).
See also: Raster graphics 449
9.4.70 Ordinate
An ordinate is a graphics element for presenting the particular level, eg. of a floor.
+ 1,84
Ordinate signature
9.4.71 Overall table

An overall table (overall list) in the program contains synthetic list of elements of the given category.
In such a table, each element corresponds to one table row only, whereas in other tables one
element can be featured in many table rows.
9.4.72 Own graphic blocks

The user of the program can create 68 own graphic blocks 437 .
441 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
9.4.73 Picture active view

The view of the picture most recently activated with the mouse-click.
Active vie w distinguished

w ith dark blue fram e.
Picture active view
9.4.74 Picture calibration button

Picture calibration button is one of the pull-down buttons 448 for selecting the picture scale. After
being pressed, it will display the list enabling the selection of the required scale.
The list of possible picture scales
The buttons in the end part of the list are as follows:
Tool Zoom+ will zoom in (enhance) the picture currently being viewed.
Tool Zoom- will zoom out (reduce) the picture currently being viewed.
Tool Zoom – all will select the picture scale, so that the entire picture is visible in
the window.
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 442

Audytor H2O 1.5
Tool Zoom – range will establish the picture scale, so that the entire picture area
is visible.
Tool Zoom – window enables the user to highlight the part of the picture to be
visible. After pressing the button, show the required fragment with the mouse.
After clicking the button Zoom – dynamic, the user will dynamically select the
required preview scale by moving the mouse with the button simultaneously
pressed.
Tool Previous scale retrieves the previously applied scale of the picture.
Opens the dialogue Drawing properties 309 , establishing properties for creating the
current picture (grid, mouse snap precision, rulers, etc.).
9.4.75 Picture compression

Compression is a method of picture data processing, so that it takes minimum possible memory
volume.
The subject of compression has been described here only informatively. In the program
Audytor H2O, compression is performed automatically and the user will not have to
decide about it.
To form the idea, compression can be explained in the following way: information "100 blue points"
takes less place than the same information given as "1 blue point, 1 blue point, 1 blue point, etc..."
repeated 100 times.
Generally, compression can be lossless and lossy. Lossless compression will later re-create the
original picture without any changes. Lossy compression, however, will not re-create the exact
original, will produce a close copy.
For pictures (eg. technical drawings), lossless compression is usually applied, and for photo
images lossy compression gives very satisfactory results.
See also: Compression methods 431
9.4.76 Picture edge

After being inserted into the project, the picture will be surrounded with a special line, which is the
picture edge. It will not be visible in the printout, but enables selecting the picture while working
with the project, in order to move it, or for edition 100 . When the mouse cursor approaches the edge,
it will change color into bright green, and after being selected - into red (these colors are default).
443 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Picture's edge
Double-clicking the picture edge will open the dialogue Picture properties 329 .
WARNING!!!
Do not mistake the picture edge which does not belong to the picture with the frame
which can optionally become the picture element.
9.4.77 Picture layers

The layer concept has been applied in the pictures. Each layer has the following parameter
ascribed:
line style,
line thickness,
line color,
filling color,
font style,
font size,
info on whether the layer is visible on the screen,
info on whether the layer is printable.
In case of the calculations data picture, parameters of individual layers can be modified with the
command Picture layers format 232 , called from menu Data 225 .
In case of the calculations results picture, parameters of individual layers can be modified with the
command Picture layers format 245 , called from menu Results 234 .
Individual graphic elements are ascribed to particular picture layers.
The program always creates a default layer set for storing system components (pipes, receivers
449 , equipment 435 , accessories 428 , etc.), and labels 452 for these components. Such layers will not
be deleted, also some of their parameters are unmodifiable. System components are fixed to their
layers, and therefore not movable onto other layers. For instance, hot water pipes are fixed to the
layer of the relevant name Hot water pipes, cold water pipes - Cold water pipes, etc.
It is however possible to add or delete own layers 455 , and insert into them such graphic elements
as: lines, circles, rectangles, text fields and text labels (tab Graphics in the drawing functions
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 444

Audytor H2O 1.5
toolbar 434 ). Command Move onto another layer will move the elements mentioned above
onto different user-created layers.
Adding new layers has been described in detail in the point Other graphic elements drawing 72 .
See also: terms: Current layer 432 , Default picture layers 433 , User layers 455
9.4.78 Picture processing scheme

Picture processing scheme is the commands list to be executed in the picture. The user can edit
the processing scheme and check its results on the selected sample (picture's part).
You can learn more about the picture processing scheme here 100 .
9.4.79 Picture scale selection

You can select the picture scale in the following ways:
– Using the picture calibration button 442 in the top-left corner of the picture.
Picture calibration button located in the picture's corner
– Using the commands in menu View 206 .
– Using the pop-up menu 447 for the picture.
9.4.80 Pipe insulation efficiency

This value will establish the level of pipe heat losses when insulation has been applied.
Insulation efficiency has been defined according to the following formula:
Qins
ins 1 100% %
Qo
where:
Qins - is the heat returned by the insulated pipe;
Qo - is the heat returned by the uninsulated pipe, laid out in the open room area.
445 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
9.4.81 Pipe types surrogate symbol

In the program, surrogate symbols for pipe types are applied (A, B, C, D, etc.). Specific pipe types
should be ascribed to their surrogate symbols in the dialogue Data - General 297 , in the table
General data - Pipes 396 .
9.4.82 Pipe-run
Pipe segment of a steady diameter, together with mounted appliances and accessories 428 , with
steady water flux.
9.4.83 Pipe-run number (symbol)

Consists of two parts: the riser number (symbol) 450 for the pipe-run, and the pipe-run number
(symbol) within a riser 446 .
9.4.84 Pipe-run number (symbol) within a riser

Consists of maximum five characters (numbers and letters).
9.4.85 Pixel
A pixel is the smallest screen element. Raster picture 449 is the mosaic consisting of pixels of
different colors.
Raster graphics example

(pixels magnified)
See also: Scanning pictures 90 , Raster graphics 449 , Vector graphics 455 , Bitmap 428 , Graphic formats
437
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 446

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.4.86 Pop-up menu

Menu displayed when pressing the right hand-side mouse key. Commands available in the pop-up
menu depend on the mouse cursor screen location.
Exemplary pop-up menu
Using the pop-up menu has been described in detail in the point Pop-up menu 268 .
9.4.87 Previous pipe-run, previous pipe

The pipe-run located closer to the water source, in connection with the current pipe-run.
9.4.88 Program Audytor HL

The program calculating heat load for individual rooms, as well as the entire building. To move
results from the program Audytor HL, you can also use the import function executed while entering
data on rooms 29 .
9.4.89 Program control menu

Menu positioned in the top-left corner of the main program window 448 , containing commands for
dimensions-changing, moving the program window, switching to other applications and closing the
program.
To open program control menu
447 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Press button combination .
Move the mouse cursor over the menu button, and then click with the left mouse key.
9.4.90 Program main window

In the program main window, you will find windows on data 21 , calculations results 142 and
materials lists 163 . The title bar displays the name of the program, and optionally current data 433 file-
and active window name. You can learn more about the program main window here 374 .
9.4.91 Program parameters

The set of parameters influencing the program's operation. These parameters control automatic
data saving, fonts used, and automatic room numbering on subsequent storeys. They are to be
established in the dialogue Program parameters 346 , called from the main menu with the command
Parameters 247 .
9.4.92 Program title bar

Top part of the main program window 374 with the program name and the current data file 433 name.
9.4.93 Pull-down button

Pull-down buttons are marked with blackened bottom-right corners.
Example of the pull-down button
Pull-down buttons have ascribed commands and picture elements. Clicking such a button will
select the command or element currently ascribed to this button.
To modify the command or picture's element ascribed to the button, move the mouse cursor over
the button, and then press and hold the left mouse key. After a while, below the button the list with
available commands or picture's elements will unroll. From this list, as from the ordinary menu,
select the required command or the picture's element.
The list of appliances (eg. washbasins) can be modified with the command Edit . The relevant
dialogue will be then displayed, for editing the list contents.
In the drawing functions toolbar 434 , you will find a series of buttons facilitating access to individual
system components, as well as configuration of appliances sets in the project.
See also: Using pull-down buttons 44
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 448

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.4.94 Raster graphics

In the raster (bitmap) graphics, the picture is a mosaic of multicolored elements called pixels 446 .
Exemplary raster picture has been shown below:
Raster graphics example

(pixels magnified)
Raster pictures usually require more memory than vector ones. Their quality depends among
others on resolution. The higher the resolution, the better "precision" with which the picture is
stored, but also bigger memory consumption.
Raster pictures are obtained as a result of scanning 90 the "paper original", and can be then used
as underlays 89 .
See also: Scanning pictures 90 , Pixel 446 , Vector graphics 455 , Bitmap 428 , Graphic formats 437
9.4.95 Receiver
In the program, receivers are draw-off accessories 435 (faucets, taps, hydrants, etc.) and devices
supplied with cold- or hot water (washing machines, dishwashers, shower panels, etc.).
9.4.96 Recommended resolution

Proper resolution selection is very important, as the scanning resolution 451 influences decisively
the quality of the final printout, and computer memory consumption by the picture.
It is recommended to apply the automatic resolution selection, basing on the original- and the final
printout scales, original quality and required final printout quality. Advanced users can however
attempt to determine the resolution manually.
WARNING!!!
In case of using the scanner default interface, select the recommended resolution
manually in the scanner interface.
See also: Scanning pictures 90 , Raster graphics 449
9.4.97 Reference ordinate

A reference ordinate is the graphic element for establishing the starting point of the coordinates
system in the picture (0:0 point). 0.00 level is displayed in the reference ordinate in red.
+ 0,00
449 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
Reference ordinate signature
(red color)
9.4.98 Remote pipe linking

Remote pipe linking (connecting) will connect pipes if it is necessary to draw the system fragment
in a separate position in the picture. Remote pipes linkings are used among others to transparently
show manifold systems.
The altitude difference of 0.7 m

w ill be autom atically adde d
to the length of the pipe.
0,70
Re m ote pipe linking
You can learn more about remote pipe linking here 47 .
9.4.99 Remote pipe linking between the pictures

Remote pipe linking between the pictures will connect pipes positioned in two pictures. It is most
frequently used when the installation diagram scheme is large and does not fit into one picture.
Also, it can be used for pipe connections within one picture. You can learn more about remote pipe
linking between the pictures here 47 .
9.4.100 Riser number (symbol)

Consists of maximum three characters (numbers and letters).
9.4.101 Room number (symbol)

Consists of maximum eight characters (numbers and letters).
9.4.102 Room zone
Graphic representation of the room data. In the installation diagram drawing, a room will be
represented as a rectangle with the attached label 452 .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 450

Audytor H2O 1.5
Room zone signature
All installation diagram elements (pipes, receivers, equipment, accessories) inside the room zone
are automatically ascribed to it. Therefore, the program will automatically recognize where
receivers are and where pipes are laid, which will enable automatic water cooling calculations for
hot water- and circulation pipes. You can learn more about room zones here 63 .
9.4.103 Scanning area

Scanning area is the selected part of the scanner working area to be scanned. Scanning area is to
be selected either in the default scanner interface 433 , or in the dialogue Scanning 358 .
9.4.104 Scanning resolution

Scanning resolution is a "precision" with which the scanner recreates the scanned original as the
pixel 446 mosaic. Traditionally, resolution has been given in dots per inch (dpi). Eg. 300 dpi means
that the scanned picture of 1 x 1 inch dimensions will be recreated as a mosaic of 300 x 300 pixels
(total of 90000 pixels).
The higher the resolution, the more precise the original recreation, but at the same time the larger
necessary memory volume (it is proportional to square resolution value). Eg. a picture scanned
with 300 dpi resolution will take 4 times larger memory than the one of 150 dpi resolution. Selecting
high resolution can cause difficulties with further edition of the picture, or even totally unable
opening. This is especially valid for the computers equipped with relatively small RAM memory.
To avoid confusion with scanning, the program has been equipped with the automatic
selection of the optimal resolution.
Also consider the maximum optical resolution of your scanner.
See also: Scanning pictures 90 , Raster graphics 449 , Vector graphics 455
451 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
9.4.105 Scrollbar
Scrollbars are displayed in the bottom-right window edge. Scrollbar indicators show the positioning
of the window part currently being displayed.
With the mouse, you can scroll window contents, so that various fragments are visible. Horizontal
scrollbar moves window contents to the left- or right, and the vertical one - up- and downwards.
Horizontal scrollbar
9.4.106 Sorting filter

Sorting filter is a criterion according to which the tables are sorted 107 .
9.4.107 Standard diameter

A symbolic pipe- or accessories 428 diameter. Nominal diameter is generally different from the true
geometric diameter. In case of steel pipes, the nominal diameter will be usually close to the internal
pipe diameter. For plastic pipes, it is frequently (though not always) the external pipe diameter.
9.4.108 Status bar

Status bar is displayed at the bottom of the main program window 374 . It displays the information
concerning the current status of the program, such as: info on highlighted graphic elements, hints
on pointed tools 454 and menu commands, etc.
Exemplary layout of the status bar
9.4.109 System components labels

System components labels are used for presenting in the pictures data and calculations results on
receivers, equipment, pipes and accessories. Their layout can be modified with the command
Component label format 233 , called from menu Data 225 (in case of calculations data pictures) or
menu Results 234 (in case of calculations results pictures). System components labels are
permanently ascribed to default picture layers 433 .
9.4.110 System dialogue

System dialogue is the default dialogue 433 available in the Windows operating system, not in the
program. Eg. the system dialogue is the one applied to establish printer parameters. The system
dialogue texts language will depend from the Windows language version. Exact dialogue layout
depends on the system version (eg. Windows 2000, Windows Me, Windows XP).
9.4.111 System fragments copying

The program has been equipped with copying functions for system fragments, with pipe-runs 446 -
and rooms renumbering. System fragments can be copied horizontally 124 , as well as vertically 125 .
Copying functions are available in menu Edit 198 .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 452

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.4.112 System pictures window drawing part

Part of the window with system pictures meant for drawing the installation diagram elements
(window Data - Pictures 371 ), or viewing calculations results in the graphic form (window Results -
Pictures 378 ).
Drawing part of the window Data - Pictures
9.4.113 System pictures window table part

Part of the window with system pictures meant for entering data on highlighted system
components (window Data - Pictures 371 ), or viewing calculations results in the table form (window
Results - Pictures 378 ).
Table part of the window Data - Pictures
Graphic tabs under the table will select data- or calculations results categories viewed or edited in
the table part.
453 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
9.4.114 Table heading

First table lines, where you will find symbols of values positioned in individual columns.
Table heading
9.4.115 Text label

Any picture component's label enabling inserting any text.
9.4.116 Thread cursor

Thread cursor is a kind of mouse cursor 440 , with two main elements: two crossing lines – vertical
and horizontal.
Thread cursor
9.4.117 TIFF (Tagged Image File Format)

Very common raster graphics format. Its advantage is compatibility with many programs and
operation systems. LZW-type compression 443 possible. Files of this format often have the ".tif"
extension 436 .
9.4.118 Toolbar
Toolbars contain buttons marked with symbols for various commands. Toolbars facilitate access
to frequently performed commands. The example toolbar has been presented in the picture below.
term Toolbar 454
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 454

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.4.119 TWAIN specification

TWAIN specification defines the default communication protocol between programs and picture-
generating devices (eg. a scanner). Unfortunately, not all available scanner drivers entirely fulfill this
specification.
9.4.120 Unitary linear pressure drop R

Pressure drop with the water flow through the pipe of one meter length, caused by linear flow
resistance, R [Pa/m].
9.4.121 User layers

Users of the program can add their own picture layers 444 . It is then possible to insert elements
from the tab Graphics onto added layers, as well as onto the "0" layer. All remaining picture
components are fixed to their default layers 433 .
See also: terms: Picture layers 444 , Current layer 432 , Default picture layers 433
9.4.122 Vector graphics

In vector graphics, the picture consists of elements such as segments, ellipses, curves, etc.
Vector pictures are technically lists of commands to be executed in order to create such a picture,
as opposite to raster graphics 449 which is the mosaic of multicolored points (pixels).
Exemplary vector picture has been shown below:
Exemplary vector graphics
In case of technical drawings, vector graphics usually assures better quality with
significantly smaller memory consumption than raster graphics. Large enhancements are
possible and of acceptable quality, unlike in raster pictures.
Vector pictures are usually created with dedicated programs, such as AutoCAD or CorelDraw.
Scanning 90 however will produce raster pictures 449 as results.
See also: Scanning pictures 90 , Raster graphics 449 , Graphic formats 437
9.4.123 Water source

Water supplying point for the system.
455 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

9 Annexes
9.4.124 Watermeter
See flowmeter 437 .
9.4.125 Window control menu

Menu positioned in the window top-left corner, containing commands for dimensions-changing,
moving the program window, switching to other windows and closing the window.
Calling window control menu
9.4.126 Window title bar

Top part of the window with the window name and buttons on the left- and right hand-side.
Window title bar
WARNING!!!
If the window is maximized (takes the entire available program window), then the
window title bar will not be displayed, and the active window title is shown in the
program title bar 448 .
9.4.127 WMF
Basic vector graphics Microsoft Windows format. Specifics of this format can described as the
"manual" for the computer on how to draw the stored picture. Its advantages are compatibility with
many programs and small file volume.
Newer Microsoft Windows system vector graphics format is EMF 435 .
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 456

Audytor H2O 1.5
9.4.128 Xp deviation
Deviation deciding about the control quality of thermostatic valves. It informs how much must the
thermostatic valve head temperature increase in order to close the valve completely.
kV m 3/h
Valve characteristics
2.0
Xp = 15K
1.5
Xp = 5K
1.0
0.5
0.0
40 45 50 55 t °C
Selecting valves for large control deviation eg. Xp = 15 K will reduce the quality of the system
control. Xp deviations exceeding 5 K should be applied only when the necessity of reducing the
valve hydraulic resistance arises (larger kv coefficient).
457 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

Index
Calculations results 142
Index Circulation circuits 158
Critical error 432
Detecting and removing errors 139
-A- Dialogue Calculations 290
Equipment and draw-off points 153
About - menu Help 259
error 429
Accessories 428 Error list 162
Accessories type-set 428
General results 143
Command Accessories - menu Results 237
Heat sources 149
Dialogue Accessories set 287
Materials lists 163
drawing 61
Menu Calculations 234
List 173
Pipes 151
Preset 439
Presets 160
Results 155
Results as plan views 145
Table Data - Accessories 380
Results as the graphic installation diagram 145
Table Data - Equipment and draw-off accessories
387 Rooms 156
Table Materials - Accessories 397 Water sources 147
Table Materials - Accessories overall table 397 Calculations parameters 429
Table Results - Accessories 409 Calculations results 283
Table Results - Equipment and draw-off Calibrating 326
accessories 422 Cascade - menu Window 253
Accessories - materials 243 Catalogue 290, 430
Accessories - menu Results 237 Command Catalogues > Accessories catalogue
231
Accessories table - materials 243
Command Catalogues > Heat sources catalogue
Accessories type-set 428
231
Active Command Catalogues > Isolation catalogue
pressure 428
231
Align horizontally - menu Window 254 Command Catalogues > Pipes catalogue 231
Align vertically - menu Window 254 Command Catalogues > Producers catalogue
Arrange icons - menu Window 255 231
Audytor HL 447 Command Catalogues > Receivers catalogue
231
-B- Dialogue Accessories catalogue 286
Dialogue Heat sources catalogue 315
Bitmap 428
Bitmaps painting 428 Dialogue Insulation catalogue 317
Dialogue Pipes catalogue 334
Bitmaps painting 428
Dialogue Producers catalogue 346
BMP (Windows Bitmap) 429, 437
Dialogue Receivers catalogue 351
Branch
Command Branches - menu Results 238 Dialogue Sets catalogue 364
Results 157 Catalogue (folder) 437
Table Results - Branches 411 Catalogue data base 430
Branches - menu Results 238 Catalogue symbol 430
Building 429 Catalogues - menu Data 230
Building zone 429 central hot water preparation 271
Circulation
-C- Circuit 430
Calculations 138 Circulation circuit 430

Accessories 155 Command Circulation circuits - menu Results
Branches 157 238
Calculations error 429 Results 158
Calculations parameters 429 Table Results - Circulation circuits 413
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 458

Audytor H2O 1.5
Circulation circuits - menu Results 238 Command Picture layers format 232
Command Pictures 226
Clipboard 184, 430
Clipboard symbol 67 Command Save data 180
Command Copy 200 Command Save data as 181
Command Cut 200 Command Variables 227
Command Paste 200 Dialogue Data - General 297
Entering pictures from the clipboard 93 Dialogue Open data 317
Dialogue Save data 357
Clipboard symbol 67
Entering data 21
Close - menu File 197
Entering variables 31
Close all - menu Window 257
General data 22
Close window - menu Window 256
Menu Data 225
Coefficient Room data 29
Kv 437
Table Data - Accessories 380
Color Table Data - Equipment and draw-off accessories
Color representation 430
387
Color depth 430 Table Data - Graphics 381
Color representation 430 Table Data - Heat sources 382
Component label format - menu Data 233 Table Data - Pipes 385
Components Table Data - Remote pipes linking 391
data edition mode 431 Table Data - Rooms 391
Compression Table Data - Texts 392
Compression methods 431 Table Data - Water sources 393
Compression methods 431 Table General data - Diameters 395
Connecting plan view item with its installation diagram Table General data - Pipes 396
equivalent 82 Default
Copy - menu Edit 200 picture layer 433
Copy left - menu Edit 205 scanner interface 433
Copy right - menu Edit 205 Default picture layers 433
Copy to Windows clipboard- menu File 184 Default scanner interface 433
Copying system fragments 271 Delete - menu Edit 201
Create block - menu Edit 206 Delete row - menu Edit 201
Critical Deviation
error 432 Xp 457
Cropping 326 Dialogue 433
Current data 432 Accessories catalogue 286
Current picture Accessories set 287
layer 432 Block creation 289
Current project 433 Blocks 289
Calculations 290
Current table cell 433
Catalogue data - receivers set 290
Current table column 433
Customize toolbars 292
Current table row 433
Data - General 297
Customize toolbars - menu View 207
Data - Labels format 304
Cut - menu Edit 200
Dialogue tab selection 434
-D- Drawing properties 309
Floors systems creation 314
Data 14, 21, 29, 31, 228, 229, 230, 231 Format 315
Command Catalogues 230
Go to page 365
Command Component label format 233
Command Edit pictures list 226
Heat sources set 316
Command General 226
Icon selection 316
Command New data 179
Command Open data 179
459 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

Index
Dialogue 433 mode 435

Insulation set 317 Drawing basics 110
Levelling 326 Drawing functions
Open blocks 317 toolbar 126
Open data 317
Drawing properties - menu View 213
Open icons 318
Drawing: getting started 111
Open picture 320
Draw-off
Picture correction 321 accessories 387, 422
Picture layers 324
Draw-off accessories
Picture plot preview 328 Command Equipment and draw-off accessories -
Picture properties 329 menu Results 237
Picture type selection 332 Table Materials - Equipment and draw-off
Picture units 332 accessories 406
Pictures list 333 Table Materials - Equipment and draw-off
Pipes catalogue 334 accessories table 407
Pipes set 334 Draw-off point
Plot 334 List 171
Plot format 336 Results 153
Plot to file 338 Draw-off points
Plotting 338 Numbering 136
Print 339
DWG 90, 356, 435, 437
Print format 340 Command Save as DXF or DWG 182
Print to file 345
DXF 90, 356, 435, 437
Printing 346 Command Save as DXF or DWG 182
Program parameters 346 -E-
Receivers catalogue 351
Edit 199, 200, 201, 203, 204, 205, 206
Receivers set 351 Menu Edit 198
Replace 351
Results - Labels format 353 Edit pictures list - menu Data 226
Save as DXF or DWG 356 EMF (Enhanced Metafiles) 93, 356, 435, 437
Command Save as EMF or WMF 183
Save as EMF or WMF 356
Save blocks 356 Enhanced Metafiles 437
Save data 357 Entering data 21
Save picture 358 Entering pictures from a file 90
Scanning 358 Entering pictures from the clipboard 93
Search 363 Entering underlays into the project 89
Sets catalogue 364 Entering variables 31
Sorting 366 Equipment
System component parameters 367 Command Equipment and draw-off accessories -
Table print preview 368 menu Results 237
Text 368 List 171
Variables 370 Numbering 136
Results 153
Diameter
Table General data - Diameters 395 Table Data - Equipment and draw-off accessories
387
Dimensions - menu Data > Variables 229 Table Materials - Equipment and draw-off
Distributing accessories 406
pipe 434 Table Materials - Equipment and draw-off
Drawing accessories overall table 407
Basics 110 Table Results - Equipment and draw-off
Drawing functions toolbar 434 accessories 422
functions toolbar 434
Equipment and draw-off accessories - materials 244
Getting started 111
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 460

Audytor H2O 1.5
Equipment and draw-off accessories - menu Results General data 22

237 GIF (Graphics Interchange Format) 437
Equipment and draw-off accessories table - materials Global - menu Data > Variables 228
244 Governing
Error accessories 437
Command Error list - menu Results 239
Graphic block 206, 437
Error list 435 Command Create block 206
Error location 435 Dialogue Block creation 289
removing 282 Dialogue Save blocks 356
Window Error list 373 own 441
Error list 162, 282, 435 Own block creation 68
Error list - menu Results 239 Using ready blocks 67
Error location 435 Window Edit block 373
-F- Graphic element

Dimensions change 116
Faucet 271 Drawing 112
File 178, 184, 190, 191, 192, 195, 196, 197, 198, Rotating graphic elements 116
356, 436 Graphic elements
Calculations errors file 429 Selecting 115
Calculations results file 429
Graphic formats 437
Command New data 179
Graphics
Command Open data 179 Table Data - Graphics 381
Command Save as DXF or DWG 182
Graphics block
Command Save as EMF or WMF 183 Dialogue Blocks 289
Command Save data 180 Dialogue Open blocks 317
Command Save data as 181
Creating new data file 21 Graphics Interchange Format 437
Data file 433 Gravitation
pressure 438
Entering pictures from a file 90
File extensions 436 Grid 439
Menu File 178
Moving or copying project files 19
-H-
Heat
File extensions 436 calculations 15
Filter 436
Heat loses 447
Fitting
drawing 61 Heat source 439
Command Heat sources - menu Results 236
Floor Dialogue Heat sources set 316
Dialogue Floors systems creation 314
drawing 57
drawing 36
List 166
Floors system 271 Numbering 136
Flowmeter 437 Results 149
Flows - menu Data > Variables 230 Table Data - Heat sources 382
Folder 437 Table Materials - Heat sources 399
Font Table Materials - Heat sources overall table 399
Size 78 Table Results - Heat sources 417
Style 78
Heat sources - materials 241
Type 78
Heat sources - menu Results 236
Format table - menu View 224
Heat sources table - materials 241
-G- Help 19, 439
Command About 259
General - menu Data 226 Command Index 258
General - menu Results 235 Command Internet 258
461 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

Index
Help 19, 439 Local resistance invisible in the installation diagram

Command Send mail 258 271
Command Using help 258
Menu Help 257 -M-
Help info 106 Main program folder 440
Help info table cells 439 Material
Help system 19, 439 Command Accessories 243
Command Accessories - overall table 243
HL 447
Command Equipment and draw-off accessories
Hydraulic
calculations 15 244
Command Equipment and draw-off accessories -
-I- overall table 244
Command Heat sources 241
Icon Command Heat sources - overall table 241
Dialogue Icon selection 316
Command Insulation 243
Dialogue Open icons 318
Command Insulation - overall table 242
Index - menu Help 258 Command Materials lists - menu Results 239
Insert row - menu Edit 201 Command Pipes 242
Installation diagram Command Pipes - overall table 242
connecting plan view item with its installation Command Producers 245
diagram equivalent 82
Command Producers - overall table 244
Entering data on system components 32
Command Water sources 241
Installation diagram drawing 32
Command Water sources - overall table 240
Insulation Table Materials - Accessories 397
Dialogue Insulation set 317 Table Materials - Accessories overall table 397
List 169 Table Materials - Equipment and draw-off
Table Materials - Insulation 400 accessories 406
Table Materials - Insulation overall table 401 Table Materials - Equipment and draw-off
Insulation - materials 243 accessories overall table 407
Insulation table - materials 242 Table Materials - Heat sources 399
Internet - menu Help 258 Table Materials - Heat sources overall table 399
Table Materials - Insulation 400
-J- Table Materials - Insulation overall table 401
Table Materials - Pipes 402
JPEG File Interchange Format 437
Table Materials - Pipes overall table 403
JPG (JPEG File Interchange Format) 439
Table Materials - Producers 404
JPG (JPEG File Interchange Format) 437
Table Materials - Producers overall table 405
-K- Table Materials - Water sources 408
Table Materials - Water sources overall table
Kv 437 409
-L- Materials list

Accessories
163
173
Label Equipment and draw-off points 171
Deciding on label layout 78 Heat sources 166
drawing 65 Insulation - materials 169
Line Producers 174
Color 78 Water sources 164
Style 78
Materials lists
Thickness 78 Accessories 243
List Accessories - overall table 243
List element selection 440 Equipment and draw-off accessories 244
Local Equipment and draw-off accessories - overall table
resistance coefficient 440 244
Heat sources 241
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 462

Audytor H2O 1.5
Materials lists resolution 440

Heat sources - overall table 241 Ordinate 441
Insulation 243 drawing 36
Insulation - overall table 242 Original
Pipes 242 quality 358
Pipes - overall table 242 scale 358
Producers 245
Overall
Producers - overall table 244 table 441
Water sources 241
Own graphic blocks 441
Water sources - overall table 240
Materials lists - menu Results 239 -P-
Matrials list Parameters
Pipes 168 Menu Parameters 247
Maximize - menu Window 255 Paste - menu Edit 200
Menu 217, 227, 230, 447 Picture
Menu Calculations 234 Calibrating 94
Menu Data 225 calibration button 442
Menu Edit 198 Command Edit pictures list 226
Menu File 178 Command Move picture 223
Menu Help 257 Command Pictures - menu Data 226
Menu Parameters 247 Command Pictures - menu Results 236
Menu Results 234 Command Repaint picture 223
Menu structure 177 Copying picture onto the next storey 125
Menu View 206 Copying the picture horizontally 124
Menu Window 252 Cropping 94
Pop-up menu 268, 447 Deciding on picture layout 78
Program control menu 447 Dialogue Open picture 320
Window control menu 456 Dialogue Picture correction 321
Minimize - menu Window 255 Dialogue Picture layers 324
Minimize all - menu Window 256 Dialogue Picture properties 329
Mirror reflection 271 Dialogue Picture type selection 332
Mouse cursor 440 Dialogue Pictures list 333
Move picture - menu View 223 Dialogue Save picture 358
Entering pictures from a file 90
Moving or copying project files 19
Entering pictures from the clipboard 93
-N- Levelling 94
Picture active view 442
New data - menu File 179
Picture fragments copying 71
Next storey 271
Picture plot preview 328
Next storey - menu Edit 205 Processing 100
Numbering Scanning 90
draw-off points 136
Window Data - Pictures 371
equipment 136
Window Results - Pictures 378
heat sources 136
pipe systems 136 Picture active view 442
rooms 136 Picture at the top - menu View > Pictures window
system components 135 layout 220
water sources 136 Picture compression 443
Picture edge 443
-O- Picture layer 444
user-created 455
Open data - menu File 179
Picture layers format - menu Data 232
Open windows list - menu Window 257
Picture layers format - menu Results 245
Optical
Pictures - menu Data 226
463 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.
Index
Pictures - menu Results 236 Previous scale - menu View 223

Pictures window layout 218, 219, 220 Print
Pictures window layout - menu View 217 Command Print 191
Command Print format 184
Pipe
Command Pipes - menu Results 236 Command Print preview 190
Dialogue Pipes set 334 preview 376
drawing 47 Print - menu File 191
insulation efficiency 445 Print format - menu File 184
linking 47 Print preview - menu File 190
List 168
Printing
Numbering 136 Dialogue Print 339
Remote pipe linking 450 Dialogue Print format 340
Results 151 Dialogue Print to file 345
Table Data - Pipes 385 Dialogue Printing 346
Table Data - Remote pipes linking 391 Dialogue Table print preview 368
Table General data - Pipes 396 Window Print preview 376
Table Materials - Pipes overall table 403
Printout 376
Table Materials - Pipes table 402 quality 358
Table Results - Pipes 419 scale 358
Pipe insulation efficiency 445 Producer
Pipe types surrogate symbol 446 Command Producers 245
Pipe-run 446 Command Producers - overall table 244
Pipe-run number (symbol) 446 List 174
Pipe-run number (symbol) within a riser 446 Table Materials - Producers 404
Pipes - materials 242 Table Materials - Producers overall table 405
Pipes - menu Results 236 Program
Pipes table - materials 242 Audytor HL 447
Command About 259
Pixel 446
Dialogue Program parameters 346
Plot
Command Plot format 192 Leaving the program 197
Command Plot picture 196 Main program folder 440
Command Plot preview 195 Main program window 374
preview 376 Program main window 448
Program parameters 247, 448
Plot format - menu File 192
Program title bar 448
Plot picture - menu File 196
Program work area 18
Plot preview - menu File 195
title bar 448
Plotting
Dialogue Plot 334 Program main window 448
Dialogue Plot format 336 Program parameters 247, 346, 448
Dialogue Plot to file 338 Pull-down
Dialogue Plotting 338 button 44, 448
Picture plot preview 328 Pull-down button
Window Plot preview 376 using 44
Preset 439
Command Presets - menu Results 238 -R-
Results 160 Raster
Table Results - Presets 421 graphics 449
Presets - menu Results 238 Recently opened projects - menu File 198
Pressures - menu Data > Variables 229 Recommended
resolution 449
Previous
pipe 447 Reference
pipe-run 447 ordinate 449
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 464

Audytor H2O 1.5
Reference ordinate 271 Water sources 147

Remote pipe linking 450 Results labels format - menu Results 247
Remote pipes connecting 450 Riser
Number (symbol) 450
Removing errors 282
Repaint picture - menu View 223 Room 450
drawing 63
Replace - menu Edit 203
Number (symbol) 450
Resolution
interpolated 440 Numbering 136
Resolution selection 90 Results 156
Table Data - Rooms 391
Restore - menu Window 255
Table Results - Rooms 425
Results
Accessories 155 Room data 29, 271
as plan views 145 Room zone 450
as the graphic installation diagram 145 drawing 63
Branches 157 Rooms 29
Circulation circuits 158 Command Rooms - menu Results 237
Command Accessories 237 Rooms - menu Results 237
Command Branches 238
Command Circulation circuits 238 -S-
Command Equipment and draw-off accessories Save as DXF or DWG - menu File 182
237
Save as EMF or WMF - menu File 183
Command Error list 239
Save data - menu File 180
Command General 235
Save data as - menu File 181
Command Heat sources 236
Command Materials lists 239 Scale
Command Previous scale 223
Command Picture layers format 245
Picture scale selection 445
Command Pictures 236
Command Pipes 236 Scanning 90
resolution 451
Command Presets 238
Scanning area 451
Command Results labels format 247
Command Rooms 237 Scanning area 451
Command Water sources 236 Scheme
Picture processing scheme 445
Dialogue Results - Labels format 353
Equipment and draw-off points 153 Scroll
bar 452
Error list 162
General 143 Search - menu Edit 201
Heat sources 149 Search next - menu Edit 204
Materials lists 163 Send mail - menu Help 258
Menu Results 234 Sort table - menu View 224
Pipes 151 Sorting
Presets 160 Sorting filter 452
Rooms 156 Sorting filter 452
Table Results - Accessories 409 Standard
Table Results - Branches 411 diameter 452
Table Results - Circulation circuits 413 Status
Table Results - Equipment and draw-off bar 452
accessories 422
Storey plan view
Table Results - General 415 connecting plan view item with its installation
Table Results - Heat sources 417 diagram equivalent 82
Table Results - Pipes 419
System
Table Results - Presets 421 components labels 452
Table Results - Rooms 425 dialogue 452
Table Results - Water sources 426
System fragments copying 71, 452
465 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

Index
System pictures window drawing part 453 Results - Circulation circuits 413
Results - Equipment and draw-off accessories
System pictures window table part 453
422
-T- Results - General 415
Results - Heat sources 417
Tab Results - Pipes 419
Accessories 61, 131
Results - Presets 421
Appliances 131
Results - Rooms 425
Construction 36, 63, 132
Results - Water sources 426
Copying ad blocks 67
Table heading 454
Copying and blocks 68, 71, 134
Table navigation 106
Equipment and draw-off accessories 130
Graphics 72, 82, 90, 93, 133 Table at the bottom - menu View > Pictures window
Heat sources 57, 128 layout 219
Pipes 47, 129 Table heading 454
Plan views 134 Table on the left - menu View > Pictures window
Water sources 55, 128 layout 218
Table on the right - menu View > Pictures window
Table
Command Format table 224 layout 218
Command Sort table 224 Tagged Image File Format 437
Current cell 433 Temperatures - menu Data > Variables 229
Current column 433 Text
Dialogue Text 368
Current row 433
label 454
Data - Accessories 380
Table Data - Texts 392
Data - Equipment and draw-off accessories 387
Data - Graphics 381 Thread
Data - Heat sources 382 cursor 454
Data - Pipes 385 TIFF (Tagged Image File Format) 93, 437, 454
Data - Remote pipes linking 391 Tiles - menu Window 253
Data - Rooms 391 Tool
Data - Texts 392 bar 454
Data - Water sources 393 Toolbar
Dialogue Table print preview 368 Command Customize toolbars 207
Entering table data 105 Command Toolbars 212
General data - Diameters 395 Dialogue Customize toolbars 292
General data - Pipes 396 Toolbars - menu View 212
Help info 106 Tools
Help info table cells 439 Toolbar 454
Materials - Accessories 397 TWAIN 455
Materials - Accessories overall table 397
Materials - Equipment and draw-off accessories -U-
406, 407
Underlay
Materials - Heat sources 399 Entering into the project 89
Materials - Heat sources overall table 399
Materials - Insulation 400 Undo - menu Edit 199
Materials - Insulation overall table 401 Unitary linear pressure drop R 455
Materials - Pipes 402 Using help - menu Help 258
Materials - Pipes overall table
Materials - Producers 404
403
-V-
Materials - Producers overall table 405 Variable
Materials - Water sources 408 Command Variables > Dimensions 229
Materials - Water sources overall table 409 Command Variables > Flows 230
Results - Accessories 409 Command Variables > Global 228
Results - Branches 411 Command Variables > Pressures 229
Command Variables > Temperatures 229
© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 466
Audytor H2O 1.5
Variable Save as DXF or DWG - menu File 183

Dialogue Variables 370
Variables 31
-X-
Variables - menu Data 227 Xp 457
Vector
graphics 455 -Z-
View 207, 212, 213, 217, 218, 219, 220, 221, 222, Zoom
223, 224 Previous scale - menu View 223
Menu View 206 Zoom - - menu View 221
Zoom - all - menu View 222
-W- Zoom - picture range - menu View 222
Washbasin 271 Zoom - window - menu View 222
Water source 455 Zoom + - menu View 221
Command Water sources - menu Results 236 Zoom dynamic - menu View 223
drawing 55
List 164
Numbering 136
Results 147
Table Data - Water sources 393
Table Materials - Water sources 408
Table Materials - Water sources overall table
409
Table Results - Water sources 426
Water sources - materials 241
Water sources - menu Results 236
Water sources table - materials 240
Watermeter 437
Window 218, 219, 220
Comand Align horizontally 254
Command Align vertically 254
Command Arrange icons 255
Command Cascade 253
Command Close all 257
Command Close window 256
Command Maximize 255
Command Minimize 255
Command Minimize all 256
Command Open windows list 257
Command Restore 255
Command Tiles 253
Data - Pictures 371
Edit block 373
Error list 373
Main program window 374
Menu Window 252
Plot preview 376
Print preview 376
Results - Pictures 378
title bar 456
Window title bar 456
Windows Bitmap 437
Windows Metafile 437
WMF (Windows Metafile) 93, 356, 437, 456
467 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

H2O15 Eng

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

H2O15 Eng

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

H2O15 Eng

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

Translated by Dagmara Strzeszewska

1 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

3 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 4

9.1 Dialogues ......................................................................................................................... 286

7 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 10

4. Entering data 21 - sequential stages of entering data step-by-step.

7. Menu structure 177 - explanation of all commands in the program's menu.

Dialogues - description of the program's dialogue windows.

Windows - description of the program's windows.

Tables - description of the program's tables.

Index - index of terms from this manual.

1.1 Technical support

SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 12

2.1 Entering data

In order to facilitate the process of entering data, the program enables:

simultaneous edition of more than one system element,

© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 14

2.2 Hydraulic calculations

Estimates calculation waterflow in the pipes.

2.3 Heat calculations

2.4 Data- and calculations results check

Correctness check for calculations results include among others:

agent pipe flow velocity,

15 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

2.5 Results presentation

© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 16

3 Using the program

3.1 Program work area

Program title bar Menu Toolbar

Draw ing functions

Draw ing properties

Tabs w ith draw ing

Main program window

© 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o. 18

3.2 Help system

In order to obtain help info you should:

Help info depends on the current context.

In many cases Windows help program is used to show help info.

See also: menu Help 257

3.3 Moving or copying project files

See also: menu File 178

19 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

Data in the program is:

General data 22 (for the whole system, to be entered as the first).

Next chapters focus in detail on entering data process.

See also: menu File 178 , menu Data 225

4.1 Creating new data file

See also: Entering data 21 - overview

menu File 178 , menu Data 225

21 © 1994 .. 2013 SANKOM Sp. z o.o.

4.2 General data

There are following tabs in the dialogue:

Data entering general data on the whole project,

Dialogue tabs have been described below: